the british library the united states and the 1930s a …/media/bl/global/eccles... ·...
TRANSCRIPT
1
THE BRITISH LIBRARY
THE UNITED STATES AND THE 1930SA SELECTIVE GUIDE TO MATERIALS IN THE BRITISH LIBRARY
BYANNE SHARP WELLS
THE ECCLES CENTRE FORAMERICAN STUDIES
2
INTRODUCTION
Amid political turmoil and social unrest, the United States underwent tremendouschanges during the 1930s. As the period began, domestic concerns related to the earlystages of the Great Depression absorbed the country. By the close of 1939, the nation'sinvolvement with international affairs had intensified, a course which would lead, inspite of strong isolationist sentiment, to formal participation in the Second World War. During the intervening period, Franklin D. Roosevelt succeeded Herbert C. Hooveras president and inaugurated the 'New Deal', a diverse collection of programs intendedto alleviate the impact of the depression. In addition to transforming the size and roleof the federal government, the New Deal affected institutions and individualsthroughout the country in programs ranging, for example, from the electrification ofrural homes to the establishment of the Social Security system to the reform of lawscovering Native Americans. The country's detailed examination of its economy,society and culture throughout the decade resulted in a large body of printed works,photographs and art.
The British Library holds a wealth of items, both contemporary and retrospective,about this important phase of United States history. This guide includes selectedpublications arranged by subject, geographical location or personal name. It does notcontain journal articles. Each citation ends with the shelfmark in parentheses. Thedesignation 'DSC' means that the work is held by the Document Supply Collections atBoston Spa but can be ordered for use at St. Pancras.
3
CONTENTS
I. BIBLIOGRAPHIES, ENCYCLOPEDIAS AND HISTORICAL DICTIONARIES
II. GENERAL STUDIES
III. GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
A. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
B. BIOGRAPHIES AND PERSONAL NARRATIVES
1. DEWEY, THOMAS E.
2. HOOVER, HERBERT
3. HOPKINS, HARRY
4. HULL, CORDELL
5. ICKES, HAROLD
6. LANDON, ALFRED M.
7. MORGENTHAU, HENRY
8. PERKINS, FRANCES
9. ROOSEVELT, ELEANOR
10. ROOSEVELT, FRANKLIN D.
11. STIMSON, HENRY L.
12. TUGWELL, REXFORD G.
13. WELLES, SUMNER
14. COLLECTIVE BIOGRAPHIES AND OTHER WORKS
C. PUBLIC OPINION
D. PRESIDENCY
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. HOOVER ADMINISTRATION
4
3. ROOSEVELT ADMINISTRATION/NEW DEAL
4. ELECTIONS
E. CONGRESS
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. HOUSE COMMITTEE ON UN-AMERICAN ACTIVITIES
F. FEDERALISM AND THE STATES
G. JUDICIAL AND LEGAL SYSTEM
H. FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
I. OPPOSITION PARTIES AND PROTEST MOVEMENTS [See alsoVIII.C. Foreign Relations: Isolationism, Pacifism and Neutrality]
1. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
2. BONUS MARCH
3. COMMUNISM [See also VIII.F.2.i. Foreign Relations: Union of Soviet Socialist Republics]
4. COUGHLIN, CHARLES E.
5. LONG, HUEY P. [See also VII.A.19. U.S. States: Louisiana]
6. SOCIALISM AND RADICALISM
7. STUDENT ACTIVISM
8. TOWNSEND MOVEMENT
IV. ECONOMY
A. GENERAL STUDIES
B. AGRICULTURE
C. BANKING AND MONETARY POLICY
D. ECONOMY AND FOREIGN AFFAIRS
E. FARM SECURITY ADMINISTRATION [See also VI.R. Cultural and Intellectual History: Photography]
5
F. INCOME, WAGES, COST OF LIVING, DISTRIBUTION OF WEALTH
G. INDUSTRY
H. LABOR/WORKERS
I. NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL RECOVERY ACT/NATIONAL RECOVERY ADMINISTRATION
J. NATURAL RESOURCES, PUBLIC WORKS AND CONSERVATION
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. CIVILIAN CONSERVATION CORPS
3. PARKS
4. TENNESSEE VALLEY AUTHORITY
K. RECONSTRUCTION FINANCE CORPORATION
L. SHARECROPPERS AND TENANT FARMERS
M. TAXATION
N. TRANSPORTATION AND TRAVEL
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. AIR TRANSPORTATION
3. AUTOMOBILES
4. RAILROADS
O. UTILITIES AND ENERGY
V. SOCIAL HISTORY
A. GENERAL STUDIES
B. CHILDREN AND YOUTH
C. CLOTHING
D. CRIME
6
1. GENERAL STUDIES [See also III.G.; H. Government and Politics: Judicial and Legal System; Federal Bureau of Investigation]
2. LINDBERGH KIDNAPPING
E. FAMILY
F. FOOD
G. HOUSING
H. PHILANTHROPY
I. POPULATION AND INTERNAL MIGRATION
J. PROHIBITION
K. RACIAL AND ETHNIC GROUPS
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. AFRICAN AMERICANS
a. GENERAL STUDIES
b. COMMUNISM
c. DRAMA, THEATRE AND MUSIC
d. FOREIGN AND MILITARY AFFAIRS
e. LABOR
3. HISPANICS
4. JEWS [See also IX.E. Foreign Relations: Immigration, Refugees, Jews and the Holocaust]
5. NATIVE AMERICANS
L. RURAL LIFE
M. TOWNS AND CITIES
N. WELFARE, RELIEF AND SOCIAL SECURITY
O. WOMEN
7
VI. CULTURAL AND INTELLECTUAL HISTORY
A. BIBLIOGRAPHIES AND GUIDES
B. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
C. ADVERTISING
D. ARCHITECTURE AND INDUSTRIAL DESIGN
E. CARTOONS: POLITICAL
F. DANCE
G. DRAMA AND THEATRE
H. EDUCATION
I. EXPOSITIONS AND WORLD FAIRS
1. GENERAL STUDY
2. CHICAGO CENTURY OF PROGRESSINTERNATIONAL EXPOSITION, 1933-1934
3. GOLDEN GATE INTERNATIONAL EXPOSITION, 1939
4. NEW YORK WORLD'S FAIR, 1939
J. FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT [See also VII. U.S. States,Regions and Territories]
K. FILM
L. JOURNALISM AND MASS MEDIA
1. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
2. RADIO [See also III.I.4. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Protest Movements: Coughlin, Charles E.]
M. LEISURE, RECREATION AND SPORTS
1. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
2. OLYMPICS
8
N. LIBRARIESO. LITERARY CRITICISM, COLLECTIONS AND MEMOIRS
P. MEDICINE AND HEALTH
Q. MUSIC
R. PHOTOGRAPHY
S. RELIGION [See also III.I.4. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Movements: Coughlin, Charles; V.K.4. Social History: Racial and Ethnic Groups: Jews]
T. SCIENCE
U. TECHNOLOGY AND TECHNOCRACY
VII. U.S. STATES, REGIONS AND TERRITORIES
A. STATES
1. ALABAMA
2. ALASKA see TERRITORIES
3. ARIZONA
4. ARKANSAS
5. CALIFORNIA
6. COLORADO
7. CONNECTICUT
8. DELAWARE
9. DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
10. FLORIDA
11. GEORGIA
12. HAWAII see TERRITORIES
13. IDAHO
14. ILLINOIS
9
15. INDIANA16. IOWA
17. KANSAS
18. KENTUCKY
19. LOUISIANA [See also III.I.5. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Protest Movements: Long, Huey P.]
20. MAINE
21. MARYLAND
22. MASSACHUSETTS
23. MICHIGAN
24. MINNESOTA
25. MISSISSIPPI
26. MISSOURI
27. MONTANA
28. NEBRASKA
29. NEVADA
30. NEW HAMPSHIRE
31. NEW JERSEY
32. NEW MEXICO
33. NEW YORK [See also VI.I.4. Cultural and Intellectual History: Expositions and World Fairs: New York World's Fair,1939]
34. NORTH CAROLINA
35. NORTH DAKOTA
36. OHIO
37. OKLAHOMA
38. OREGON
10
39. PENNSYLVANIA
40. RHODE ISLAND
41. SOUTH CAROLINA
42. SOUTH DAKOTA
43. TENNESSEE
44. TEXAS
45. UTAH
46. VERMONT
47. VIRGINIA
48. WASHINGTON
49. WEST VIRGINIA
50. WISCONSIN
51. WYOMING
B. REGIONAL STUDIES
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. MIDWEST AND WEST
3. SOUTH [See also IV.J.4. Economy: Tennessee Valley Authority]
C. TERRITORIES
1. GENERAL STUDIES
2. ALASKA
3. GUAM
4. HAWAII
5. PANAMA CANAL ZONE
6. PHILIPPINE ISLANDS
11
7. PUERTO RICO
8. VIRGIN ISLANDS
VIII. MILITARY AFFAIRS
IX. FOREIGN RELATIONS
A. GENERAL STUDIES
B. APPROACH TO ENTRY INTO SECOND WORLD WAR
C. ISOLATIONISM, PACIFISM AND NEUTRALITY
D. ARMAMENTS AND NAVAL LIMITATION
E. IMMIGRATION, REFUGEES, JEWS, AND THE HOLOCAUST [See also V.K.4. Social History: Racial and Ethnic Groups: Jews]
F. SPECIFIC AREAS
1. REGIONS
a. ASIA
b. EUROPE
c. MIDDLE EAST
d. WESTERN HEMISPHERE
2. COUNTRIES
a. CANADA
b. CUBA
c. FRANCE
d. GERMANY [See also VI.M.2. Cultural and IntellectualHistory: Leisure, Recreation and Sports: Olympics]
e. ITALY
f. MEXICO
g. SPAIN
12
h. TURKEYi. UNION OF SOVIET SOCIALIST REPUBLICS [See
also III.I.3. Government and Politics: Opposition Movements and Protest Movements: Communism]
j. UNITED KINGDOM
13
I. BIBLIOGRAPHIES, ENCYCLOPEDIAS AND HISTORICAL DICTIONARIES
BURKE, ROBERT E. and RICHARD LOWITT, comps. The New Era and the NewDeal, 1920-1940. Arlington Heights, Ill.: Harlan Davidson, 1981, 215 pp. (X.800/36391)
BURNS, RICHARD D. Herbert Hoover: A Bibliography of His Times and Presidency. Wilmington, Del.: Scholarly Resources, 1991, 247 pp. (DSC q95/10372)
GRAHAM, OTIS L., JR. and MEGHAN R. WANDER, eds. Franklin D. Roosevelt: His Life and Times: An Encyclopedic View. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1985, 483 pp. (DSC85/21712)
THE GREAT DEPRESSION: A HISTORICAL BIBLIOGRAPHY. Santa Barbara,Calif., and Oxford, England: ABC-Clio Information Services, 1984, 260 pp. (X.800/38943)
HIRATA, YOSHIHIKO. Prosperity, Great Depression and New Deal: A Bibliography ofAmerican Economy during the Interwar Period. Tokyo: Yushodo, 1972, 262 pp. (X.525/8134)
KYVIG, DAVID E. and MARY-ANN BLASIO, comps. New Day/New Deal: ABibliography of the Great American Depression, 1929-1941. New York and London: Greenwood, 1988, 306 pp. (2725.d.843)
O'BRIEN, PATRICK G. Herbert Hoover: A Bibliography. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Greenwood, 1993, 373 pp. (2725.g.1750)
OLSON, JAMES S. Historical Dictionary of the 1920s: From World War I to the NewDeal, 1919-1933. New York: Greenwood, 1988, 420 pp. (YA.1994.b.3488)
OLSON, JAMES S. Historical Dictionary of the New Deal: From Inauguration toPreparation for War. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1985, 611 pp. (DSC 89/11383)
STEWART, WILLIAM J., comp. The Era of Franklin D. Roosevelt: A SelectedBibliography of Periodical and Dissertation Literature, 1945-1966. Hyde Park, N.Y.: Franklin D. Roosevelt Library, 1967, 175 pp. (A.S.792/41)
STEWART, WILLIAM J., comp. The Era of Franklin D. Roosevelt: A SelectedBibliography of Periodical, Essay and Dissertation Literature, 1945-1971. Hyde Park, N.Y.: Franklin D. Roosevelt Library, 1974, 360 pp. (A.S.258/73; A.S.288/73)
TRACEY, KATHLEEN. Herbert Hoover: A Bibliography: His Writings and Addresses. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1977, 202 pp. (Ac:2692.nf/3(58))
II. GENERAL STUDIES
14
ALLEN, FREDERICK LEWIS. Since Yesterday: The Nineteen-thirties in America. London: Hamish Hamilton, London, 1940, 307 pp. (010410.a.31)
BASKERVILLE, STEPHEN W. and RALPH WILLET, eds. Nothing Else to Fear: New Perspectives on America in the Thirties. Manchester: Manchester University Press,1985, 294 pp. (X.809/67046; YH.1987.a.336)
BEARD, CHARLES A. America Faces the Future. Boston and New York: HoughtonMifflin, 1932, 416 pp. (08229.pp.8)
BEARD, CHARLES A. and MARY R. BEARD. America in Midpassage. London: Cape, 1939, 977 pp. (9605.i.3)
BEARD, CHARLES A. and GEORGE H. E. SMITH. The Old Deal and the New. New York: Macmillan, 1940, 294 pp. (08175.a.38)
BERNSTEIN, MICHAEL A. The Great Depression: Delayed Recovery and EconomicChange in America, 1929-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1987, 269pp. (YH.1988.b.453)
BRINKLEY, ALAN. The End of Reform: New Deal Liberalism in Recession and War. New York: Knopf, 1995, 371 pp. (DSC 95/15552)
BURG, DAVID F. The Great Depression: An Eyewitness History. New York: Factson File, 1996, 390 pp. (YK.1997.b.1769)
CASHMAN, SEAN D. America in the Twenties and Thirties: The Olympian Age ofFranklin Delano Roosevelt. New York and London: New York University Press, 1989,632 pp. (YH.1989.b.454)
CHAMBERS, CLARKE A., ed. The New Deal at Home and Abroad, 1929-1945. New York: Free Press; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1965, 273 pp. (X.0709/78.(9.))
CHANDLER, LESTER V. America's Greatest Depression, 1929-1941. New York: Harper and Row, 1970, 260 pp. (X.510/3016)
CHASE, STUART. The Road We Are Traveling, 1914-1942: Guide Lines to America'sFuture. New York: Twentieth Century Fund, 1946, 106 pp. (X.529/17179); reprint,New York: Greenwood, 1968, 106 pp. (X.809/20964)
CONGDON, DON, ed. The Thirties: A Time to Remember. New York: Simon andSchuster, 1962, 625 pp. (X.800/1525)
DUBOFSKY, MELVIN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. The Great Depression andthe New Deal. 2 vols. New York and London: Garland, 1990. (YC.1991.b.518;YC.1991.b.456)
DULLES, ELEANOR L. Depression and Reconstruction: A Study of Causes and Controls. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1936, 340 pp. (8232.bb.56)
15
FRASER, STEVE and GARY GERSTLE, eds. The Rise and Fall of the New DealOrder, 1930-1980. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1989, 311 pp. (YH.1990.b.233)
FRISCH, MORTON J. and MARTIN DIAMOND, eds. The Thirties: AReconsideration in the Light of the American Political Tradition. De Kalb: Northern IllinoisPress, 1968, 154 pp. (X.809/10290)
GORDON, COLIN. New Deals: Business, Labor and Politics in America, 1920-1935. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994, 329 pp. (YC.1995.a.371)
HEARN, CHARLES R. The American Dream in the Great Depression. Westport,Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 222 pp. (X.809/42700)
HILL, KIM Q. Democracies in Crisis: Public Policy Responses to the Great Depression. Boulder, Colo.: Westview, 1988, 147 pp. (DSC 89/01920)
KENNEDY, DAVID M. Freedom from Fear: The American People in Depression andWar, 1929-1945. New York: Oxford University Press, 1999, 936 pp. (YC.1999.b.4895)
KINDLEBERGER, CHARLES P. The World in Depression, 1929-1939. Rev. ed.,Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1987, 355 pp. (YC.1988.a.549)
LEIGHTON, ISABEL, ed. The Aspirin Age, 1919-41. London: Bodley Head, 1950,491 pp. (10414.bb.15); Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1964, 495 pp. (12208.a.1/2110)
LEUCHTENBURG, WILLIAM E. The Perils of Prosperity, 1914-32. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1958, 313 pp. (W.P.3542/6)
MCCOY, DONALD R. Coming of Age: The United States during the 1920's and1930's. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1973, 364 pp. (X.708/41406); Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1977, 364 pp. (X.708/21088; X.708/41406)
MCELVAINE, ROBERT S., ed. Down and Out in the Great Depression: Letters fromthe 'Forgotten Man'. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1983, 251 pp. (X.529/55566)
MCELVAINE, ROBERT S. The Great Depression: America, 1929-1941. New York: Times Books, 1984, 402 pp. (YH.1988.b.780)
MARQUIS, ALICE G. Hopes and Ashes: The Birth of Modern Times, 1929-1939. New York: Free Press; London: Collier Macmillan, 1986, 274 pp. (DSC 87/03546)
MELTZER, MILTON. Brother, Can You Spare a Dime? The Great Depression, 1929-1933. New York: Facts on File, 1991, 130 pp. (YC.1996.b.6590)
MITCHELL, BROADUS. Depression Decade: From New Era through New Deal, 1929-1941. New York and Toronto: Rinehart, 1955, 462 pp. (W.P.1734/9)
16
NASH, GERALD D. The Crucial Era: The Great Depression and World War II, 1929-1945. 2d ed., New York: St. Martin's Press, 1992, 213 pp. (YK.1993.a.14572)
PARRISH, MICHAEL E. Anxious Decades: America in Prosperity and Depression,1920-1941. New York: Norton, 1992, 529 pp. (YA.1993.b.6849)
PHILLIPS, CABELL. The New York Times Chronicle of American Life: From the Crashto the Blitz, 1929-1939. New York: Macmillan; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1969,596 pp. (X.0800/683)
ROBINSON, HENRY M. Fantastic Interim: A Hindsight History of American Manners,Morals and Mistakes between Versailles and Pearl Harbor. New York: Harcourt, Brace,1943, 341 pp. (10413.pp.22)
ROTHBARD, MURRAY N. America's Great Depression. Princeton, N.J.: VanNostrand, 1963, 361 pp. (08233.yy.5)
SCOTT, QUINCY. Best of Quincy Scott: A Picture Panorama of the TurbulentDepression and World War II Years. Portland, Ore.: Oregon Historical Society, 1980,196 pp. (DSC 81/21880)
SELDES, GILBERT. The Years of the Locust (America, 1929-1932). Boston: Little,Brown, 1933, 355 pp. (08223.ee.74)
SHANNON, DAVID A. Between the Wars: America, 1919-1941. 2d ed., Boston andLondon: Houghton Mifflin, 1979, 301 pp. (X.709/33191)
SHANNON, DAVID A., ed. The Great Depression. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1960, 171 pp. (8233.r.10)
SIMON, RITA J., ed. As We Saw the Thirties: Essays on Social and Political Movementsof a Decade. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1967, 253 pp. (X.709/6001)
SHERWIN, MARK and CHARLES L. MARKMANN. One Week in March. [March 1-7, 1933] New York: Putnam's, 1961, 254 pp. (09057.i.25)
SMITH, PAGE. Redeeming the Time: A People's History of the 1920's and the New Deal. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1987, 1205 pp. (DSC 89/12018)
STEARNS, HAROLD E., ed. America Now: An Inquiry into Civilization in the UnitedStates by Thirty-six Americans. New York and London: Scribner's, 1938, 606 pp. (010410.l.19)
STERNSHER, BERNARD, ed. Hitting Home: The Great Depression in Town andCountry. Rev. ed., Chicago: Ivan R. Dee, 1989, 289 pp. (DSC 90/14659)
STILLMAN, EDMUND. American Heritage History of the 1920's and 1930's. Reprint,New York: American Heritage/Bonanza Books, 1987, 416 pp. (YV.1989.b.1794)
17
TEMIN, PETER. Lessons from the Great Depression. Cambridge, Mass., and London: MIT Press, 1989, 193 pp. (YC.1991.a.3473)
TERKEL, STUDS, ed. Hard Times: An Oral History of the Great Depression. London: Allen Lane, 1970, 462 pp. (X.520/3328)
WATKINS, T. H. The Great Depression: America in the 1930s. Boston and London: Little, Brown: 1993, 375 pp. (YC.1995.a.2694)
WATKINS, T. H. The Hungry Years: A Narrative History of the Great Depression inAmerica. New York: Holt, 1999, 587 pp. (DSC 99/38063)
WECTER, DIXON. The Age of the Great Depression, 1929-1941. New York: Macmillan, 1948, 362 pp. (Mic.A.10110)
WERSTEIN, IRVING. A Nation Fights Back: The Depression and Its Aftermath. NewYork: Julian Messner, 1963, 191 pp. (X.519/3696)
III. GOVERNMENT AND POLITICS
A. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
ANDERSEN, KRISTI. After Suffrage: Women in Partisan and Electoral Politics before theNew Deal. Chicago and London: University of Chicago, 1996, 191 pp. (DSC96/26553)
ANDERSEN, KRISTI. The Creation of a Democratic Majority, 1928-1936. Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1979, 160 pp. (X.809/44756)
BUNCHE, RALPH J. The Political Status of the Negro in the Age of FDR. Edited byDewey W. Grantham. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1973, 682pp. (X.800/8791)
DONNELLY, THOMAS C., ed. Rocky Mountain Politics. Albuquerque: Universityof New Mexico Press, 1940, 340 pp. (X.800/42068)
DORSETT, LYLE W. The Pendergast Machine. New York: Oxford University Press,1968, 163 pp. (X.709/6593)
DOUGLAS, PAUL H. The Coming of a New Party. New York and London: McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1932, 236 pp. (08176.aa.37)
GARRETT, CHARLES. The La Guardia Years: Machine and Reform Politics in NewYork City. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1961, 423 pp. (X.709/799)GIESKE, MILLARD L. Minnesota Farmer-Laborism: The Third-Party Alternative. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1979, 398 pp. (X.520/30230)
18
GOSNELL, HAROLD F. Machine Politics: Chicago Model. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1937, 229 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36.(35.)); 2d ed., Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1968, 247 pp. (X.708/4456)
GOSNELL, HAROLD F. Negro Politicians: The Rise of Negro Politics in Chicago. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1935, 404 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36(33.)); Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1967, 396 pp. (X.709/5487)
HAYNES, JOHN E. Dubious Alliance: The Making of Minnesota's DFL Party. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984, 264 pp. (DSC 84/22325)
HEARD, ALEXANDER and DONALD S. STRONG. Southern Primaries andElections, 1920-1949. Freeport, N.Y.: Books for Libraries Press, 1970, 206 pp. (YA.1992.b.2826)
HICKS, JOHN D. Republican Ascendancy, 1921-1933. New York: Harper and Row,1963, 317 pp. (W.P.c.131/31); London: Hamish Hamilton, 1960, 318 pp.(W.P.c.131/18)
HUTHMACHER, JACOB J. Massachusetts People and Politics, 1919-1933. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1959, 328 pp. (9088.ff.8)
JENKIN, THOMAS P. Reactions of Major Groups to Positive Government in the UnitedStates, 1930-1940: A Study in Contemporary Political Thought. Berkeley and LosAngeles: University of California Press, 1945, 408 pp. (Ac.2689.g/55)
KELLEY, BEVERLY M., with JOHN J. PITNEY, CRAIG R. SMITH and HERBERT E. GOOCH III. Reelpolitik: Political Ideologies in '30s and '40s Films. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1998, 194 pp. (YC.1999.b.1138)
KUZNICK, PETER J. Beyond the Laboratory: Scientists as Political Activists in 1930sAmerica. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1987, 363 pp. (YK.1988.b.3806)
LAWSON, RICHARD A. The Failure of Independent Liberalism, 1930-1941. NewYork: Putnam's, 1971, 322 pp. (X.809/16890)
LEE, DAVID D. Tennessee in Turmoil: Politics in the Volunteer State, 1920-1932. Memphis, Tenn.: Memphis State University Press, 1979, 204 pp. (X.800/32229)
LIPPMANN, WALTER. The Good Society. London: Allen & Unwin, 1938, 402 pp. (08008.cc.66)
LIPPMANN, WALTER. The New Imperative. New York: Macmillan, 1935, 52 pp. (20020.c.53)LISIO, DONALD J. Hoover, Blacks and Lily-Whites: A Study of Southern Strategies. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 373 pp. (DSC 85/29520)
19
LORENCE, JAMES J. Gerald J. Boileau and the Progressive-Farmer-Labor Alliance: Politics of the New Deal. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1994,324 pp. (YC.1994.b.3865)
MCADAM, DOUG. Political Process and the Development of Black Insurgency, 1930-1970. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1982, 304 pp.(X.520/30314)
MATHEWS, THOMAS G. Puerto Rican Politics and the New Deal. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1960, 345 pp. (X.700/365)
MICHIE, ALLAN A. and FRANK RHYLICH. Dixie Demagogues. New York: Vanguard Press, 1939, 298 pp. (20033.b.25)
MILLER, JOHN E. Governor Philip F. La Follette, the Wisconsin Progressives and theNew Deal. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1982, 229 pp. (DSC 83/01017)
ORTQUIST, RICHARD T. Depression Politics in Michigan, 1929-1933. New Yorkand London: Garland, 1982, 276 pp. (YA.1986.b.3188)
PLOTKE, DAVID. Building a Democratic Political Order: Reshaping American Liberalismin the 1930s and 1940s. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996, 388 pp. (YC.1996.b.4379)
ROSENOF, THEODORE. Dogma, Depression and the New Deal: The Debate ofPolitical Leaders over Economic Recovery. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: KennikatPress, 1975, 155 pp. (X.529/30837)
SCHRIFTGIESSER, KARL. This Was Normalcy: An Account of Party Politics duringTwelve Republican Years, 1920-1932. Boston: Little, Brown, 1948, 325 pp. (08176.c.12)
TATUM, ELBERT L. The Changed Political Thought of the Negro, 1915-1940. Reprint, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1974, 205 pp. (X.809/21906)
WEED, CLYDE P. The Nemesis of Reform: The Republican Party during the New Deal. New York and Chichester: Columbia University Press, 1994, 293 pp. (YC.1996.b.3474)
WEISS, NANCY J. Farewell to the Party of Lincoln: Black Politics in the Age of FDR. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1983, 333 pp. (X.800/39339)
WHITE, LEONARD D. Trends in Public Administration. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 365 pp. (X.800/1629.(4.))
B. BIOGRAPHIES AND PERSONAL NARRATIVES
1. Dewey, Thomas E.
20
BEYER, BARRY K. Thomas E. Dewey, 1937-1947: A Study in Political Leadership. New York and London: Garland, 1979, 368 pp. (X.800/32107)
DEWEY, THOMAS E. The Case against the New Deal. New York and London: Harper, 1940, 165 pp. (08176.cc.4)
HUGHES, RUPERT. Thomas E. Dewey, Attorney for the People. London: Constable,1940, 315 pp. (10888.f.10)
SMITH, RICHARD NORTON. Thomas E. Dewey and His Times. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1984, 703 pp. (X.800/42288)
STOLBERG, MARY M. Fighting Organized Crime: Politics, Justice and the Legacy ofThomas E. Dewey. Boston: Northeastern University Press, 1995, 315 pp. (DSC95/35704)
2. Hoover, Herbert C.
BEST, GARY D. Herbert Hoover: The Postpresidential Years, 1933-1964. 2 vols. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1983, 522 pp. (YH.1987.b.151)
BURNER, DAVID. Herbert Hoover: A Public Life. New York: Knopf, 1979, 433pp. (X.800/30710)
DODGE, MARK M., ed. Herbert Hoover and the Historians: Essays. West Branch,Iowa: Herbert Hoover Presidential Library Association, 1989, 141 pp. (DSC95/32100)
EMERSON, EDWIN. Hoover and His Times: Looking Back through the Years. GardenCity, N.Y.: Garden City Pub. Co., 1932, 632 pp. (10881.pp.21)
HOOVER, HERBERT C. Addresses upon the American Road, 1933-1938. NewYork: Scribner's, 1938, 390 pp. (20033.c.15)
HOOVER, HERBERT C. The Challenge to Liberty. New York and London: Scribner's, 1934, 212 pp. (8004.e.26)
HOOVER, HERBERT C. Further Addresses upon the American Road, 1938-1940. New York: Scribner's, 1940, 265 pp. (12302.b.1)
HOOVER, HERBERT C. The Memoirs of Herbert Hoover. 3 vols. London: Hollis &Carter, 1952. (X.809/19057)HOOVER, HERBERT C. Shall We Send Our Youth to War? New York: Coward-McCann, 1939, 36 pp. (8011.aa.3)
JOSLIN, THEODORE G. Hoover Off the Record. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday,Doran, 1934, 367 pp. (010885.eee.14)
21
LOCHNER, LOUIS P. Herbert Hoover and Germany. New York: Macmillan, 1960,244 pp. (9196.1.27)
LYONS, EUGENE. Our Unknown Ex-President: A Portrait of Herbert Hoover. GardenCity, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1949, 340 pp. (10889.bb.22)
MYERS, WILLIAM S., ed. The State Papers and Other Public Writings of HerbertHoover. Edited by William S. Myers. 2 vols. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran,1934. (012295.c.6)
NASH, LEE, ed. Understanding Herbert Hoover: Ten Perspectives. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1987, 196 pp. (YA.1989.b.7887)
NYE, FRANK T. Doors of Opportunity: The Life and Legacy of Herbert Hoover. WestBranch, Iowa: Herbert Hoover Presidential Library Association, 1988, 445 pp. (YA.1992.b.1539)
ROBINSON, EDGAR E. and VAUGHN D. BORNET. Herbert Hoover, President ofthe United States. Stanford, Calif.: Hoover Institution Press, 1975, 398 pp. (X.800/26317; X.800/42789)
SMITH, RICHARD N. An Uncommon Man: The Triumph of Herbert Hoover. NewYork: Simon and Schuster, 1984, 488 pp. (DSC 84/18482)
WILSON, JOAN HOFF. Herbert Hoover: Forgotten Progressive. Boston: Little,Brown, 1975, 307 pp. (X.708/22232)
WOOD, CLEMENT. Herbert Clark Hoover: An American Tragedy. New York: Michael Swain, 1932, 330 pp. (010885.ee.18)
3. Hopkins, Harry L.
ADAMS, HENRY H. Harry Hopkins: A Biography. New York: Putnam, 1977, 448pp. (X.800/14973)
CHARLES, SEARLE F. Minister of Relief: Harry Hopkins and the Depression. Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press, 1963, 286 pp. (X.519/3542)
HOPKINS, HARRY L. Spending to Save: The Complete Story of Relief. Seattle andLondon: University of Washington Press, 1972, 197 pp. (X.529/15526)
MCJIMSEY, GEORGE. Harry Hopkins: Ally of the Poor and Defender of Democracy. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1987, 474 pp. (YH.1988.b.484)
4. Hull, Cordell
22
BUTLER, MIC HAEL A. Cautious Visionary: Cordell Hull and Trade Reform, 1933-1937. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1998, 240 pp. (DSC98/29466)
GELLMAN, IRWIN F. Secret Affairs: Franklin D. Roosevelt, Cordell Hull and SumnerWelles. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1995, 499 pp. (YC.1995.b.4950)
HULL, CORDELL. The Memoirs of Cordell Hull. 2 vols. London: Hodder &Stoughton, 1948. (10890.f.14)
PRATT, JULIUS W. Cordell Hull, 1933-1944. 2 vols. New York: Cooper SquarePub., 1974, 840 pp. (X.0709/218.(12.); X.0709/218.(13.); X.709/3773)
RIGGS, A. R. and TOM VELK. Cordell Hull, The New Deal and Inter-American Trade. Montreal: Dept. of Economics, McGill University, 1993, 17 pp. (DSC 9349.73832/93)
5. Ickes, Harold L.
CLARKE, JEANNE N. Roosevelt's Warrior: Harold L. Ickes and the New Deal. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1996, 414 pp.(YC.1996.b.2589)
ICKES, HAROLD L. The Autobiography of a Curmudgeon. New York: Reynal &Hitchcock, 1943, 350 pp. (10890.bb.11)
ICKES, HAROLD L. Back to Work: The Story of PWA. New York: Macmillan, 1935, 276 pp. (8287.a.34)
ICKES, HAROLD L. The Secret Diary of Harold L. Ickes. 3 vols. London: Weidenfeld& Nicolson, 1955. (W.P.d.134); A Reader's Guide to the People in The Secret Diary ofHarold L. Ickes. (W.P.d.134a)
WATKINS, T. H. Righteous Pilgrim: The Life and Times of Harold L. Ickes, 1874-1952. New York: Holt, 1990, 1010 pp. (YA.1993.b.4598)
WHITE, GRAHAM and JOHN MAZE. Harold Ickes of the New Deal: His Private Lifeand Public Career. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1985,263 pp. (YC.1988.b.6096)
6. Landon, Alfred M.
MCCOY, DONALD R. Landon of Kansas. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press,1966, 607 pp. (X.800/4189)
LANDON, ALFRED M. America at the Crossroads: Alfred M. Landon's Program forAmerican Government, His Interpretation of the Political, Economic and Social Principles of the
23
Republican Party. Reprint, Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press,1971, 95 pp. (X.809/10427)
PALMER, FREDERICK. This Man Landon: The Record and Career of Governor AlfredM. Landon of Kansas. Rev. ed., New York: Dodd, Mead, 1936, 332 pp. (X.808/9024)
7. Morgenthau, Henry
BLUM, JOHN M. From the Morgenthau Diaries. Vol. 1, Years of Crisis, 1928-1938. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1959, 583 pp. (8221.e.6); Vol. 2, Years of Urgency, 1938-1941.. Cambridge, Mass.: Riverside Press; Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1965, 443 pp. (X.709/4529)
EVEREST, ALLAN S. Morgenthau, the New Deal and Silver: A Story of Pressure Politics. New York: King's Crown Press, Columbia University, 1950, 209 pp. (8177.1.15)
8. Perkins, Frances
MARTIN, GEORGE. Madam Secretary: Frances Perkins. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1976, 589 pp. (X.800/28712)
MOHR, LILLIAN H. Frances Perkins: That Woman in FDR's Cabinet! Croton-on-Hudson, N.Y.: North River Press, 1979, 328 pp. (X.800/36983)
PERKINS, FRANCES. The Roosevelt I Knew. New York: Viking, 1946, 408 pp. (10888.c.28); New York and London: Harper and Row, 1964, 409 pp. (X.709/2776)
9. Roosevelt, Anna Eleanor
BEASLEY, MAURINE. The White House Press Conferences of Eleanor Roosevelt. NewYork and London: Garland, 1983, 354 pp. (X.809/59952)
COOK, BLANCHE WIESEN. Eleanor Roosevelt. Vol. 1, 1884-1933. London: Bloomsbury, 1993. (YC.1993.b.7942)
HOFF-WILSON, JOAN and MARJORIE LIGHTMAN, eds. Without Precedent: The Life and Career of Eleanor Roosevelt. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1984,266 pp. (YA.1988.b.662)
LASH, JOSEPH. Eleanor and Franklin: The Story of Their Relationship, Based on EleanorRoosevelt's Private Papers. London: Deutsch, 1972, 765 pp. (X.800/6619)
ROOSEVELT, ANNA ELEANOR. This is My Story. New York and London: Harper, 1937, 365 pp. (Cup.407.d.12); The Lady of the White House: AnAutobiography. London: Hutchinson, 1938, 287 pp. (010883.ff.40); London: Hutchinson, 1938, 184 pp. (10888.a.18)
24
SCHARF, LOIS. Eleanor Roosevelt: First Lady of American Liberalism. Boston: Twayne, 1987, 202 pp. (YC.1991.b.3285)
YOUNGS, J. WILLIAM T. Eleanor Roosevelt: A Personal and Private Life. Edited byOscar Handlin. Boston: Little, Brown, 1985, 246 pp. (DSC 85/12463)
10. Roosevelt, Franklin D.
ABBOTT, PHILIP. The Exemplary Presidency: Franklin D. Roosevelt and the AmericanPolitical Tradition. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1990, 233 pp. (YC.1991.a.490)
ALSOP, JOSEPH. FDR, 1882-1945: The Life and Times of Franklin D. Roosevelt. London: Thames and Hudson, 1982, 255 pp. (X.805/2224)
BUHITE, RUSSELL D. and DAVID W. LEVY, eds. FDR's Fireside Chats. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1992, 326 pp. (YC.1993.b.6057)
BURNS, JAMES MACGREGOR. Roosevelt: The Lion and the Fox. London: Secker & Warburg, 1956, 553 pp. (10892.b.24)
DAVIS, KENNETH S. FDR, Into the Storm, 1937-1940: A History. New York: Random House, 1993, 691 pp. (YA.1995.b.4215)
DAVIS, KENNETH S. FDR: The New Deal Years, 1933-1937. New York: Random House, 1986, 756 pp. (DSC 86/25230)
DAVIS, KENNETH S. FDR: The New York Years, 1928-1933. New York: Random House, 1985, 512 pp. (DSC 86/03601)
FREIDEL, FRANK. F.D.R. and the South. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State UniversityPress, 102 pp. (X.708/3048)
FREIDEL, FRANK. Franklin D. Roosevelt. 4 vols. Boston: Little, Brown, 1952-1973. (X.809/19213)
FREIDEL, FRANK. Franklin D. Roosevelt: A Rendezvous of Destiny. Boston: Little,Brown, 1990, 710 pp. (YA.1991.b.6231)
GORDENKER, LEON and J. W. SCHULTE NORDHOLT. FDR's Place in Pastand Present: An Evaluation Forty Years After His Death. Middelburg, Netherlands: Roosevelt Study Center, 1986, 23 pp. (YA.1994.a.10549)
GREER, THOMAS H. What Roosevelt Thought: The Social and Political Ideas ofFranklin D. Roosevelt. London: Angus & Robertson; East Lansing: Michigan StateUniversity Press, 1958, 244 pp. (8178.c.24)
HALASZ, NICHOLAS. Roosevelt Through Foreign Eyes. Princeton, N.J.: VanNostrand, 1961, 340 pp. (10866.cc.26)
25
JOHNSON, GERALD W. Roosevelt: An American Study. London: HamishHamilton, 1942, 228 pp. (10889.b.2)
JONES, ALFRED H. Roosevelt's Image Brokers: Poets, Playwrights and the Use of theLincoln Symbol. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: National UniversityPublications, Kennikat Press, 1974, 134 pp. (X.809/20378)
LEUCHTENBURG, WILLIAM E. The FDR Years: On Roosevelt and His Legacy.New York and Chichester: Columbia University Press, 1995, 377 pp.(YC.1996.b.4686)
MANEY, PATRICK J. The Roosevelt Presence: The Life and Legacy of FDR. Berkeleyand London: University of California Press, 1998, 255 pp. (YC.1998.a.4955)
MATLOFF, MAURICE. Mr. Roosevelt's Three Wars: FDR as War Leader. ColoradoSprings, Colo.: U.S. Air Force Academy, 1964, 21 pp. (A.S.1030/4)
MILLER, NATHAN. FDR: An Intimate History. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday,1983, 563 pp. (X.800/40780)
MINNEN, CORNELIS A. VAN and JOHN F. SEARS, eds. FDR and HisContemporaries: Foreign Perceptions of an American President. Basingstoke: Macmillan,1992, 248 pp. (YC.1993.a.919)
MORGAN, TED. FDR: A Biography. London: Grafton, 1986, 830 pp. (YC.1986.b.1566; YC.1988.a.10534)
PERKINS, DEXTER. The New Age of Franklin Roosevelt, 1932-45. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1957, 193 pp. (W.P.3542/3)
ROBINSON, EDGAR E. The Roosevelt Leadership, 1933-1945. Philadelphia andNew York: Lippincott, 1955, 491 pp. (8178.b.1)
ROOSEVELT, ELLIOTT, ed. As He Saw It. New York: Duell, Sloan & Pearce,1946, 270 pp. (9103.k.34)
ROOSEVELT, ELLIOTT, ed. The Roosevelt Letters, Being the Personal Correspondenceof Franklin Delano Roosevelt. 3 vols. London: Harrap, 1949-1952. (10922.dd.23)
ROOSEVELT, ELLIOTT and JAMES BROUGH. A Rendezvous with Destiny: TheRoosevelts of the White House. London: W. H. Allan, 1977, 446 pp. (X.809/42271)
ROOSEVELT, FRANKLIN D. Looking Forward. London: William Heinemann,1933, 279 pp. (08176.a.39; X.529/16581)
ROOSEVELT, FRANKLIN D. On Our Way. New York: John Day, 1934, 300 pp. (08176.a.45)
26
ROSENBAUM, HERBERT D. and ELIZABETH BARTELME, eds. Franklin D.Roosevelt: The Man, the Myth, the Era, 1882-1945. New York and London: Greenwood, 1987, 411 pp. (YH.1988.b.1347)
ROSENMAN, SAMUEL I., ed. The Public Papers and Addresses of Franklin D.Roosevelt. 13 vols. New York: Random House, 1938-1950. (012296.e.4)
ROSENMAN, SAMUEL I. Working with Roosevelt. London: Rupert Hart-Davis,1952, 510 pp. (10890.fff.20)
RYAN, HALFORD R. Franklin D. Roosevelt's Rhetorical Presidency. New York andLondon: Greenwood, 1988, 206 pp. (YC.1988.b.7450)
SAVAGE, SEAN J. Roosevelt: the Party Leader, 1932-1945. Lexington: UniversityPress of Kentucky, 1991, 232 pp. (DSC 91/16437)
SCHLESINGER, ARTHUR M. The Age of Roosevelt. 3 vols. London: Heinemann,1957-1961. (W.P.5889/2(1-3))
THOMPSON, KENNETH W., ed. The Roosevelt Presidency: Four Intimate Perspectivesof FDR. Washington, D.C.: University Press of America, 1982, 85 pp. (DSC6555.869 no 1)
VENN, FIONA. Franklin D. Roosevelt. London: Cardinal, 1990, 139 pp. (YC.1990.a.8934)
WHITE, GRAHAM. FDR and the Press. Chicago and London: University ofChicago Press, 1979, 186 pp. (X.809/44494)
WINFIELD, BETTY H. FDR and the News Media. Urbana: University of IllinoisPress, 1990, 276 pp. (YA.1993.b.6235); New York and Chichester: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1994, 276 pp. (YC.1995.a.4833)
ZEVIN, B. D., ed. Nothing to Fear: The Selected Addresses of Franklin Delano Roosevelt,1932-1945. London: Hodder & Stoughton, 1947, 470 pp. (12302.bb.152)
11. Stimson, Henry L.
CURRENT, RICHARD N. Secretary Stimson: A Study in Statecraft. NewBrunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1954, 272 pp. (10892.bb.42)FERRELL, ROBERT H. Frank B. Kellogg-Henry L. Stimson. New York: CooperSquare Pub., 1963, 360 pp. (X.0709/218)
HODGSON, GODFREY. The Colonel: The Life and Wars of Henry Stimson, 1867-1950. New York: Knopf, 1990, 402 pp. (YA.1993.b.5314)
MORISON, ELTING E. Turmoil and Tradition: A Study of the Life and Times of HenryL. Stimson. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1960, 686 pp. (10865.gg.6)
27
STIMSON, HENRY L. The Far Eastern Crisis: Recollections and Observations. NewYork and London: Harper, 1936, 293 pp. (9059.cc.26)
STIMSON, HENRY L. and MCGEORGE BUNDY. On Active Service in Peace andWar. London: Hutchinson, 1949, 422 pp. (10891.bb.12); New York: Harper, 1948,689 pp. (10891.c.12)
12. Tugwell, Rexford G.
NAMORATO, MICHAEL V. Rexford G. Tugwell: A Biography. New York andLondon: Praeger, 1988, 192 pp. (YC.1988.b.7838)
STERNSHER, BERNARD. Rexford Tugwell and the New Deal. New Brunswick,N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1964, 535 pp. (X.510/1167)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. The Art of Politics, as Practiced by Three Great Americans: Franklin Delano Roosevelt, Luis Munoz Marin and Fiorello H. La Guardia. Garden City,N.Y.: Doubleday, 1958, 295 pp. (8025.ddd.8)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. The Battle for Democracy. New York: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1935, 330 pp. (20018.g.17)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. The Diary of Rexford G. Tugwell: The New Deal, 1932-1935. Edited by Michael V. Namorato. New York and London: Greenwood, 1992,525 pp. (YC.1992.b.4357)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. FDR: Architect of an Era. New York: Macmillan,1967, 270 pp. (X.709/5348)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. The Industrial Discipline and the Governmental Arts. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1933, 241 pp. (20017.c.4)
13. Welles, Sumner
GELLMAN, IRWIN F. Secret Affairs: Franklin D. Roosevelt, Cordell Hull and SumnerWelles. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1995, 499 pp. (YC.1995.b.4950)
GRAFF, FRANK W. Strategy of Involvement: A Diplomatic Biography of Sumner Welles. New York and London: Garland, 1988, 459 pp. (YC.1991.b.3162)WELLES, BENJAMIN. Sumner Welles: FDR's Global Strategist: A Biography. NewYork: St. Martin's Press, 1997, 437 pp. (YC.1988.b.1399)
14. Collective Biographies and Other Works
ALSOP, JOSEPH W. and ROBERT KINTNER. Men around the President. NewYork: Doubleday, Doran, 1939, 212 pp. (10888.a.9)
28
BARBER, JAMES G. and FREDERICK S. VOSS. Portraits from the New Deal. Washington, D.C.: published for the National Portrait Gallery by SmithsonianInstitution Press, 1983, 40 pp. (YV.1987.b.790)
COLE, WAYNE S. Senator Gerald P. Nye and American Foreign Relations. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1963, 293 pp. (9317.i.13)
DAVIS, POLLY A. Alben W. Barkley: Senate Majority Leader and Vice President. London and New York: Garland, 1979, 343 pp. (X.809/49809)
FARLEY, JAMES A. Behind the Ballots: The Personal History of a Politician. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1938, 392 pp. (20034.b.20)
FARLEY, JAMES A. Jim Farley's Story: The Roosevelt Years. New York and Toronto: Whittlesey House, 1948, 388 pp. (X.700/3035)
FINE, SIDNEY. Frank Murphy. 3 vols. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press,1975-1984. (X.0809/644)
FRANKFURTER, FELIX. Felix Frankfurter Reminiscences. New York: Reynal,1969, 310 pp. (10818.p.12; 10866.ff.37)
FRANKFURTER, FELIX. From the Diaries of Felix Frankfurter. New York: Norton,1975, 366 pp. (X.800/11115)
HUTHMACHER, JACOB J. Senator Robert F. Wagner and the Rise of UrbanLiberalism. New York: Atheneum, 1968, 362 pp. (X.800/5515)
JAMES, MARQUIS. Mr. Garner of Texas. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill., 1939, 158 pp. (10888.b.18)
ISRAEL, FRED L. Nevada's Key Pittman. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press,1963, 210 pp. (X.800/1794)
JOHNSON, CLAUDIUS O. Borah of Idaho. New York and Toronto: Longmans,1936, 511 pp. (010885.g.37); Seattle and London: University of Washington Press,1967, 511 p. (X.709/6849)
LIBBEY, JAMES K. Dear Alben: Mr. Barkley of Kentucky. Lexington: UniversityPress of Kentucky, 1979, 118 pp. (X.809/48914)
LOWITT, RICHARD. George W. Norris: The Persistence of a Progressive, 1913-1933. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1971, 590 pp. (X.800/6696)
LOWITT, RICHARD. George W. Norris: The Triumph of a Progressive, 1933-1944. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1978, 493 pp. (X.800/35892)
29
MCFARLAND, KEITH D. Harry H. Woodring: A Political Biography of FDR'sControversial Secretary of War. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1975, 346 pp. (X.800/28060)
MCKENNA, MARIAN C. Borah. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1961,450 pp. (10865.m.20)
MADDOX, ROBERT J. William E. Borah and American Foreign Policy. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1969, 272 pp. (X.809/10112)
MAY, IRVIN M. Marvin Jones: The Public Life of an Agrarian Advocate. CollegeStation: Texas A&M University Press, 1980, 296 pp. (X.800/41195)
MOLEY, RAYMOND. After Seven Years. New York: Harper, 1939, 446 pp. (X.809/18095; Mic.A.9219)
MOONEY, BOOTH. Roosevelt and Rayburn: A Political Partnership. Philadelphia andNew York: Lippincott, 1971, 228 pp. (X.809/15693)
NEWMAN, ROGER K. Hugo Black: A Biography. 2d ed., New York: FordhamUniversity Press, 1997, 741 pp. (YC.1999.a.3439)
NORDIN, DENNIS S. The New Deal's Black Congressman: A Life of Arthur WergsMitchell. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1997, 320 pp. (YC.1998.b.362)
OHL, JOHN K. Hugh S. Johnson and the New Deal. De Kalb: Northern IllinoisUniversity Press, 1985, 374 pp. (DSC 86/08043)
ROLLINS, ALFRED B. Roosevelt and Howe. New York: Knopf, 1962, 479 pp. (X.709/2783)
ROOSEVELT, FRANKLIN D. Roosevelt and Frankfurter: Their Correspondence, 1928-1945. London: Bodley Head, 1968, 772 pp. (X.700/3081)
SALMOND, JOHN A. A Southern Rebel: The Life and Times of Aubrey WillisWilliams, 1890-1965. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1983, 337 pp. (YA.1986.b.226)
SANDILANDS, ROGER J. The Life and Political Economy of Lauchlin Currie: NewDealer, Presidential Adviser and Development Economist. Durham: Duke University Press,1990, 441 pp. (YA.1993.b.7882)
SCHACHT, JOHN N., ed. Three Progressives from Iowa: Gilbert N. Haugen, Herbert C.Hoover, Henry A. Wallace. Iowa City, Iowa: Centre for the Study of the RecentHistory of the United States, 1980, 80 pp. (X.800/37834)
SHERWOOD, ROBERT E. Roosevelt and Hopkins: An Intimate History. New York: Harper, 1948, 979 pp. (X.709/4347)
30
SMITH, T. V. and ROBERT A. TAFT. Foundations of Democracy: A Series ofDebates. New York: Knopf, 1939, 346 pp. (Mic.A.17179)
STILES, LELA. The Man Behind Roosevelt: The Story of Louis McHenry Howe. Cleveland: World, 1954, 311 pp. (10892.dd.32)
SWAIN, MARTHA H. Ellen S. Woodward: New Deal Advocate for Women. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1995, 275 pp. (YC.1996.b.6704)
SWAIN, MARTHA H. Pat Harrison: The New Deal Years. Jackson: University Pressof Mississippi, 1978, 316 pp. (X.809/49765)
TAFT, ROBERT A. The Papers of Robert A. Taft. Vol. 1, 1889-1939. Edited byClarence Wunderlin, Jr. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1997,620 pp. (YC.1998.b.3610)
TIMMONS, BASCOM N. Garner of Texas: A Personal History. New York: Harper,1948, 249 pp. (Mic.A.18190)
TOMPKINS, C. DAVID. Senator Arthur H. Vandenberg: The Evolution of a ModernRepublican, 1884-1945. East Lansing: Michigan State University Press, 1970, 312 pp. (X.800/7593)
WALLACE, HENRY A. America Must Choose: The Advantages and Disadvantages ofNationalism, of World Trade and of a Planned Middle Course. New York: Foreign PolicyAssociation; Boston: World Peace Foundation, 1934, 33 pp. (X.510/993)
WALLACE, HENRY A. New Frontiers. London: Hamish Hamilton; New York: Reynal & Hitchcock, 1936, 314 pp. (8231.c.27)
C. PUBLIC OPINION
CANTRIL, HADLEY and MILDRED STRUNK. Public Opinion, 1935-1946. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1951, 1191 pp. (8289.k.5)
GALLUP, GEORGE H. The Gallup Poll: Public Opinion, 1935-1971. New York: Random House, 1972. (Mic.A.17309)
LEIGH, MICHAEL. Mobilizing Consent: Public Opinion and American Foreign Policy,1937-1947. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 187 pp. (X.809/42070)
D. PRESIDENCY
1. General Studies
CORWIN, EDWARD S. The Presidency: Office and Powers: History and Analysis ofPractice and Opinion. 2d ed., New York: New York University Press, 1941, 476 pp. (Ac.2686.ca.(4.))
31
JOHNSON, WALTER. 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue: Presidents and the People, 1929-1959. Boston and Toronto: Little, Brown, 1960, 390 pp. (09080.b.85)
ROSEN, ELLIOT A. Hoover, Roosevelt and the Brains Trust: From Depression to NewDeal. New York and Guildford: Columbia University Press, 1977, 446 pp. (X.800/26299)
WALCH, TIMOTHY and DWIGHT M. MILLER, eds. Herbert Hoover and FranklinD. Roosevelt: A Documentary History. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood,1998, 221 pp. (YC.1998.b.4150)
2. Hoover Administration
BARBER, WILLIAM J. From New Era to New Deal: Herbert Hoover, the Economistsand American Economic Policy, 1921-1933. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,1985, 237 pp. (YC.1998.b.2016)
DARLING, JAY N. As Ding Saw Herbert Hoover. Ames: Iowa State University Press,1996, 144 pp. (YA.1998.a.12272)
FAULKNER, HAROLD U. From Versailles to the New Deal: A Chronicle of theHarding-Coolidge-Hoover Era. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1950, 388pp. (X.709/1384.(51.))
FAUSOLD, MARTIN L., ed. The Hoover Presidency: A Reappraisal. Albany: StateUniversity of New York Press, 1974, 224 pp. (X.800/26765)
FAUSOLD, MARTIN L. The Presidency of Herbert C. Hoover. Lawrence: UniversityPress of Kansas, 1985, 288 pp. (YA.1990.b.3628)
KROG, CARL E. and WILLIAM R. TANNER, eds. Herbert Hoover and theRepublican Era: A Reconsideration. Lanham, Md., and London: University Press ofAmerica, 1984, 268 pp. (X.809/66274)
LIEBOVICH, LOUIS. Bylines in Despair: Herbert Hoover, the Great Depression, and theU.S. News Media. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1994, 223 pp. (YC.1994.b.6954)
MYERS, WILLIAM S. The Foreign Policies of Herbert Hoover, 1929-1933. New Yorkand London: Scribner's, 1940, 259 pp. (08004.ee.59)
MYERS, WILLIAM S. and WALTER H. NEWTON. The Hoover Administration: ADocumented Narrative. New York and London: Scribner's, 1936, 553 pp. (20020.d.9)
OLSON, JAMES S. Herbert Hoover and the Reconstruction Finance Corporation, 1931-1933. Ames: Iowa State University Press, 1977, 246 pp. (X.950/30416)
32
ROMASCO, ALBERT U. The Poverty of Abundance: Hoover, the Nation, theDepression. New York: Oxford University Press, 1965, 282 pp. (X.519/2157)
SCHWARZ, JORDAN A. The Interregnum of Despair: Hoover, Congress and theDepression. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1970, 281 pp. (X.520/3937)
SOBEL, ROBERT. Herbert Hoover at the Onset of the Great Depression, 1929-1930. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1975, 113 pp. (X.709/33831)
WARREN, HARRIS G. Herbert Hoover and the Great Depression. New York: Oxford University Press, 1959, 372 pp. (9617.g.29)
WILSON, JOHN R. M. Herbert Hoover and the Armed Forces: A Study of PresidentialAttitudes and Policy. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 275 pp. (YC.1993.b.5264)
WOODDY, CARROLL H. The Growth of the Federal Government, 1915-1932. NewYork and London: McGraw-Hill, 1934, 577 pp. (X.800/1629.(12.))
3. Roosevelt Administration/New Deal
ADAMS, D. K. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the New Deal. London: HistoricalAssociation, 1979, 40 pp. (WP.3175/96)
ALLSWANG, JOHN M. The New Deal and American Politics: A Study in PoliticalChange. New York and Chichester: Wiley, 1978, 155 pp. (X.529/32767)
BADGER, Anthony J. The New Deal: The Depression Years, 1933-1940. Basingstoke: Macmillan Education, 1989, 392 pp. (DSC 89/28131)
BAILEY, STANLEY H. Mr. Roosevelt's Experiments. London: L. and Virginia Woolfat the Hogarth Press, 1935, 48 pp. (012211.bb.1/24)
BEARD, CHARLES A. and GEORGE H. E. SMITH. The Future Comes: A Study ofthe New Deal. New York: Macmillan, 1933, 178 pp. (08207.e.59)
BEST, GARY D. The Critical Press and the New Deal: The Press versus PresidentialPower, 1933-1938. Westport, Conn.: Praeger, 1993, 198 pp. (DSC 93/10729)
BEST, GARY D. Pride, Prejudice and Politics: Roosevelt versus Recovery, 1933-1938. New York and London: Praeger, 1991, 267 pp. (YC.1991.b.1715)BILES, ROGER. A New Deal for the American People. De Kalb: Northern IllinoisUniversity Press, 1991, 274 pp. (DSC 92/12245)
BROGAN, DENIS W. The Era of Franklin D. Roosevelt: A Chronicle of the New Dealand Global War. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1950, 382 pp.(X.709/1384.(52.)); Roosevelt and the New Deal. London: Oxford University Press,1952, 259 pp. (10889.aa.45)
33
CARTER, JOHN F. The New Dealers. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1934, 414pp. (X.800/9380)
CLAWSON, MARION. New Deal Planning: The National Resources Planning Board. Baltimore, Md., and London: published for Resources for the Future by JohnsHopkins University Press, 1981, 356 pp. (X.520/25283)
COHEN, WILBUR J.,ed. The New Deal Fifty Years After: A Historical Assessment. Austin, Tex.: Lyndon Baines Johnson Library, 1984, 154 pp. (DSC 86/15672)
CONKIN, PAUL K. FDR and the Origins of the Welfare State. New York: Crowell,1967, 118 pp. (X.529/11337)
CONKIN, PAUL K. The New Deal. 3rd ed., Arlington Heights, Ill.: HarlanDavidson, 1992, 122 pp. (DSC 92/13025)
DICKINSON, MATTHEW J. Bitter Harvest: FDR, Presidential Power and the Growthof the Presidential Branch. Cambridge and New York: Cambridge University Press,1997, 267 pp. (YC.1997.b.2654)
DAYNES, BYRON W., WILLIAM D. PEDERSON and MICHAEL P.RICCARDS, eds. The New Deal and Public Policy. London: Macmillan, 1998, 293pp. (YC.1998.a.1771)
DORSETT, LYLE W. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the City Bosses. Port Washington,N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1977, 134 pp. (X.809/42933)
EDEN, ROBERT, ed. The New Deal and Its Legacy: Critique and Reappraisal. NewYork and London: Greenwood, 1989, 263 pp. (YC.1989.b.7468)
EINAUDI, MARIO. The Roosevelt Revolution. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1959;London: Constable, 1960, 372 pp. (8025.b.8; 9088.g.15)
ELIOT, THOMAS H. and THOMAS HOPKINSON Recollections of the New Deal: When the People Mattered. Boston: Northeastern University Press, 1992. (YA.1995.b.9461)
FREIDEL, FRANK. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the New Deal . . . An Inaugural LectureDelivered before the University of Oxford on 1 May 1956. Oxford: Clarendon Press,1956, 19 pp. (9617.e.13)
FREIDEL, FRANK B., ed. The New Deal and the American People. Englewood Cliffs,N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1964, 151 pp. (X.708/201)
FRISCH, MORTON J. Franklin D. Roosevelt: The Contribution of the New Deal toAmerican Political Thought and Practice. Boston: Twayne, 1975, 165 pp. (X.808/12228)
34
FUSFELD, DANIEL R. The Economic Thought of Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Originsof the New Deal. New York: Columbia University Press, 1956, 337 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(586.))
GRAHAM, OTIS L. An Encore for Reform: The Old Progressives and the New Deal. New York: Oxford University Press, 1967, 256 pp. (X.709/4835)
HOSEN, FREDERICK E. The Great Depression and the New Deal: Legislative Acts inTheir Entirety (1932-1933) and Statistical Economic Data (1926-1946). Jefferson, N.C.,and London: McFarland, 1992, 318 pp. (YC.1993.b.1655)
JACOB, CHARLES E. Leadership in the New Deal: The Administrative Challenge. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1967, 101 pp. (X.709/5551)
KARL, BARRY D. Executive Reorganization and Reform in the New Deal: The Genesisof Administrative Management, 1900-1939. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard UniversityPress, 1963, 292 pp. (X.709/2812)
KELLER, MORTON, ed. The New Deal: What Was It? New York: Holt,Rinehart & Winston, 1963, 122 pp. (09136.I.9/2)
KEMLER, EDGAR. The Deflation of American Ideals: An Ethical Guide for NewDealers. Reprint, Seattle and London: University of Washington Press, 1967, 184 pp. (X.709/6792)
LASH, JOSEPH P. Dealers and Dreamers: A New Look at the New Deal. New York: Doubleday, 1988, 510 pp. (DSC 89/03357)
LEUCHTENBURG, WILLIAM E. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the New Deal. NewYork: Harper and Row, 1963, 393 pp. (W.P.c.131/25)
LEUCHTENBURG, WILLIAM E., ed. The New Deal: A Documentary History. New York: Harper and Row, 1968. (X.708/4341); Columbia: University of SouthCarolina Press, 1969, 263 pp. (X.800/4859)
LEVINE, RHONDA F. Class Struggle and the New Deal: Industrial Labor, IndustrialCapital and the State. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1988, 233 pp. (YC.1989.b.3039)
LINDLEY, ERNEST K. The Roosevelt Revolution: First Phase. London: VictorGollancz, 1934, 287 p. (08176.a.42); New York: Viking, 1933, 328 pp. (08176.aa.43)LOUCHHEIM, KATIE, ed. The Making of the New Deal: The Insiders Speak. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1983, 368 pp. (X.800/38819)
POLENBERG, RICHARD, ed. Radicalism and Reform in the New Deal. Reading,Mass., and London: Addison-Wesley, 1972, 188 pp. (X.700/11660)
35
POLENBERG, RICHARD. Reorganizing Roosevelt's Government: The Controversy overExecutive Reorganization, 1936-1939. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,1966, 275 pp. (X.709/4794)
RAUCH, BASIL. The History of the New Deal, 1933-1938. New York: CreativeAge Press, 1944, 368 pp. (08176.a.62)
ROMASCO, ALBERT U. Politics of Recovery: Roosevelt's New Deal. New York: Oxford University Press, 1965, 282 pp. (X.519/2157); New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1983, 276 pp. (X.809/58433)
ROZELL, MARK J. and WILLIAM D. PEDERSON, eds. FDR and the ModernPresidency: Leadership and Legacy. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1997, 242pp. (YC.1998.b.15)
ROZWENC, EDWIN C., ed. The New Deal: Revolution or Evolution? Rev. ed.,Boston: Heath, 1959, 113 pp. (9196.k.5)
ROZWENC, EDWIN C. and THOMAS T. LYONS. Presidential Power in the NewDeal. Boston: Heath, 1963, 66 pp. (8184.f.20)
SALMOND, JOHN. The New Deal. London and New York: Frederick Warne,1970, 44 pp. (X.809/9337)
SARGENT, JAMES E. Roosevelt and the Hundred Days: Struggle for the Early NewDeal. New York and London: Garland, 1981, 355 pp. (X.800/36853)
SCHWARZ, JORDAN A. The New Dealers: Power Politics in the Age of Roosevelt. New York: Knopf, 1993, 411 pp. (YA.1994.b.9560)
SELIGMAN, LESTER G. and ELMER E. CORNWELL, JR., eds. New Deal Mosaic: Roosevelt Confers with his National Emergency Council, 1933-1936. Eugene: Universityof Oregon, 1965, 578 pp. (X.702/332)
SITKOFF, HARVARD, ed. Fifty Years Later: The New Deal Evaluated. Philadephia: Temple University Press, 1985, 240 pp. (DSC 85/11096)
STEELE, RICHARD W. Propaganda in an Open Society: The Roosevelt Administrationand the Media, 1933-1941. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1985, 231pp. (YC.1988.a.3654)
STERNSHER, BERNARD, ed. Hope Restored: How the New Deal Worked in Townand Country. Chicago: Ivan R. Dee, 1999, 247 pp. (DSC 99/30478)
SUSSMANN, LEILA A. Dear FDR: A Study of Political Letter-Writing. Totawa: Bedminister Press, 1963, 194 pp. (X.709/5213)
WANN, A. J. The President as Chief Administrator: A Study of Franklin D. Roosevelt. Washington, D.C.: Public Affairs Press, 1968, 219 pp. (X.800/5622)
36
4. Elections
ALLEN, ROBERT S. Why Hoover Faces Defeat. New York: Brewer, Warren &Putnam, 1932, 118 pp. (20018.e.49)
KENNEDY, JOSEPH P. I'm for Roosevelt. New York: Reynal & Hitchcock, 1936,149 pp. (08175.c.35)
KEY, V. O. The Responsible Electorate: Rationality in Presidential Voting, 1936-1960. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1966, 158 pp. (X.709/3148)
MENCKEN, H. L. Making a President: A Footnote to the Saga of Democracy. NewYork: Knopf, 1932, 185 pp. (08176.a.36)
OULAHAN, RICHARD. The Man Who . . . The Story of the 1932 DemocraticNational Convention. New York: Dial, 1971, 147 pp. (X.800/8012)
PEEL, ROY V. and THOMAS C. DONNELLY. The 1932 Campaign: An Analysis. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1973, 242 pp. (YA.1986.a.3489)
ROBINSON, EDGAR E. They Voted for Roosevelt: The Presidential Vote, 1932-1944. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1947, 207 pp. (8177.1.10)
WHITE, WILLIAM ALLEN. What It's All About: Being a Reporter's Story of the EarlyCampaign of 1936. New York: Macmillan, 1936, 146 pp. (20029.ee.55)
E. CONGRESS
1. General Studies
COULTER, MATTHEW W. The Senate Munitions Inquiry of the 1930s: Beyond theMerchants of Death. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 182 pp. (YC.1998.b.198)
DETZER, DOROTHY. Appointment on the Hill. New York: Henry Holt, 1948,262 pp. (10891.aa.21)
FEINMAN, ROBERT L. Twilight of Progressivism: The Western Republican Senatorsand the New Deal. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1981, 262 pp. (DSC 4672.031, v.1 99th series)PATTERSON, JAMES T. Congressional Conservatism and the New Deal: The Growthof the Conservative Coalition in Congress, 1933-1939. Lexington: University ofKentucky Press, 1967, 369 pp. (X.709/10622)
PORTER, DAVID L. Congress and the Waning of the New Deal. Port Washington,N.Y., and London: National University Publications, Kennikat Press, 1980, 169 pp. (X.809/49545)
37
PORTER, DAVID L. The Seventy-Sixth Congress and World War II, 1939-1940. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1979, 236 pp. (X.800/29169)
SCHWARZ, JORDAN A. The Interregnum of Despair: Hoover, Congress and theDepression. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1970, 281 pp. (X.520/3937)
WILTZ, JOHN E. In Search of Peace: The Senate Munitions Inquiry, 1934-1936. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1963, 277 pp. (X.631/703)
2. House Committee on Un-American Activities
BENTLEY, ERIC, ed. Thirty Years of Treason: Excerpts from Hearings before the HouseCommittee on Un-American Activities, 1938-1968. London: Thames and Hudson, 1972,991 pp. (X.200/5920)
DIES, MARTIN. The Trojan Horse in America. New York: Dodd, Mead, 1940, 366pp. (08157.f.85)
GOODMAN, WALTER. The Committee: The Extraordinary Career of the HouseCommittee on Un-American Activities. London: Secker & Warburg, 1969, 564 pp. (X.700/3537)
OGDEN, AUGUST R. The Dies Committee: A Study of the Special House Committeefor the Investigation of Un-American Activities, 1938-1944. 2d ed., Washington, D.C.: Catholic University of America Press, 1945, 318 pp. (8177.e.35)
O'REILLY, KENNETH. Hoover and the Un-Americans: The FBI, HUAC and the RedMenace. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983, 411 pp. (YA.1986.b.271)
F. FEDERALISM AND THE STATES
BUCK, ARTHUR E. The Reorganization of State Governments in the United States. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938, 299 pp. (8282.p.1/16)
CLARK, JANE P. The Rise of a New Federalism: Federal-State Cooperation in the UnitedStates. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938, 347 pp. (08286.eee.23)
FINEGOLD, KENNETH and THEDA SKOCPOL. State and Party in America's NewDeal. Madison and London: University of Wisconsin Press, 1995, 342 pp. (YC.1998.a.1987)
MACMAHON, ARTHUR W. Administering Federalism in a Democracy. New York: Oxford University Press, 1972, 196 pp. (X.809/15103)
METTLER, SUZANNE. Dividing Citizens: Gender and Federalism in New Deal PublicPolicy. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1998, 239 pp. (DSC98/22624)
38
PATTERSON, JAMES T. The New Deal and the States: Federalism in Transition. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1969, 226 pp. (X.809/7076)
G. JUDICIAL AND LEGAL SYSTEM
ALSOP, JOSEPH W. and TURNER CATLEDGE. The 168 Days. New York: Doubleday, Doran, 1938, 312 pp. (20032.a.21)
BRANT, IRVING. Storm Over the Constitution. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1936, 294 pp. (20020.eee.43)
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. Social Work and the Courts: Select Statutes andJudicial Decisions. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1934, 610 pp. (Ac.2691.d/29.(6.))
CHADBOURN, JAMES H. Lynching and the Law. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina, 1933, 221 pp. (Ac.2685.kc.(60.))
CORWIN, EDWARD S. Court over Constitution: A Study of Judicial Review as anInstrument of Popular Government. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1938,273 pp. (20032.a.45)
CORWIN, EDWARD S. The Twilight of the Supreme Court: A History of OurConstitutional Theory. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1934, 237 pp. (20018.ff.35)
COUDERT, FREDERIC R. The New Deal and the United States Supreme Court. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1936, 57 pp. (Mic.A.10526(8))
CUSHMAN, BARRY. Rethinking the New Deal Court: The Structure of aConstitutional Revolution. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998, 320pp. (YC.1998.b.4045)
DAWSON, NELSON L. Louis D. Brandeis, Felix Frankfurter and the New Deal. Hamden, Conn.: Archon Books, 1980, 272 pp. (X.200/47467)
DOUGLAS, WILLIAM O. The Court Years, 1939-1975: An Autobiography. NewYork: Random House, 1980, 434 pp. (X.200/39704)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. The Law and the NewDeal: Selected Articles on Legal Issues surrounding the Depression and Roosevelt's Policies. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 329 pp. (YC.1991.b.566)EMERSON, THOMAS I. Young Lawyer for the New Deal: An Insider's Memoir of theRoosevelt Years. Edited by Joan P. Emerson. Savage, Md.: Rowman & Littlefield,1991, 337 pp. (YA.1993.b.3271)
ERIKSSON, ERIK M. The Supreme Court and the New Deal: A Study of RecentConstitutional Interpretation. Rosemead, Calif.: Rosemead Review Press, 1940, 252 pp. (X.200/47210)
39
GERALD, JAMES E. The Press and the Constitution, 1931-1947. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1948, 173 pp. (11868.h.19)
HENDEL, SAMUEL. Charles Evans Hughes and the Supreme Court. New York: King's Crown Press, 1951, 337 pp. (10891.bb.28)
HOCKETT, JEFFREY D. New Deal Justice: The Constitutional Jurisprudence of Hugo L.Black, Felix Frankfurter and Robert H. Jackson. Lanham, Md., and London: Rowman &Littlefield, 1996, 322 pp. (YC.1997.a.1602)
IRONS, PETER H. The New Deal Lawyers. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1982, 351 pp. (X.520/27971)
JACKSON, ROBERT H. The Struggle for Judicial Supremacy: A Study of a Crisis inAmerican Power Politics. New York: Knopf, 1941, 361 pp. (08175.bb.36)
LEONARD, CHARLES A. A Search for a Judicial Philosophy: Mr. Justice Roberts andthe Constitutional Revolution of 1937. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: KennikatPress, 1971, 212 pp. (X.200/5561)
LEUCHTENBURG, WILLIAM E. The Supreme Court Reborn: The ConstitutionalRevolution in the Age of Roosevelt. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press,1995, 350 pp. (YC.1997.a.2254)
LIPPMANN, WALTER. The Supreme Court--Independent or Controlled? New Yorkand London: Harper, 1937, 56 pp. (20031.aaa.10)
MAIDMENT, RICHARD A. The Judicial Response to the New Deal: The U.S.Supreme Court and Economic Regulation, 1934-1936. Manchester: ManchesterUniversity Press, 1991. (YC.1991.a.5552)
MANGUM, CHARLES S. The Legal Status of the Negro. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 1940, 436 pp. (6618.bb.1)
MASON, ALPHEUS T. The Supreme Court: Vehicle of Revealed Truth or Power Group,1930-1937. Boston: Boston University Press, 1953, 58 pp. (Ac.2690.b/2)
MURPHY, PAUL L. The Constitution in Crisis Times, 1918-1969. New York: Harper and Row, 1972, 570 pp. (W.P.c.131/42)
PASCHAL, JOEL P. Mr. Justice Sutherland: A Man against the State. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1951, 267 pp. (10888.f.30)
PEARSON, DREW and ROBERT S. ALLEN. The Nine Old Men. Garden City,N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1936, 325 pp. (06617.de.20)
PEARSON, DREW and ROBERT S. ALLEN. Nine Old Men at the Crossroads. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1937, 57 pp. (20030.bb.37)
40
PRITCHETT, CHARLES H. The Roosevelt Court: A Study in Judicial Politics andValues, 1937-1947. New York: Octagon, 1963, 314 pp. (X.200/1590)
PUSEY, MERLO J. The Supreme Court Crisis. New York: Macmillan, 1937, 108 pp. (20031.ee.15)
SHAMIR, RONEN. Managing Legal Uncertainty: Elite Lawyers in the New Deal. Durham, N.C., and London: Duke University Press, 1995, 252 pp. (YC.1996.b.5569)
STONE, I. F. The Court Disposes. New York: Covici, Friede, 1937, 127 pp. (Mic.A.10069)
TUSHNET, MARK V. Making Civil Rights Law: Thurgood Marshall and the SupremeCourt, 1936-1961. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994, 339 pp. (YC.1994.b.4106)
TUSHNET, MARK V. The NAACP's Legal Strategy Against Segregated Education,1925-1950. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1987, 222pp. (YC.1991.b.4992)
UROFSKY, MELVIN I. Louis D. Brandeis and the Progressive Tradition. Boston: Little, Brown, 1981, 183 pp. (X.529/65750)
H. FEDERAL BUREAU OF INVESTIGATION
HOOVER, J. EDGAR. Masters of Deceit: The Story of Communism in America. London: J. M. Dent, 1958, 374 pp. (8177.m.54)
KIRCHNER, L. R. Triple Cross Fire! J. Edgar Hoover and the Kansas City UnionStation Massacre. Kansas City, Mo.: Janlar Books, 1993, 176 pp. (YA.1997.a.13158)
LOWENTHAL, MAX. The Federal Bureau of Investigation. London: Turnstile Press,1951, 559 pp. (6059.bb.56)
LYSING, HENRY. Men Against Crime. New York: D. Kemp, 1938, 265 pp. (6057.t.2)
NASH, JAY R. Citizen Hoover: A Critical Study of the Life and Times of J. Edgar Hooverand His FBI. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1972, 298 pp. (X.200/8811)O'REILLY, KENNETH. Hoover and the Un-Americans: The FBI, HUAC, and the RedMenace. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983, 411 pp. (YA.1986.b.271)
POWERS, RICHARD G. G-men: Hoover's FBI in American Popular Culture. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1983, 356 pp. (YA.1987.b.1604)
THEOHARIS, ATHAN G. and JOHN STUART COX. The Boss: J. Edgar Hooverand the Great American Inquisition. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1988, 489
41
pp. (YA.1989.b.3835); London: Harrap, 1989, 489 pp. (YH.1989.b.974); London: Virgin, 1993, 545 pp. (YK.1993.a.16951)
I. OPPOSITION PARTIES AND PROTEST MOVEMENTS[See also VIII.C. Foreign Relations: Isolationism, Pacifism andNeutrality]
1. Miscellaneous Studies
BELL, LELAND V. In Hitler's Shadow: The Anatomy of American Nazism. PortWashington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1973, 135 pp. (X.800/8554)
BENNETT, DAVID H. Demagogues in the Depression: American Radicals and the UnionParty, 1932-1936. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1969, 341 pp. (X.800/6557)
BINGHAM, ALFRED M. Insurgent America: Revolt of the Middle-Classes. New Yorkand London: Harper, 1935, 253 pp. (20020.h.8)
BINGHAM, ALFRED M. and SELDEN RODMAN, eds. Challenge to the New Deal. New York: Falcon Press, 1934, 284 pp. (8231.d.18)
BLACKORBY, EDWARD C. Prairie Rebel: The Public Life of William Lemke. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1963, 339 pp. (X.311/1023)
JEANSONNE, GLEN. Gerald L. K. Smith: Minister of Hate. London: YaleUniversity Press, 1989, 283 pp. (YH.1989.b.893)
MCCOY, DONALD R. Angry Voices: Left-of-Center Politics in the New Deal Era. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press, 1958, 224 pp. (08052.k.20); reprint, PortWashington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1971, 224 pp. (X.809/10634)
MCGINNIS, PATRICK E. Oklahoma's Depression Radicals: Ira M. Finley and theVeterans of Industry of America. New York: Lang, 1991, 192 pp. (YA.1993.b.1828)
MILLS, OGDEN L. Liberalism Fights On. New York: Macmillan, 1936, 160 pp. (8004.ff.34)
MILLS, OGDEN L. The Seventeen Million. New York: Macmillan, 1937, 143 pp. (20031.f.25)
SCHONBACH, MORRIS. Native American Fascism during the 1930s and 1940s: AStudy of Its Roots, Its Growth and Its Decline. New York and London: Garland, 1985,507 pp. (YC.1988.b.1362)
SHOVER, JOHN L. Cornbelt Rebellion: The Farmers' Holiday Association. Urbana andLondon: University of Illinois Press, 1965, 239 pp. (X.311/1349)
42
SMITH, GEOFFREY S. To Save a Nation: American Countersubversives, the New Dealand the Coming of World War II. New York: Basic Books, 1973, 244 pp. (X.800/9320; X.800/8482)
WEINSTEIN, JAMES. Ambiguous Legacy: The Left in American Politics. New York: New Viewpoints, 1975, 179 pp. (X.709/31099)
WOLFSKILL, GEORGE. The Revolt of the Conservatives: A History of the AmericanLiberty League, 1934-1940. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1962, 303 pp. (X.519/2427)
2. Bonus March
BEST, GARY D. FDR and the Bonus Marchers, 1933-1935. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Praeger, 1992. (YC.1992.a.3363)
DANIELS, ROGER. The Bonus March: An Episode of the Great Depression. Westport,Conn.: Greenwood, 1971, 370 pp. (X.809/17279)
LISIO, DONALD J. The President and Protest: Hoover, MacArthur and the Bonus Riot. New York: Fordham University Press, 1994, 346 pp. (YC.1995.a.683)
WATERS, WALTER W., as told to WILLIAM C. WHITE. B.E.F.: The WholeStory of the Bonus Army. New York: J. Day, 1933, 288 pp. (010409.ee.45)
3. Communism [See also VIII.F.2.i. Foreign Relations: Union of Soviet Socialist Republics]
AARON, DANIEL. Writers on the Left: Episodes in American Literary Communism. New York: Harcourt, Brace & World, 1961, 460 pp. (W.P.16742/6); Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1977, 460 pp. (X.908/41541)
ALEXANDER, ROBERT J. The Right Opposition: The Lovestoneites and theInternational Communist Opposition of the 1930s. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 342 pp. (YH.1986.b.535)
BILLINGSLEY, LLOYD. Hollywood Party: How Communism Seduced the AmericanFilm Industry in the 1930s and 1940s. Rocklin, Calif.: Forum, 1998. (DSC 99/17289)
BROWDER, EARL R. Communism in the United States. London: Martin Lawrence,1935, 352 pp. (8286.h.9)BROWDER, EARL R. The People's Front. London: Lawrence & Wishart, 1938,354 pp. (20033.g.5; 20032.e.12)
BROWDER, EARL R. The Second Imperialist War. New York: International Pub.,1940, 309 pp. (Mic.A.10154)
CRENSHAW, FILES and KENNETH A. MILLER. Scottsboro, the Firebrand ofCommunism. Montgomery, Ala.: Brown Printing Co., 1936, 336 pp. (06617.df.18)
43
DYSON, LOWELL K. Red Harvest: The Communist Party and American Farmers. Lincoln and London: University of Nebraska Press, 1982, 259 pp. (X.529/50399)
FONER, PHILIP S. and HERBERT SHAPIRO, EDS. American Communism andBlack Americans: A Documentary History, 1930-1934. Philadelphia: Temple UniversityPress, 1991, 381 pp. (YA.1992.b.5483)
GITLOW, BENJAMIN. I Confess: The Truth about American Communism. NewYork: E. P. Dutton, 1940, 611 pp. (10888.g.4)
GITLOW, BENJAMIN. The Whole of Their Lives: Communism in America--A PersonalHistory and Intimate Portrayal of Its Leaders. New York: Scribner's, 1948, 387 pp. (8154.cc.46)
HOOVER, J. EDGAR. Masters of Deceit: The Story of Communism in America. London: J. M. Dent, 1958, 374 pp. (8177.m.54)
HOWE, IRVING and LEWIS A. COSER. The American Communist Party: A CriticalHistory, 1919-1957. Boston: Beacon Press, 1957, 593 pp. (8177.1.60)
KELLEY, ROBIN D. G. Hammer and Hoe: Alabama Communists during the GreatDepression. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1990, 369pp. (YA.1993.b.8285)
KLEHR, HARVEY. The Heyday of American Communism: The Depression Decade. New York: Basic Books, 1984, 511 pp. (X.800/40598; X.800/43057)
KLEHR, HARVEY, JOHN EARL HAYNES and FRIDRIKH IGOREVICHFIRSOV. The Secret World of American Communism. New Haven, Conn., andLondon: Yale University Press, 1995, 348 pp. (YC.1995.b.3902)
KLEHR, HARVEY, JOHN EARL HAYNES and KYRILL M. ANDERSON. TheSoviet World of American Communism. New Haven, Conn., and London: YaleUniversity Press, 1998, 378 pp. (YC.1998.b.2936)
LATHAM, EARL. The Communist Controversy in Washington: From the New Deal toMcCarthy. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1966, 446 pp. (X.700/1898)
LEVENSTEIN, HARVEY A. Communism, Anticommunism and the CIO. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 364 pp. (X.800/31852)
LIEBERMAN, ROBBIE. My Song Is My Weapon: People's Songs, AmericanCommunism and the Politics of Culture, 1930-1950. Urbana: University of Illinois Press,1989, 201 pp. (YA.1994.b.3000)
LYONS, EUGENE. The Red Decade: The Stalinist Penetration of America. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1941, 423 pp. (8289.cc.11)
44
MYERS, CONSTANCE A. The Prophet's Army: Trotskyists in America, 1928-1941. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 281 pp. (X.809/42532)
NAISON, MARK. Communists in Harlem during the Depression. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1983, 355 pp. (X.800/40619)
OTTANELLI, FRASER M. The Communist Party of the United States: From theDepression to World War II. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1991,307 pp. (YA.1993.b.8864)
RECORD, WILSON. The Negro and the Communist Party. Chapel Hill: Universityof North Carolina Press, 1951, 340 pp. (8177.n.7)
RECORD, WILSON. Race and Radicalism: The NAACP and the Communist Party inConflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1964, 237 pp. (Ac.2692.g/14.(25.));Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1966, 237 pp. (X.708/3671)
SCHWARTZ, LAWRENCE H. Marxism and Culture: The CPUSA and Aesthetics inthe 1930s. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1980, 151 pp. (X.809/46019)
WARREN, FRANK A. Liberals and Communism: The 'Red Decade' Revisited. Bloomington, London: Indiana University Press, 1966, 276 pp. (X.709/4152)
4. Coughlin, Charles E.
ATHANS, MARY C. The Coughlin-Fahey Connection: Father Charles E. Coughlin,Father Denis Fahey, C.S.Sp., and Religious Anti-Semitism in the United States, 1938-1954. New York: Lang, 1991, 265 pp. (YA.1993.b.1393)
BRINKLEY, ALAN. Voices of Protest: Huey Long, Father Coughlin and the GreatDepression. New York: Knopf, 1982, 348 pp. (X.800/39958)
CARPENTER, RONALD H. Father Charles E. Coughlin: Surrogate Spokesman for theDisaffected. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1998, 204 pp. (YC.1998.b.2878)
COUGHLIN, CHARLES E. Father Coughlin's Radio Discourses, 1931-1932. RoyalOak, Mich.: Radio League of the Little Flower, 1932, 239 pp. (X.100/15175)COUGHLIN, CHARLES E. A Series of Lectures on Social Justice. Royal Oak, Mich.: Radio League of the Little Flower, 1935, 244 pp. (8287.de.98)
MUGGLEBEE, RUTH. Father Coughlin of the Shrine of the Little Flower: An Account ofthe Life, Work and Message of Reverend Charles E. Coughlin. Boston: L. C. Page, 1933,321 pp. (4987.bb.22)
TULL, CHARLES J. Father Coughlin and the New Deal. Syracuse, N.Y.: SyracuseUniversity Press, 1965, 292 pp. (X.100/3757)
45
WARREN, DONALD I. Radio Priest: Charles Coughlin, the Father of Hate Radio. New York and London: Free Press, 1996, 376 pp. (YA.1997.b.3345)
5. Long, Huey P. [See also VII.A.19. U.S. States: Louisiana]
BRINKLEY, ALAN. Voices of Protest: Huey Long, Father Coughlin and the GreatDepression. New York: Knopf, 1982, 348 pp. (X.800/39958)
CORTNER, RICHARD C. The Kingfish and the Constitution: Huey Long, the FirstAmendment and the Emergence of Modern Press Freedom in America. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Greenwood, 1996, 196 pp. (YC.1996.b.3578)
JEANSONNE, GLEN, ed. Huey at 100: Centennial Essays on Huey P. Long. Ruston,La.: McGinty Pub., Dept. of History, Louisiana Tech University, 1995, 237 pp. (DSC 99/23406)
LONG, HUEY P. Every Man a King: The Autobiography of Huey P. Long. Chicago: Quadrangle, 1964, 348 pp. (X.809/6094)
LONG, HUEY P. Kingfish to America: Share Our Wealth: Selected Senatorial Papers. Edited by Henry M. Christman. New York: Schocken Books, 1985, 145 pp. (DSC86/08450)
LONG, HUEY P. My First Days in the White House. Harrisburg, Pa.: TelegraphPress, 1935, 146 pp. (20030.h.7)
WILLIAMS, T. HARRY. Huey Long. New York: Vintage, 1981, 884 pp. (X.809/64003)
6. Socialism and Radicalism
BAKER, SUSAN S. Radical Beginnings: Richard Hofstadter and the 1930s. Westport,Conn.: Greenwood, 1985, 268 pp. (DSC 3458.205 no 112)
DUNBAR, ANTHONY P. Against the Grain: Southern Radicals and Prophets, 1929-1959. Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 1981, 306 pp. (X.800/40793)
MILLER, DONALD L. The New American Radicalism: Alfred M. Bingham and Non-Marxian Insurgency in the New Deal Era. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1979, 240 pp. (X.809/45533)
PRESTON, WILLIAM. Aliens and Dissenters: Federal Suppression of Radicals, 1903-1933. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1963, 352 pp. (9386.s.19); NewYork: Harper and Row, 1966, 349 pp. (X.708/3188)
SINCLAIR, UPTON B. I, Governor of California, and How I Ended Poverty: A TrueStory of the Future. London: T. Wernie Laurie, 1933, 63 pp. (12601.s.4)
46
THOMAS, NORMAN M. America's Way Out: A Program for Democracy. New York: Macmillan, 1931, 324 pp. (08176.aa.31)
THOMAS, NORMAN M. After the New Deal, What? New York: Macmillan,1936, 244 pp. (20029.eee.44)
THOMAS, NORMAN M. and BERTRAM D. WOLFE. Keep America Out of War: A Program. New York: Frederick A. Stokes., 1939, 184 pp. (Mic.A.10024)
WARREN, FRANK A. An Alternative Vision: The Socialist Party in the 1930's. Bloomington and London: Indiana University Press, 1974, 274 pp. (X.809/40100)
7. Student Activism
BRAX, RALPH S. The First Student Movement: Student Activism in the United Statesduring the 1930s. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1981, 121 pp.(X.809/47885)
COHEN, ROBERT. When the Old Left Was Young: Student Radicals and America'sFirst Mass Student Movement, 1929-1941. New York and Oxford: Oxford UniversityPress, 1993, 432 pp. (YC.1993.b.7319)
EAGAN, EILEEN. Class, Culture and the Classroom: The Student Peace Movement of the1930s. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1981, 319 pp. (X.529/64703)
8. Townsend Movement
HOLTZMAN, ABRAHAM. The Townsend Movement: A Political Study. New York: Bookman Associates, 1963, 256 pp. (X.709/4038)
NEUBERGER, RICHARD L. and KELLEY LEE. An Army of the Aged: A Historyand Analysis of the Townsend Old Age Pension Plan. Reprint, New York: Da Capo,1973, 329 pp. (X.529/73240)
NEW YORK TWENTIETH CENTURY FUND. An Impartial Review of theTownsend Movement and the Probable Effects of the Townsend Plan. New York: Committee on Old Age Security of the Twentieth Century Fund, 1936, 93 pp. (08286.h.72) TOWNSEND, FRANCIS E. New Horizons. Chicago: J. L. Stewart, 1943, 246 pp. (Mic.A.10004)
IV. ECONOMY
A. GENERAL STUDIES
ARNDT, H. W. The Economic Lessons of the Nineteen-Thirties. Reprint, London: Frank Cass, 1963, 314 pp. (08233.n.30)
47
BARBER, WILLIAM J. From New Era to New Deal: Herbert Hoover, the Economistsand American Economic Policy, 1921-1933. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,1985, 237 pp. (YC.1998.b.2016)
BARNES, HARRY E. Money Changers vs. the New Deal: A Candid Analysis of theInflation Controversy. New York: Ray Long & R. R. Smith, 1934, 150 pp. (8233.a.7)
BASTER, ALBERT S. J. The Twilight of American Capitalism: An EconomicInterpretation of the New Deal. London: P. S. King, 1937, 218 pp. (8234.f.31)
BERLE, ADOLF A. and GARDINER C. MEANS. The Modern Corporation andPrivate Property. New York: Macmillan, 1933, 396 pp. (8282.v.30)
BORDO, MICHAEL D., CHRISTOPHER J. ERCEG and CHARLES L. EVANS. Money, Sticky Wages and the Great Depression. Cambridge, Mass.: National Bureau ofEconomic Research, 1997, 47 pp. (DSC 6067.7195 6071)
BORDO, MICHAEL D., CLAUDIA GOLDIN and EUGENE N. WHITE, eds. The Defining Moment: The Great Depression and the American Economy in the TwentiethCentury. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1998, 474 pp. (YC.1999.b.5521)
BRENNAN, JOHN A. Silver and the First New Deal. Reno: University of NevadaPress, 1969, 187 pp. (X.520/4817)
BROOKS, JOHN N. Once in Golconda: A True Drama of Wall Street, 1920-1938. London: Gollancz, 1970, 307 pp. (X.510/5318; X.529/11304)
CAMPBELL, PERSIA C. Consumer Representation in the New Deal. New York: AMSPress, 1968, 298 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(477.))
COLLINS, ROBERT M. The Business Response to Keynes, 1929-1964. New Yorkand Guildford: Columbia University Press, 1981, 293 pp. (X.520/26055)
COUCH, JIM F. and WILLIAM F. SHUGHART II. The Political Economy of the New Deal. Cheltenham: Edwar Elgar, 1998, 247 pp. (SPIS 338.973009043)
COWING, CEDRIC B. Populists, Plungers and Progressives: A Social History of Stockand Commodity Speculation, 1890-1936. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press,1965, 299 pp. (X.519/2204; X.519/7154)
DAVIS, JOSEPH S. The World Between the Wars: 1919-39: An Economist's View. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1975, 436 pp. (X.800/25024)
DE BEDTS, RALPH F. The New Deal's SEC: The Formative Years. New York andLondon: Columbia University Press, 1964, 226 pp. (X.510/114)
48
DOUGLAS, WILLIAM O. Democracy and Finance: The Addresses and Public Statementsof W. O. Douglas as Member and Chairman of the Securities and Exchange Commission. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1940, 301 pp. (10888.h.13)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. The American Economyduring the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 307 pp. (YC.1991.b.565)
ECCLES, MARRINER S. Economic Balance and a Balanced Budget: Public Papers of M.S. Eccles. Edited by Rudolph L. Weissman. New York and London: Harper, 1940,299 pp. (8204.cc.19)
EICHENGREEN, BARRY. Golden Fetters: The Gold Standard and the GreatDepression, 1919-1939. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1992, 448pp. (YC.1992.b.3214)
FEARON, PETER. The Origins and Nature of the Great Slump, 1929-1932. London: Macmillan, 1979, 69 pp. (X.519/30088)
FEARON, PETER. War, Prosperity and Depression: The U.S. Economy, 1917-45. Deddington: Philip Allan, 1987, 294 pp. (YC.1988.b.6709)
FUSFELD, DANIEL R. The Economic Thought of Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Originsof the New Deal. New York: Columbia University Press, 1956, 337 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(586.))
GALAMBOS, LOUIS. Competition and Cooperation: The Emergence of a National TradeAssociation. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1966, 329 pp. (X.510/2392)
GALBRAITH, JOHN K. The Great Crash, 1929. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1955,186 pp. (8208.e.42); Harmondsworth: Penguin Books in association with HamishHamilton, 1961, 222 pp. (012209.d.4/540); 3d ed., London: Hamilton, 1973, 212pp. (X.529/15734); 3d ed. London: Deutsch, 1973, 212 pp. (X.809/43856); 3d ed.,Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1975, 223 pp. (X.519/25178); 50th anniversary ed.,London: Deutsch, 1980, 184 pp. (X.809/45484)
GARRATY, JOHN A. The Great Depression: An Inquiry into the Causes, Course andConsequences of the Worldwide Depression of the Nineteen-Thirties, as Seen by Contemporariesand in the Light of History. San Diego, Calif.: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1986, 292pp. (DSC 86/20480)
HALL, THOMAS E. and J. DAVID FERGUSON. The Great Depression: AnInternational Disaster of Perverse Economic Policies. Ann Arbor: University of MichiganPress, 1998, 194 pp. (DSC 98/16020)
HAWLEY, ELLIS W. The New Deal and the Problem of Monopoly: A Study in EconomicAmbivalence. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1966, 525 pp. (X.519/2812; X.519/10419)
49
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F., ed. Antitrust and Regulation during World War I andthe Republican Era, 1917-1932. New York and London: Garland, 1994, 395 pp. (YC.1994.b.3977)
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F., ed. Business-Government Cooperation, 1917-1932: The Rise of Corporatist Policies. New York and London: Garland, 1994, 417 pp. (YC.1994.b.4164)
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F., ed. The Great Depression and American Capitalism. Boston: Heath, 1968, 110 pp. (9196.k.5/52)
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F., ed. The New Deal and Corporate Power: Antitrust andRegulatory Policies during the Thirties and World War II. New York and London: Garland, 1994, 397 pp. (YC.1994.b.3995)
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F., ed. Survival of Corporatism during the New Deal Era,1933-1945. New York and London: Garland, 1994, 413 pp. (YC.1994.b.4277)
HOSEN, FREDERICK E. The Great Depression and the New Deal: Legislative Acts inTheir Entirety (1932-1933) and Statistical Economic Data (1926-1946). Jefferson, N.C.,and London: McFarland, 1992, 318 pp. (YC.1993.b.1655)
HYMAN, SIDNEY. Marriner S. Eccles: Private Entrepreneur and Public Servant. Stanford, Calif.: Graduate School of Business, Stanford University, 1976, 456 pp. (X.800/34437)
KITSON, HARRY D. Finding a Job during the Depression. New York: R. C. Cook,1933, 32 pp. (W.P.4845/1)
KLEIN, LAWRENCE R. Economic Fluctuations in the United States, 1921-1941. NewYork: Wiley; London: Chapman & Hall, 1950, 174 pp. (Ac.2691.fa/2)
KOCH, ALBERT R. The Financing of Large Corporations, 1920-39. New York: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1943, 139 pp. (Mic.A.8716)
LEVINE, RHONDA F. Class Struggle and the New Deal: Industrial Labor, IndustrialCapital and the State. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1988, 233 pp. (YC.1989.b.3039)
MAY, DEAN L. From New Deal to New Economics: The Liberal Response to theDepression. New York: Garland, 1981, 204 pp. (DSC 83/16194)
PARRISH, MICHAEL E. Securities Regulation and the New Deal. New Haven,Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1970, 270 pp. (Ac.2692.md/3.[no.93])
PEEK, GEORGE N., with SAMUEL CROWTHER Why Quit Our Own? NewYork: Van Nostrand, 1936, 353 pp. (8222.aaa.75)
50
REES, MORGAN G. The Great Slump: Capitalism in Crisis, 1929-33. London: Weidenfeld & Nicolson, 1970, 310 pp. (X.529/11724)
ROBEY, RALPH W. Roosevelt versus Recovery. New York and London: Harper,1934, 163 pp. (20018.b.23)
ROOSE, KENNETH D. The Economics of Recession and Revival: An Interpretation of1937-38. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1954, 280 pp. (Ac.2692.ma/22)
ROSENOF, THEODORE. Economics in the Long Run: New Deal Theorists and TheirLegacies, 1933-1993. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press,1997, 223 pp. (DSC 97/09341)
SMITH, ARTHUR D. H. Men Who Run America: A Study of the Capitalistic Systemand Its Trends Based on Thirty Case Histories. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1935, 361 pp. (010885.g.46)
SOBEL, ROBERT. NYSE: A History of the New York Stock Exchange, 1935-1975. New York: Weybright and Talley, 1975, 398 pp. (X.800/28677)
SOBEL, ROBERT. Panic on Wall Street: A History of America's Financial Disasters. New York: Collier; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1972, 469 pp. (X.519/13294)
STALEY, ALVAH E. Raw Materials in Peace and War. New York: Council onForeign Relations, 1937, 326 pp. (8290.d.18)
STOLBERG, BENJAMIN and WARREN J. VINTON. The Economic Consequencesof the New Deal. London: Gollancz, 1935, 94 pp. (8230.a.56)
STONEMAN, WILLIAM E. A History of the Economic Analysis of the Great Depressionin America. New York: Garland, 1979, 263 pp. (X.809/51021)
SUTTON, ANTONY C. Wall Street and FDR. New Rochelle, N.Y.: ArlingtonHouse, 1975, 200 pp. (X.520/14928)WALLACE, BENJAMIN B. and LYNN R. EDMINSTER. International Control ofRaw Materials. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1930, 479 pp. (8224.aa.34)
WERNE, BENJAMIN, ed. Business and the Robinson Patman Law: A Symposium. New York: Oxford University Press, 1938, 296 pp. (Mic.A.10118)
WIGMORE, BARRIE A. The Crash and Its Aftermath: A History of Securities Marketsin the United States, 1929-1933. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1985, 731 pp. (DSC3458.37 no 58)
B. AGRICULTURE
AHEARN, DANIEL J. The Wages of Farm and Factory Laborers, 1914-1944. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1945, 245 pp. (Ac.2688/2)
51
ALBERTSON, DEAN. Roosevelt's Farmer: Claude R. Wickard in the New Deal. NewYork and London; Columbia University Press, 1961, 424pp. (10713.f.8)
ASCH, BERTA and A. R. MANGUS. Farmers on Relief and Rehabilitation. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1937, 226 pp. (A.S.978/7)
BARGER, HAROLD and HANS H. LANDSBERG. American Agriculture, 1899-1939: A Study of Output, Employment and Productivity. New York: National Bureauof Economic Research, 1942, 440 pp. (W.P.651/42)
BLACK, JOHN D. The Dairy Industry and the AAA. Washington, D.C.: BrookingsInstitution, 1935, 520 pp. (Mic.A.10153)
BLAISDELL, DONALD C. Government and Agriculture: The Growth of Federal FarmAid. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1974, 217 pp. (X.329/18003)
BAKER, O. E., RALPH BORSODI and M. L. WILSON. Agriculture in Modern Life. Edited by Baker Brownell. New York and London: Harper, 1939, 303 pp. (8288.g.12)
CAMPBELL, PERSIA C. American Agricultural Policy. London: P. S. King, 1933,304 pp. (8277.s.22)
CAMPBELL, CHRISTIANA M. The Farm Bureau and the New Deal: A Study of theMaking of National Farm Policy, 1933-40. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1962,215 pp. (7056.d.21)
CHAMBERS, CLARKE A. California Farm Organizations: A Historical Study of theGrange, the Farm Bureau and the Associated Farmers, 1929-1941. Berkeley and LosAngeles: University of California Press, 1952, 277 pp. (10414.e.55)
DALTON, JOHN E. Sugar: A Case Study of Government Control. New York: Macmillan, 1937, 311 pp. (8234.f.25)DAVIS, JOSEPH S. On Agricultural Policy, 1926-1938. Stanford, Calif.: FoodResearch Institute, Stanford University, 1939, 494 pp. (Ac.2692.nh)
DAVIS, JOSEPH S. Wheat and the AAA. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1973, 468pp. (X.529/62834)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. Agriculture during theGreat Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 251 pp. (YC.1991.b.567)
DYSON, LOWELL K. Red Harvest: The Communist Party and American Farmers. Lincoln and London: University of Nebraska Press, 1982, 259 pp. (X.529/50399)
FITE, GILBERT C. Farm to Factory: A History of the Consumers Cooperative Association. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1965, 288 pp. (X.311/1335)
52
FITZGERALD, DENNIS A. Livestock under the AAA. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1935, 384 pp. (Mic.A.10044)
FROKER, RUDOLPH K. and JOSEPH G. KNAPP. Farmers' Purchasing Associationsin Wisconsin. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Farm Credit Administration, 1937, 118 pp. (A.S.929/6)
GAUS, JOHN M. and LEON O. WOLCOTT Public Administration and the UnitedStates Department of Agriculture. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1975, 534 pp. (YA.1992.a.9175)
HAMILTON, DAVID E. From New Day to New Deal: American Farm Policy fromHoover to Roosevelt, 1928-1933. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press,1991, 333 pp. (YA.1993.b.8347)
HARDIN, CHARLES M. The Politics of Agriculture: Soil Conservation and the Strugglefor Power in Rural America. Glencoe, Ill.: Free Press, 1952, 282 pp. (7082.e.3)
KILE, ORVILLE M. The Farm Bureau through Three Decades. Baltimore, Md.: Waverly Press, 1948, 416 pp. (Mic.A.10109)
MCCUNE, WESLEY. The Farm Bloc. New York: Greenwood, 1968, 278 pp. (X.809/7992)
NELSON, LAWRENCE J. King Cotton's Advocate: Oscar G. Johnston and the NewDeal. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1998, 330 pp. (DSC 99/17903)
NOURSE, EDWIN G. Government in Relation to Agriculture. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1940, pp. 864-948. (Mic.A.9991)
NOURSE, EDWIN G. Marketing Agreements under the AAA. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1935, 446 pp. (Mic.A.10018)
NOURSE, EDWIN G., JOSEPH S. DAVIS and JOHN D. BLACK. Three Years ofthe Agricultural Adjustment Administration. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1971, 600pp. (X.329/18004)
PERKINS, VAN L. Crisis in Agriculture: The Agricultural Adjustment Administration andthe New Deal, 1933. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1969,245 pp. (Ac.2689.g/11.[vol.81.])
POWERS, ELMER G. Years of Struggle: The Farm Diary of Elmer G. Powers, 1931-1936. Edited by H. Roger Grant and L. Edward Purcell. Ames: Iowa StateUniversity Press, 1976, 158 pp. (X.520/21739)
RAU, ALLAN. Agricultural Policy and Trade Liberalization in the United States,1934-1956: A Study of Conflicting Policies. Genève: Librairie E. Droz; Paris: LibrairieMinard, 1957, 160 pp. (W.P.d.405/21)
53
RICHARDS, HENRY I. Cotton and the AAA. Washington, D.C.: BrookingsInstitution, 1936, 389 pp. (Mic.A.12345)
ROWE, HAROLD B. Tobacco under the AAA. Washington, D.C.: BrookingsInstitution, 1935, 317 pp. (Mic.A.10031)
ROWLEY, WILLIAM D. M. L. Wilson and the Campaign for the Domestic Allotment. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press, 1970, 219 pp. (X.320/3100)
SALOUTOS, THEODORE. The American Farmer and the New Deal. Ames: IowaState University Press, 1982, 307 pp. (X800/39847)
SHOVER, JOHN L. Cornbelt Rebellion: The Farmers' Holiday Association. Urbana andLondon: University of Illinois Press, 1965, 239 pp. (X.311/1349)
STOKDYK, ELLIS A. and CHARLES H. WEST. The Farm Board. New York: Macmillan, 1930, 197 pp. (8276.t.1)
WHITE, ROLAND A. Milo Reno, Farmers Union Pioneer. New York: Arno, 1975,207 pp. (YA.1991.b.5553)
WILSON, MILBURN L. Farm Relief and the Domestic Allotment Plan. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1933, 59 pp. (Mic.A.9992)
WOOFTER, T. J., JR. and ELLEN WINSTON. Seven Lean Years. Reprint, NewYork: Da Capo, 1972, 187 pp. (YA.1991.a.16711)
C. BANKING AND MONETARY POLICY
BORDO, MICHAEL D. and BARRY EICHENGREEN. Implications of the GreatDepression for the Development of the International Monetary System. Cambridge, Mass.: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1997, 73 pp. (DSC 6067.7195 5883)
BURNS, HELEN M. The Banking Community and New Deal Banking Reforms, 1933-1935. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1974, 203 pp. (X.529/31504)
CALOMIRIS, CHARLES W. and DAVID C. WHEELOCK. Was the GreatDepression a Watershed for American Monetary Policy? Cambridge, Mass.: NationalBureau of Economic Research, 1997, 65 pp. (DSC 6067.719500 no. 5963)
CHANDLER, LESTER V. American Monetary Policy, 1928-1941. New York: Harper and Row, 1971, 371 pp. (X.520/4004)
CLARKE, STEPHEN V. O. Central Bank Cooperation, 1924-1931. New York: Federal Reserve Bank of New York, 1967, 234 pp. (X.510/6676)
CRAWFORD, ARTHUR W. Monetary Management under the New Deal: TheEvolution of a Managed Currency System: Its Problems and Results. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Public Affairs, 1940, 382 pp. (8231.d.53)
54
COLT, CHARLES C. and NATHANIEL S. KEITH. 28 Days: A History of theBanking Crisis. New York: Greenberg, 1933, 86 pp. (8230.aa.34)
DONALDSON, JOHN. The Dollar: A Study of the 'New' National and InternationalMonetary System. New York: Oxford University Press, 1937, 271 pp. (8204.c.14)
FRIEDMAN, MILTON and ANNA J. SCHWARTZ. A Monetary History of theUnited States, 1867-1960. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1963, 860 pp. (8247.t.40)
FRIEDMAN, MILTON and ANNA J. SCHWARTZ. Monetary Trends in the UnitedStates and the United Kingdom: Their Relation to Income, Prices and Interest Rates, 1867-1975. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1982, 664 pp. (X.520/29807)
GARLOCK, FRED L. Country Banking in Wisconsin during the Depression. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 1941, 112 pp. (A.S.800/2)
GARRETT, GARET and MURRAY N. ROTHBARD. The Great Depression andNew Deal Monetary Policy. San Francisco, Calif.: Cato Institute, 1980, 131 pp. (YA.1986.a.11143)
JOHNSON, GOVE G. The Treasury and Monetary Policy, 1933-1938. New York: Russell & Russell, 1967, 230 pp. (Ac.2992.am/33)
NADLER, MARCUS and JULES I. BOGEN. The Banking Crisis: The End of anEpoch. London: Allen & Unwin, 1934, 210 pp. (08206.eee.68)
O'CONNOR, J. F. T. The Banking Crisis and Recovery under the RooseveltAdministration. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1971, 167 pp. (X.800/38628)
PARIS, JAMES D. Monetary Policies of the United States, 1932-1938. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938, 198 pp. (8232.eee.13)
PATRICK, SUE C. Reform of the Federal Reserve System in the Early 1930s: The Politicsof Money and Banking. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 349 pp. (YC.1993.b.5240)
PHILLIPS, C. A., T. F. MCMANUS and R. W. NELSON. Banking and the BusinessCycle: A Study of the Great Depression in the United States. New York: Macmillan,1937, 274 pp. (8234.f.38)
STEINDL, FRANK G. Monetary Interpretations of the Great Depression. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1995, 197 pp. (DSC 96/16771)
TEMIN, PETER. Did Monetary Forces Cause the Great Depression? New York: Norton, 1976, 201 pp. (X.529/34626)
55
UPHAM, CYRIL B. and EDWIN LAMKE. Closed and Distressed Banks: A Study inPublic Administration. Washington, D.C.: Institute of Economics, 1934, 285 pp. (8232.aa.26)
VOLPE, PAUL A. The International Financial and Banking Crisis, 1931-1933. Washington, D.C.: Catholic University of America Press, 1945, 123 pp. (Ac.2692.y/15)
WHITTLESEY, CHARLES R. Banking and the New Deal. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1935, 24 pp. (W.P.10274/16)
WICKER, ELMUS. The Banking Panics of the Great Depression. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996, 174 pp. (YC.1996.b.6190)
WICKER, ELMUS R. Federal Reserve Monetary Policy, 1917-1933. New York: Random House, 1966, 221 pp. (X.529/20026)
D. ECONOMY AND FOREIGN AFFAIRS
ADAMS, FREDERICK C. Economic Diplomacy: The Export-Import Bank and AmericanForeign Policy, 1934-1939. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1976, 289 pp. (X.520/11681)
BARBER, WILLIAM J. Designs within Disorder: Franklin D. Roosevelt, the Economistsand the Shaping of American Foreign Policy, 1933-1945. Cambridge: CambridgeUniversity Press, 1996, 178 pp. (YC.1997.b.200)
BECKETT, GRACE. The Reciprocal Trade Agreements Program. New York: Columbia University Press, 1941, 142 pp. (8222.bb.23)
BLOOMFIELD, ARTHUR I. Capital Imports and the American Balance of Payments,1934-39: A Study in Abnormal International Capital Transfers. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1950, 340 pp. (8230.bb.47)
BODAYLA, STEPHEN D. Financial Diplomacy: The United States and Mexico, 1919-1933. New York and London: Garland, 1987, 216 pp. (YC.1988.a.8196)
BUELL, RAYMOND L. The Hull Trade Program and the American System. NewYork: Foreign Policy Association, 1938, 48 pp. (Mic.A.12246(7))
BUTLER, MICHAEL A. Cautious Visionary: Cordell Hull and Trade Reform, 1933-1937. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1998, 240 pp. (DSC98/29466)
CLAVIN, PATRICIA. The Failure of Economic Diplomacy: Britain, Germany, Franceand the United States, 1931-36. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1996, 279 pp. (YC.1996.a.640)
56
DRUMMOND, IAN and NORMAN HILLMER. Negotiating Freer Trade: TheUnited Kingdom, the United States, Canada and the Free Trade Agreements of 1938. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfred Laurier University Press, 1989, 197 pp. (DSC 89/l4851)
FEIS, HERBERT. The Diplomacy of the Dollar: First Era, 1919-1932. Baltimore,Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1950, 81 pp. (Ac.2689/5)
GARDNER, LLOYD C. Economic Aspects of New Deal Diplomacy. Madison: University of Wisconsin, 1964, 409 pp. (X.700/2309)
HIGHAM, CHARLES. Trading with the Enemy: An Exposé of the Nazi-AmericanMoney Plot, 1933-1949. London: Hale, 1983, 277 pp. (X.809/57463)
HILTON, STANLEY E. Brazil and the Great Powers, 1930-1939: The Politics of TradeRivalry. Austin and London: University of Texas Press, 1976, 304 pp. (X.800/12344;X.0700/112 (38))
LEWIS, CLEONA. America's Stake in International Investments. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1938, 710 pp. (Ac.2391.(13.))
LOCKWOOD, WILLIAM W. The Foreign Trade Policy of the United States. NewYork: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 58 pp. (Ac.1915.b.)
LOCKWOOD, WILLIAM W. Trade and Trade Rivalry between the United States andJapan. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 66 pp. (Ac.1915.b)
MADDEN, JOHN T., MARCUS NADLER and HARRY C. SAUVAIN. America'sExperience as a Creditor Nation. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1937, 333 pp. (Mic.A.8712)
PEARCE, CHARLES A. NRA Trade Practice Programs. New York: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1939, 225 pp. (08230.ee.20)
RAU, ALLAN. Agricultural Policy and Trade Liberalization in the United States,1934-1956: A Study of Conflicting Policies. Genève: Librairie E. Droz; Paris: LibrairieMinard, 1957, 160 pp. (W.P.d.405/21)
RIGGS, A. R. and TOM VELK. Cordell Hull, The New Deal and Inter-American Trade. Montreal: Dept. of Economics, McGill University, 1993, 17 pp. (DSC 9349.73832/93)
ROWLAND, BENJAMIN M. Commercial Conflict and Foreign Policy: A Study inAnglo-American Relations, 1932-1938. New York: Garland, 1987, 431 pp. (YC.1988.a.8209)
SCHATTSCHNEIDER, ELMER E. Politics, Pressures and the Tariff: A Study of FreePrivate Enterprise in Pressure Politics, as Shown in the 1929-1930 Revision of the Tariff. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1935, 301 pp. (20030.c.1)
57
SCHUKER, STEPHEN A. American 'Reparations' to Germany, 1919-33: Implicationsfor Third World Debt Crisis. Princeton, N.J.: Dept. of Economics, PrincetonUniversity, 1988, 170 pp. (DSC 6612.955 61)
STEWARD, DICK. Trade and Hemisphere: The Good Neighbor Policy and ReciprocalTrade. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1975, 307 pp. (X.520/11498)
TASCA, HENRY J. The Reciprocal Trade Policy of the United States: A Study in TradePhilosophy. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1938, 371 pp. (8231.f.4)
TAYLOR, ALONZO E. The New Deal and Foreign Trade. New York: Macmillan,1935, 301 pp. (8231.aa.14; 8232.b.44)
WALLACE, HENRY A. America Must Choose: The Advantages and Disadvantages ofNationalism, of World Trade and of a Planned Middle Course. New York: Foreign PolicyAssociation; Boston: World Peace Foundation, 1934, 33 pp. (X.510/993)
WILSON, JOAN HOFF. Ideology and Economics: U.S. Relations with the Soviet Union,1918-1933. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1974, 192 pp. (X.529/20092)
E. FARM SECURITY ADMINISTRATION [See also VI.R. Cultural and Intellectual History: Photography]
BALDWIN, SIDNEY. Poverty and Politics: The Rise and Decline of the Farm SecurityAdministration. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1968, 438 pp. (X.320/2354)GAER, JOSEPH. Toward Farm Security: The Problem of Rural Poverty and the Work ofthe Farm Security Administration. Washington, D.C.: Farm Security Administration,1941, 246 pp. (A.S.895/3)
GREY, MICHAEL R. New Deal Medicine: The Rural Health Programs of the FarmSecurity Administration. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1999, 238 pp. (DSC 99/19733)
F. INCOME, WAGES, COST OF LIVING, DISTRIBUTION OF WEALTH
AHEARN, DANIEL J. The Wages of Farm and Factory Laborers, 1914-1944. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1945, 245 pp. (Ac.2688/2)
BARGER, HAROLD. Outlay and Income in the United States, 1921-1938. NewYork: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1942, 391 pp. (W.P.13012)
BENEY, M. ADA. Cost of Living in the United States, 1914-1936. New York: National Industrial Conference Board, 1936, 99 pp. (8287.ee.28)
BENEY, M. ADA. Differentials in Industrial Wages and Hours in the United States. NewYork: National Industrial Conference Board, 1938, 203 pp. (8289.dd.2)
58
BENEY, M. ADA. Wages, Hours and Employment in the United States, 1914-1936. New York: National Industrial Conference Board, 1936, 197 pp. (Mic.A.8311)
DOANE, ROBERT R. The Anatomy of American Wealth: The Story of Our PhysicalAssets and Their Allocation as to Form and Use among the People. New York and London: Harper, 1940, 345 pp. (08230.h.46)
GOODRICH, CARTER. Earnings and Standard of Living of 1,000 Railway Employeesduring the Depression. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Labor, 1934, 56 pp. (A.S.108/11)
KUZNETS, SIMON S. National Income and Its Composition, 1919-1938. 2 vols. New York: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1941. (Mic.A.10064)
KUZNETS, SIMON S. National Income and Capital Formation, 1919-1935: APreliminary Report. New York: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1937, 86 pp. (W.P.651/32)
LUNDBERG, FERDINAND. America's 60 Families. New York: Vanguard Press,1937, 544 pp. (10388.l.17); New York: Vanguard Press, 1938, 578 pp. (010410.l.25)
STECKER, MARGARET L. Intercity Differences in Costs of Living in March 1935, 59Cities. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1937, 216 pp. (A.S.978/7)
WILLEFORD, MARY BRISTOW. Income and Health in Remote Rural Areas: AStudy of 400 Families in Leslie County, Kentucky. New York: Columbia University,1932, 88 pp. (08285.h.27)
G. INDUSTRY
BARGER, HAROLD and SAM H. SCHURR. The Mining Industries, 1899-1939: A Study of Output, Employment and Productivity. New York: National Bureau ofEconomic Research, 1944, 452 pp. (W.P.651/43)
COBB, JAMES C. Industrialization and Southern Society, 1877-1984. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1984, 185 pp. (YC.1988.a.11787)
COBB, JAMES C. The Selling of the South: The Southern Crusade for IndustrialDevelopment, 1936-1980. Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press,1982, 293 pp. (X.520/29042)
DAUGHERTY, CARROLL R., MELVIN G. DE CHAZEAU and SAMUEL S.STRATTON. The Economics of the Iron and Steel Industry. 2 vols. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1937, 1188 pp. (8231.ee.41)
DUNN, ROBERT W. and JACK HARDY. Labor and Textiles: A Study of Cottonand Wool Manufacturing. New York: International Pub., 1931, 256 pp. (Mic.A.19493)
59
FELDMAN, HERMAN. Racial Factors in American Industry. New York and London: Harper, 1931, 318 pp. (8285.w.31)
FINE, SIDNEY. The Automobile under the Blue Eagle: Labor, Management and theAutomobile Manufacturing Code. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1963, 566pp. (8280.cc.11)
HERRING, HARRIET L. Southern Industry and Regional Development. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1940, 103 pp. (Mic.A.10120)
HODGES, JAMES A. New Deal Labor Policy and the Southern Cotton Textile Industry,1933-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1986, 252 pp. (DSC88/31623)
KATZ, HAROLD. The Decline of Competition in the Automobile Industry, 1920-1940. New York: Arno, 1977, 504 pp. (X.800/36891)
KUHN, ARTHUR J. GM Passes Ford, 1918-1938: Designing the General MotorsPerformance-Control System. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press,1986, 308 pp. (DSC 86/21557)
LEMERT, BENJAMIN F. The Cotton Industry of the Southern Appalachian Piedmont. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1933, 188 pp. (8231.bb.27)MILLER, CHARLES W. The Automobile Gold Rushes and Depression Era Mining. Moscow: University of Idaho Press, 1998, 200 pp. (DSC 98/28419)
OATES, MARY J. The Role of the Cotton Textile Industry in the Economic Development ofthe American Southeast, 1900-1940. New York: Arno, 1975, 221 pp. (X.520/14988)
ROSENBLOOM, JOSHUA L. and WILLIAM A. SUNDSTROM. The Sources ofRegional Variation in the Severity of the Great Depression: Evidence from U.S.Manufacturing, 1919-1937. Cambridge, Mass.: National Bureau of EconomicResearch, 1997, 24 pp. (DSC 6067.7195 6288)
H. LABOR/WORKERS
AHEARN, DANIEL J. The Wages of Farm and Factory Laborers, 1914-1944. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1945, 245 pp. (Ac.2688/2)
ALLEN, RUTH A. Chapters in the History of Organized Labor in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1941, 258 pp. (Mic.A.8328)
ALLEN, RUTH A. and SAM B. BARTON. Wage Earners Meet the Depression. Austin: University of Texas, 1935, 105 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
BERNHEIM, ALFRED L. and DOROTHY VAN DOREN, eds. Labor and theGovernment: An Investigation of the Role of the Government in Labor Relations. New Yorkand London: McGraw-Hill, 1935, 413 pp. (20019.g.50)
60
BERNSTEIN, IRVING. A Caring Society: The New Deal Confronts the GreatDepression: A History of the American Worker, 1933-1941. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1985, 338 pp. (DSC 85/31056; DSC 85/38392)
BERNSTEIN, IRVING. The Lean Years: A History of the American Worker, 1920-1933. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1960, 577 pp. (08277.p.13)
BERNSTEIN, IRVING. The New Deal Collective Bargaining Policy. Reprint, NewYork: Da Capo, 1975, 178 pp. (X.800/38627)
BOW, FRANK T. Independent Labor Organizations and the National Labor Relations Act. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1940, 120 pp. (Mic.A.19504)
BRAZEAL, B. R. The Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters: Its Origin and Development. New York and London: Harper, 1946, 258 pp. (8236.e.27; 8288.f.68)
BROOKS, ROBERT R. Unions of Their Own Choosing: An Account of the NationalLabor Relations Board and Its Work. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1939,296 pp. (8288.2.12)
BROWN, MALCOLM J. and ORIN CASSMORE. Migratory Cotton Pickers inArizona. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1939, 23 pp. (A.S.978/43)
CAYTON, HORACE R. and GEORGE S. MITCHELL. Black Workers and the NewUnions. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1939, 473 pp. (8289.dd.7)
CHATEAUVERT, MELINDA. Marching Together: Women of the Brotherhood ofSleeping Car Porters. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1998, 267 pp. (DSC98/11466)
CHENG, LUCIE and EDNA BONACICH, eds. Labor Immigration under Capitalism: Asian Workers in the United States before World War II. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1984, 634pp. (X.800/41614)
COHEN, LIZABETH. Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990, 526 pp. (YC.1991.b.1030);Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992, 526 pp. (YK.1992.a.8514)
CHRISTENSON, CARROLL L. and RICHARD A. MYREN. Wage Policy underthe Walsh-Healey Public Contracts Act: A Critical Review. Bloomington and London: Indiana University Press, 1966, 239 pp. (Ac.2692.w/10; X.510/2190)
CORTNER, RICHARD C. The Wagner Act Cases. Knoxville: University ofTennessee Press, 1964, 208 pp. (X.200/1478)
CROSS, IRA B. A History of the Labor Movement in California. Berkeley, Calif.: University of California Press, 1935, 354 pp. (Ac.2689.g/19; X.520/9067)
61
CUMMINS, EARL E. The Labor Problem in the United States. London: Macmillan,1932, 857 pp. (8286.ff.62)
DANIEL, CLETUS E. The ACLU and the Wagner Act: An Inquiry into the Depression-era Crisis of American Liberalism. New York: New York State School of Industrial andLabor Relations, Cornell University, 1980, 142 pp. (X.529/63986)
DANIEL, CLETUS E. Bitter Harvest: A History of California Farmworkers, 1870-1941. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1981, 348 pp. (X.800/31360)
DAUGHERTY, CARROLL R. Labor Problems in American Industry. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1933, 959 pp. (08286.b.61); rev. ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1938, 984 pp. (8288.ee.11); 5th ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1941, 1008 pp. (8287.c.65)
DAUGHERTY, CARROLL R. Labor under the N.R.A. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1934, 37 pp. (Mic.A.10143)
DAVIS, HORACE B. Labor and Steel. London: Martin Lawrence, 1933, 304 pp. (W.P.7662/1)
DE WITT, HOWARD. Violence in the Fields: California Filipino Farm LaborUnionization during the Great Depression. Saratoga, Calif.: Century Twenty One, 1980,139 pp. (DSC 80/33084)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and WARREN VAN TIME. John L. Lewis: A Biography. New York: Quadrangle/New York Times Book Co., 1977, 619 pp. (X.800/14861)
DUFFY, SUSAN. American Labor on Stage: Dramatic Interpretations of the Steel andTextile Industries in the 1930s. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1996, 156pp. (YC.1997.b.598)
DUNN, ROBERT W. and JACK HARDY. Labor and Textiles: A Study of Cottonand Wool Manufacturing. New York: International Pub., 1931, 256 pp. (Mic.A.19493)
EBY, HERBERT O. The Labor Relations Act in the Courts. New York: Harpers,1943, 250 pp. (Mic.A.9978)
FAUE, ELIZABETH. Community of Suffering and Struggle: Women, Men and the LaborMovement in Minneapolis, 1915-1945. Chapel Hill: University of North CarolinaPress, 1991, 295 pp. (YA.1992.b.4587)
FINE, SIDNEY. The Automobile under the Blue Eagle: Labor, Management and theAutomobile Manufacturing Code. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1963, 566pp. (8280.cc.11)
62
FONER, PHILIP S. and RONALD L. LEWIS, eds. The Black Worker: ADocumentary History from Colonial Times to the Present. Vol. 6, The Era of Post-warProsperity and the Great Depression, 1920-1936. Philadelphia: Temple University Press,1981. (X.0800/1579); Vol. 7, The Black Worker from the Founding of the CIO to theAFL-CIO. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983. (X.0800/1579)
FRANKLIN, CHARLES L. The Negro Labor Unionist of New York: Problems andConditions among Negroes in the Labor Unions in Manhattan, with Special Reference to theN.R.A. and post-N.R.A. Situations. New York: Columbia University Press, 1936, 417pp. (08285.h.51); reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968, 415 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(420.))
FREEMAN, JOSHUA B. In Transit: The Transport Workers Union in New York City,1933-1936. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989, 434 pp. (YH.1990.b.507)
FRIEDLÄNDER, PETER. The Emergence of a UAW Local, 1936-1939: A Study inClass and Culture. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of Pittsburgh Press; London: Feffer andSimons, 1976, 155 pp. (X.529/30476)FUJITA, KUNIKO. Black Worker's Struggles in Detroit's Auto Industry, 1935-1975. Saratoga, Calif.: Century Twenty One, 1980, 130 pp. (X.525/8724)
GABIN, NANCY F. Feminism in the Labor Movement: Women and the United AutoWorkers, 1935-1975. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1990, 257 pp. (YA.1993.b.9139)
GALENSON, WALTER. The CIO Challenge to the AFL: A History of the AmericanLabor Movement, 1935-1941. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1960, 732pp. (Ac.2692.bf.(24.))
GALL, GILBERT J. Pursuing Justice: Lee Pressman, the New Deal and the CIO. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1999, 363 pp. (DSC 99/20702)
GRAY, BRENDA C. Black Female Domestics during the Depression in New York City,1930-1940. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 200 pp. (YC.1993.b.6369)
GREGORY, CHARLES O. Policy Development under the National Labor Relations Act. Chicago: University of Chicago, Industrial Relations Center, 1947. (Mic.A.12246(4)
GREENE, LORENZO J. and CARTER G. WOODSON. The Negro Wage Earner. Washington, D.C.: Association for the Study of Negro Life and History, 1930, 388pp. (Ac.8444/5)
GRIFFLER, KEITH P. What Price Alliance?: Black Radicals Confront White Labor,1918-1938. New York: Garland, 1995, 266 pp. (YC.1995.b.3836)
GROSS, JAMES A. Reshaping of the National Labor Relations Board: National LaborPolicy in Transition, 1937-1947. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1981. (DSC 82/12517)
63
HARRIS, HERBERT. American Labor. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press,1939, 459 pp. (08286.k.25)
HARRIS, WILLIAM H. Keeping the Faith: A. Philip Randolph, Milton P. Webster andthe Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters, 1925-37. Urbana and London: University ofIllinois Press, 1977, 252 pp. (X.520/12431)
HEVENER, JOHN W. Which Side Are You On? The Harlan County Coal Miners,1931-39. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1978, 216 pp. (X.800/29882; X.800/37354)
HIGGINS, GEORGE G. Voluntarism in Organized Labor in the United States, 1930-1940. New York: Arno, 1969, 182 pp. (YA.1991.a.13494)
HODGES, JAMES A. New Deal Labor Policy and the Southern Cotton Textile Industry,1933-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1986, 252 pp. (DSC88/31623) HUNNICUTT, BENJAMIN K. Kellogg's Six-Hour Day. Philadelphia: TempleUniversity Press, 1996, 261 pp. (YA.1997.b.3079)
JAMIESON, STUART. Labor Unionism in American Agriculture. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 1945, 457 pp. (A.S.111)
JOHNSON, CHRISTOPHER H. Maurice Sugar: Law, Labor and the Left in Detroit,1912-1950. Detroit, Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1988, 334 pp. (YA.1990.b.4428)
KALTENBORN, HOWARD S. Governmental Adjustment of Labor Disputes. Chicago: Foundation Press, 1943, 327 pp. (Mic.A.10055)
KOFAS, JON V. The Struggle for Legitimacy: Latin American Labor and the United States,1930-1960. Tempe: Center for Latin American Studies, Arizona State University,1992, 425 pp. (YA.1992.b.2973; YA.1993.a.2203)
KORTH, PHILIP A. and MARGARET R. BEEGLE. I Remember Like Today: TheAuto-Lite Strike of 1934. East Lansing: Michigan State University Press, 1988, 245 pp. (YA.1990.b.3526)
LEAB, DANIEL J. A Union of Individuals: The Formation of the American NewspaperGuild, 1933-1956. New York and London: Columbia University Press, 1970, 362pp. (X.520/3752)
LEVENSTEIN, HARVEY A. Communism, Anticommunism and the CIO. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 364 pp. (X.800/31852)
LOFTIS, ANNE. Witnesses to the Struggle: Imaging the 1930s California LaborMovement. Reno: University of Nevada Press, 1998, 239 pp. (DSC 98/24858)
64
LORWIN, LEWIS L. The American Federation of Labor: History, Policies and Prospects. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1933, 573 pp. (Ac.2391.(5.))
LORWIN, LEWIS L. Labor Relations Boards: The Regulation of Collective Bargainingunder the National Industrial Recovery Act. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution,1935, 477 pp. (Mic.A.10123)
LYND, STAUGHTON, ed. 'We Are All Leaders': The Alternative Unionism of theEarly 1930s. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1996, 343 pp. (DSC 97/01443)
MACDONALD, LOIS, GLADYS L. PALMER and THERESA WOLFSON. Laborand the N.R.A. New York: Affiliated Schools for Workers, 1934, 51 pp. (Mic.A.12246(5))
MCFARLAND, CHARLES K. Roosevelt, Lewis and the New Deal, 1933-1940. FortWorth: Texas Christian University Press, 1970, 132 pp. (X.519/13250)
MCPHERSON, WILLIAM H. Labor Relations in the Automobile Industry. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1940, 173 pp. (Mic.A.13175)
MCWILLIAMS, CAREY. Factories in the Field: The Story of Migratory Farm Labor inCalifornia. Boston: Little, Brown, 1939, 334 pp. (X.319/1933)
MCWILLIAMS, CAREY. Ill Fares the Land: Migrants and Migratory Labour in theUnited States. London: Faber & Faber, 1945, 245 pp. (8287.de.71)
MEIER, AUGUST and ELLIOTT RUDWICK. Black Detroit and the Rise of theUAW. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 289 pp. (X.529/36379)
MELZER, RICHARD. Madrid Revisited: Life and Labor in a New Mexico MiningCamp in the Years of the Great Depression. Santa Fe, N.M.: Lightning Tree, 1976, 63pp. (YA.1987.b.1079)
MENEFEEE, SELDON C. Mexican Migratory Workers of South Texas. Washington,D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1941, 67 pp. (A.S.978/48)
MIKHAILOV, B. Y., N. V. MOSTOVETS and G. N. SEVOSTYANOV, eds. Recent History of the Labor Movement in the United States, 1939-1965. Moscow: Progress Pub., 1979, 533 pp. (X.809/28055)
MILLIS, HARRY A. and EMILY C. BROWN. From the Wagner Act to Taft-Hartley: A Study of National Labor Policy and Labor Relations. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1950, 723 pp. (8286.f.67)
MILTON, DAVID. The Politics of U.S. Labor: From the Great Depression to the NewDeal. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1982, 189 pp. (DSC 83/07164)
MUSTE, A. J. The Automobile Industry and Organized Labor. Baltimore, Md.: Christian Social Justice Fund, 1936, 59 pp. (Mic.A.12744(2))
65
NATIONAL COMMITTEE FOR THE DEFENSE OF POLITICALPRISONERS. Harlan Miners Speak: Report on Terrorism in the Kentucky Coal Fields. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1932, 348 pp. (Mic.A.18925)
NELSON, BRUCE. Workers on the Waterfront: Seamen, Longshoremen and Unionism inthe 1930s. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1988, 352 pp. (DSC 88/23658)
NELSON, DANIEL. American Rubber Workers and Organized Labor, 1900-1941. Princeton, N.J., and London: Princeton University Press, 1988, 339 pp. (YC.1991.b.4242)
NEWELL, BARBARA W. Chicago and the Labor Movement: Metropolitan Unionism inthe 1930's. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1961, 288 pp. (8280.aa.28)
NORTHRUP, HERBERT R. Organized Labor and the Negro. 2d ed., New Yorkand London: Harper, 1944, 312 pp. (08286.dd.92)
OBLINGER, CARL D. Divided Kingdom: Work, Community and the Mining Wars inthe Central Illinois Coal Fields during the Great Depression. Springfield, Ill.: Illinois StateHistorical Society, 1991, 265 pp. (YA.1994.a.12499)
PERRY, LOUIS B. and RICHARD S. PERRY. A History of the Los Angeles LaborMovement, 1911-1941. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press,1963, 622 pp. (Ac.2689.hb.(12.))
PETERSON, FLORENCE. American Labor Unions: What They Are and How TheyWork. 3d ed. New York and London: Harper, 1946, 338 pp. (8288.h.82)
PETERSON, FLORENCE. Handbook of Labor Unions. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Public Affairs, 1944, 415 pp. (08285.d.100)
PETERSON, FLORENCE. Strikes in the United States, 1880-1936. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Bureau of Labor Statistics, 1938, 183 pp. (A.S.111)
PHELPS, ORME W. The Legislative Background of the Fair Labor Standards Act: AStudy of the Growth of National Sentiment in Favor of Governmental Regulation of Wages,Hours and Child Labor. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 71 pp. (Ac.2691.e/5; Mic.A.10070)
PRUETTE, LORINE, ed. Women Workers through the Depression: A Study of WhiteCollar Employment. New York: Macmillan, 1934, 164 pp. (8286.e.55)
REID, IRA DE A., et al. The Urban Negro Worker in the United States, 1925-1936. 2vols. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, 1938. (A.S.189/3)
REISLER, MARK. By the Sweat of Their Brow: Mexican Immigrant Labor in the UnitedStates, 1900-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 298 pp. (X.529/31635)
66
ROBERTS, JOHN W. Putting Foreign Policy to Work: The Role of Organized Labor inAmerican Foreign Relations, 1932-1941. New York: Garland, 1995, 322 pp. (DSC95/35655)
ROSENFARB, JOSEPH. The National Labor Policy and How It Works. New Yorkand London: Harper, 1940, 732 pp. (20033.h.21)
RUÍZ, VICKI L. Cannery Women, Cannery Lives: Mexican Women, Unionization andthe California Food Processing Industry, 1930-1950. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1987, 194 pp. (YA.1989.b.7702)SALNY, SAMUEL M. Independent Unions under the Wagner Act: A Manual forAttorneys, Labor Relations Advisors and Union Officials. Boston: E. W. Hildreth, 1944,342 pp. (Mic.A.12379)
SCHACHT, JOHN N. The Making of Telephone Unionism, 1920-1947. NewBrunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1985, 282 pp. (YA.1990.b.4026)
SCHARF, LOIS. To Work and to Wed: Female Employment, Feminism and the GreatDepression. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1980, 240 pp. (X.529/39543)
SEATON, DOUGLAS P. Catholics and Radicals: The Association of Catholic TradeUnionists and the American Labor Movement, from Depression to Cold War. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press, 1981, 269 pp. (DSC 81/19791)
SEIDMAN, HAROLD. Labor Czars: A History of Labor Racketeering. New York: Liveright Pub., 1938, 317 pp. (08286.i.8)
SELVIN, DAVID F. A Terrible Anger: The 1934 Waterfront and General Strikes in SanFrancisco. Detroit, Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1996, 272 pp. (YA.1998.a.10565)
SHOEMAKER, JAMES H. Labor in the Territory of Hawaii. Washington, D.C.: U.S.House Doc., 76th Congress, 3d Session, no. 848, 1940, 244 pp. (A.S.10)
SILVERBERG, LOUIS G., ed. The Wagner Act: After Ten Years. Washington, D.C.: Bureau of National Affairs, 1945, 126 pp. (X.200/1688)
SPERO, STERLING D. and ABRAM L. HARRIS. The Black Worker: The Negroand the Labor Movement. New York: Columbia University Press, 1931, 509 pp. (8285.r.23)
STOLBERG, BENJAMIN. The Story of the CIO. New York: Viking, 1938, 292 pp. (Mic.A.9363)
SUGAR, MAURICE. Ford Hunger March. Berkeley, Calif.: Meiklejohn CivilLiberties Institute, 1980. (DSC 5536.395 v 1)
67
SUGGS, GEORGE G. Union Busting in the Tri-State: The Oklahoma, Kansas andMissouri Metal Workers' Strike of 1935. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1986,282 pp. (DSC 86/27042)
TAFT, PHILIP. The A.F. of L. from the Death of Gompers to the Merger. New York: Harper, 1959, 499 pp. (8291.ff.4)
TAYLOR, PAUL S. Mexican Labor in the United States. Berkeley: University ofCalifornia Publications in Economics, 1928-1934. (Ac.2689.g/19)
TEAD, ORDWAY and HENRY C. METCALF. Labor Relations under the RecoveryAct. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 259 pp. (20017.b.5)
TROTTER, JOE W., JR. Black Milwaukee: The Making of an Industrial Proletariat,1915-45. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1985, 302 pp. (DSC 85/12464)
VARGAS, ZARAGOSA. Proletarians of the North: A History of Mexican IndustrialWorkers in Detroit and the Midwest, 1917-1933. Berkeley and Oxford: University ofCalifornia Press, 1993, 277 pp. (YC.1994.b.5414)
VITTOZ, STANLEY. New Deal Labor Policy and the American Industrial Economy. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1987, 214 pp. (DSC 87/23058)
VORSE, MARY H. Labor's New Millions. New York: Modern Age Books, 1938,312 pp. (08286.g.13)
WALSH, JOHN R. Labour's Battle in the U.S.A.: The Fight for Industrial Unionism. London: Allen & Unwin, 1938, 293 pp. (08286.h.7)
WEBER, DEVRA. Dark Sweat, White Gold: California Farm Workers, Cotton and theNew Deal. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1994, 338 pp. (YC.1995.b.2581)
WEBB, JOHN N. The Migratory-Casual Worker. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1937, 128 pp. (A.S.978/7)
WEISIGER, MARSHA L. Land of Plenty: Oklahomans in the Cotton Fields of Arizona,1933-1942. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1995, 238 pp. (YC.1997.a.1863)
WOLMAN, LEO. Ebb and Flow in Trade Unionism. New York: National Bureau ofEconomic Research, 1936, 251 pp. (W.P.651/30)
YELLEN, SAMUEL. American Labor Struggles. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1936,398 pp. (8288.aaa.6)
ZIEGER, ROBERT H. American Workers, American Unions, 1920-1985. Baltimore,Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986, 233 pp. (YC.1988.b.5707);
68
2d ed., Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1994, 244 pp. (YC.1995.a.2205)
ZIEGER, ROBERT H. The CIO, 1935-1955. Chapel Hill and London: Universityof North Carolina Press, 1995, 491 pp. (DSC 95/15792)
ZIEGER, ROBERT H., ed. Organized Labor in the Twentieth-Century South. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1991, 289 pp. (YA.1993.b.11674)
ZIEGER, ROBERT H. Rebuilding the Pulp and Paper Workers' Union, 1933-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1984, 242 pp. (DSC 84/22104)
I. NATIONAL INDUSTRIAL RECOVERY ACT/ NATIONAL RECOVERY ADMINISTRATION
BRAND, DONALD R. Corporatism and the Rule of Law: A Study of the NationalRecovery Administration. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1988, 340 pp. (DSC88/25127)
CONNERY, ROBERT H. The Administration of an N.R.A. Code: A Case Study ofthe Men's Clothing Industry. Chicago: Public Administration Service, 1938, 211 pp. (Ac.2286.b)
DAUGHERTY, CARROLL R. Labor under the N.R.A. Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1934, 37 pp. (Mic.A.10143)
FINE, SIDNEY. The Automobile under the Blue Eagle: Labor, Management and theAutomobile Manufacturing Code. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Press, 1963, 566pp. (8280.cc.11)
FRANKLIN, CHARLES L. The Negro Labor Unionist of New York: Problems andConditions among Negroes in the Labor Unions in Manhattan, with Special Reference to theN.R.A. and post-N.R.A. Situations. New York: Columbia University Press, 1936, 417pp. (08285.h.51); reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968, 415 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(420.))
GALLAGHER, MICHAEL F. Government Control of Industry in America: A Study ofthe NRA. London: Oxford University Press, 1934, 241 pp. (20018.b.30)
HIMMELBERG, ROBERT F. The Origins of the National Recovery Administration: Business, Government and the Trade Association Issue, 1921-1933. New York: FordhamUniversity Press, 1976, 232 pp. (X.800/28652)
JOHNSON, HUGH S. The Blue Eagle from Egg to Earth. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1935, 459 pp. (20018.ff.50)
KREPS, THEODORE J. Business and Government under the National RecoveryAdministration. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 46 pp. (Ac.1915.b)
69
LORWIN, LEWIS L. Labor Relations Boards: The Regulation of Collective Bargainingunder the National Industrial Recovery Act. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution,1935, 477 pp. (Mic.A.10123)
LYON, LEVERETT S., PAUL T. HOMAN, et al. The National RecoveryAdministration: An Analysis and Appraisal. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution,1935, 947 pp. (8287.df.73)
MACDONALD, LOIS, GLADYS L. PALMER and THERESA WOLFSON. Laborand the N.R.A. New York: Affiliated Schools for Workers, 1934, 51 pp. (Mic.A.12246(5))
MACK, RUTH P. Controlling Retailers: A Study of Cooperation and Control in theRetail Trade with Special Reference to the NRA. Reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968,551 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(423.))
MARSHALL, LEON C. Hours and Wages Provisions in NRA Codes: A CompilationOrganized by Leon C. Marshall. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1935, 115pp. (Mic.A.10028)
PEARCE, CHARLES A. NRA Trade Practice Programs. New York: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1939, 225 pp. (08230.ee.20)
RICHBERG, DONALD R. The Rainbow: After the Sunshine of Prosperity, the Delugeof the Depression, the Rainbow of the NRA, What Have We Learned? Where Are WeGoing? Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1936, 319 pp. (8231.bb.44)
SMITH, BLACKWELL. My Imprints on the Sands of Time: The Life of a New Dealer. New York: Vantage, 1993, 446 pp. (YA.1996.b.7978)
TEAD, ORDWAY and HENRY C. METCALF. Labor Relations under the RecoveryAct. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 259 pp. (20017.b.5)
WEINSTEIN, MICHAEL M. Recovery and Redistribution under the NIRA. Amsterdamand Oxford: North-Holland, 1980, 171 pp. (X.520/23176)
WILCOX, CLAIR, HERBERT F. FRASER and PATRICK M. MALIN, eds. America's Recovery Program. London: Oxford University Press, 1934, 253 pp. (08229.m.15)
J. NATURAL RESOURCES, PUBLIC WORKS AND CONSERVATION
1. General Studies
CHASE, STUART. Rich Land, Poor Land: A Study of Waste in the Natural Resources ofAmerica. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 361 pp. (10409.y.24)
70
CHEYNEY, EDWARD G. and THORVALD S. HANSEN. This Is Our Land: TheStory of Conservation in the United States. St. Paul, Minn.: Webb Book Pub. 1940, 337pp. (7079.b.5)
CUTLER, PHOEBE. The Public Landscape of the New Deal. New Haven, Conn., andLondon: Yale University Press, 1985, 182 pp. (YH.1987.b.287)
GALBRAITH, JOHN K. and GOVE G. JOHNSON, JR. The Economic Effects of theFederal Public Works Expenditures, 1933-1938. Washington, D.C.: Depts. of State andPublic Institutions, National Resources Planning Board, Public Works Committee,1940, 131 pp. (A.S.938/25)
GATES, WILLIAM H. Hoover Dam, Including the Story of the Turbulent Colorado River. Los Angeles, Calif.: Wetzel Pub., 1932, 88 pp. (10410.y.14)
GAYER, ARTHUR D. Public Works in Prosperity and Depression. New York: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1935, 460 pp. (W.P.651/29)
GLOVER, KATHERINE. America Begins Again: The Conquest of Waste in OurNatural Resources. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1939, 382 pp. (8288.f.2)
GUSTAFSON, A. F., et al. Conservation in the United States. Ithaca, N.Y.: ComstockPub., 1939, 445 pp. (Mic.A.12375)
HARDIN, CHARLES M. The Politics of Agriculture: Soil Conservation and the Strugglefor Power in Rural America. Glencoe, Ill.: Free Press, 1952, 282 pp. (7082.e.3)
ISAKOFF, JACK F. The Public Works Administration. Urbana: University of IllinoisPress, 1938, 166 pp. (Ac.2692.u/14; Mic.A.9969)
KLEINSORGE, PAUL L. The Boulder Canyon Project: Historical and Economic Aspects. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1941, 330 pp. (08766.d.60)
NIXON, EDGAR B., ed. Franklin D. Roosevelt and Conservation, 1911-1945. 2 vols. Hyde Park, N.Y.: Franklin D. Roosevelt Library, 1957. (7009.h.25)
OWEN, A. L. RIESCH. Conservation under F.D.R. New York: Praeger, 1983, 268pp. (X.800/36566)
SCHWARTZ, BONNIE F. The Civil Works Administration, 1933-1934: The Businessof Emergency Employment in the New Deal. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press,1984, 300 pp. (X.529/71774)
STEVENS, JOSEPH E. Hoover Dam: An American Adventure. Norman: Universityof Oklahoma Press, 1988, 326 pp. (YC.1989.b.1739)
UNITED STATES FEDERAL EMERGENCY ADMINISTRATION OF PUBLICWORKS. America Builds: The Record of PWA. Washington, D.C.: U.S. FederalEmergency Relief Administration, 1939, 298 pp. (A.S.917/21)
71
UNITED STATES FEDERAL EMERGENCY ADMINISTRATION OF PUBLICWORKS. Building for Recovery: The Story of PWA. Washington, D.C.: U.S. FederalEmergency Relief Administration, 1939, 16 pp. (A.S.917/18)
WILBUR, RAY L. and WILLIAM A. DU PUY. Conservation in the Department of theInterior. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1931, 252 pp. (10408.q.4)WILLIAMS, JUANITA KERWIN. Grants-in-Aid under the Public WorksAdministration: A Study in Federal-State-Local Relations. New York: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1939, 292 pp. (08286.ee.47); New York: AMS Press, 1968, 291pp. (Ac.2688/2.(459.))
2. Civilian Conservation Corps
COLE, OLEN. The African-American Experience in the Civilian Conservation Corps. Gainesville: University Press of Florida, 1999, 114 pp. (DSC 99/28387)
DEARBORN, NED H. Once in a Lifetime: A Guide to the CCC Camp. New York: Merrill, 1936, 302 pp. (YA.1988.a.21248)
HARBY, SAMUEL F. A Study of Education in the Civilian Conservation Corps Camps ofthe Second Corps Area, April 1933-March 1937. Ann Arbor, Mich.: Edwards, 1938,264 pp. (08385.c.9)
HILL, EDWIN G. In the Shadow of the Mountain: The Spirit of the CCC. Pullman: Washington State University Press, 1990, 187 pp. (YA.1993.a.19587)
HOLLAND, KENNETH and FRANK E. HILL. Youth in the CCC: Prepared for theAmerican Youth Commission. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Education: 1942, 263 pp. (X.520/7365)
HOYT, RAY. 'We Can Take It': A Short Story of the CCC. New York: AmericanBook Co., 1935, 128 pp. (010410.ee.12)
KYLIE, H. R., G. H. HIERONYMUS and A. G. HALL. CCC (Civilian ConservationCorps) Forestry. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Forest Service, 1937, 334 pp. (07076.dd.52)
LACY, LESLIE A. The Soil Soldiers: The Civilian Conservation Corps in the GreatDepression. Radnor, Pa.: Chilton, 1976, 239 pp. (X.529/34716)
MERRILL, PERRY H. Roosevelt's Forest Army: A History of the Civilian ConservationCorps, 1933-1942. Montpelier, Vt.: P. H. Merrill, 1981, 208 pp. (YA.1986.a.9560)
OLIVER, ALFRED C. and HAROLD M. DUDLEY, eds. This New America: TheSpirit of the Civilian Conservation Corps. London: Longmans, 1937, 188 pp. (8288.aa.38)
72
SAVAGE, CHRISTINE E. New Deal Adobe: The Civilian Conservation Corps and theReconstruction of Mission La Purisima, 1934-1942. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Fithian Press,1991, 162 pp. (YA.1992.a.21027)
SOIL CONSERVATION SERVICE AND UNITED STATES FORESTSERVICE. The CCC at Work: A Story of 2,500,000 Young Men. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1941, 103 pp. (A.S.987/8)
3. Parks
ALBRIGHT, HORACE M., RUSSELL E. DICKENSON and WILLIAM PENNMOTT, JR. National Park Service: The Story Behind the Scenery. Las Vegas, Nev.: KCPublications, 1987, 93 pp. (YA.1990.b.1750)
BUTLER, GEORGE D. Municipal and County Parks in the United States, 1935. Washington, D.C.: National Park Service, 1937, 147 pp. (A.S.194/27)
BUXTON, BARRY M. and STEVEN M. BEATTY, eds. Blue Ridge Parkway: Agent of Transition; Golden Anniversary Conference Papers. Boone, N.C.: AppalachianConsortium, 1986, 272 pp. (DSC 88/01704)
CHITTENDEN, HIRAM M. The Yellowstone National Park. Rev. by EleanorChittenden Cress and Isabelle F. Story. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press;London: Oxford University Press, 1933, 286 pp. (010410.eee.16)
GOOD, ALBERT H. Park and Recreation Structures. 3 vols. Washington, D.C.: National Park Service, 1938. (A.S.197/4)
ISE, JOHN. Our National Park Policy: A Critical History. Baltimore, Md.: JohnsHopkins Press, 1961, 701 pp. (010160.k.32)
STORY, ISABELLE F. The National Parks and Emergency Conservation. Rev. ed., Washington, D.C.: National Park Service, 1936, 37 pp. (A.S.196/15)
YARD, ROBERT S. The National Parks Portfolio. Rev. by Isabelle F. Story. 6th ed.,Washington, D.C.: National Park Service, 1931, 274 pp. (A.S.195/18)
4. Tennessee Valley Authority
CLAPP, GORDON R. The TVA: An Approach to the Development of a Region. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1955, 206 pp. (Ac.2691.dw.(28.))
CREESE, WALTER L. TVA's Public Planning: The Vision, the Reality. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1990, 388 pp. (YA.1992.b.4424)
GRANT, NANCY L. TVA and Black Americans: Planning for the Status Quo. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1990, 207 pp. (YA.1992.b.2589)
73
HARGROVE, ERWIN C. Prisoners of Myth: The Leadership of the Tennessee ValleyAuthority, 1933-1990. Princeton, N.J., and Chichester: Princeton University Press,1994, 374 pp. (YC.1996.b.2011)
HUBBARD, PRESTON J. Origins of the TVA: The Muscle Shoals Controversy, 1920-1932. Nashville, Tenn.: Vanderbilt University Press, 1961, 340 pp. (X.519/852)
KYLE, JOHN H. The Building of the TVA: An Illustrated History. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1958, 162 pp. (08765.d.33)
LILIENTHAL, DAVID E. TVA: Democracy on the March. New York and London: Harper, 1944, 248 pp. (8287.l.60); Harmondsworth and New York: Penguin Books,1944, 208 pp. (12208.a.2/151); 20th anniversary ed., New York: Harper, 1953, 294pp. (10414.e.34)
MCCRAW, THOMAS K. Morgan vs. Lilienthal: The Feud within the TVA. Chicago: Loyola University Press, 1970, 153 pp. (X.800/6971)
MCCRAW, THOMAS K. TVA and the Power Fight, 1933-1939. Philadelphia: Lippincott, 1971, 201 pp. (X.629/4978)
MCDONALD, MICHAEL. TVA and the Dispossessed: The Resettlement of Populationin the Norris Dam Area. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1982, 334 pp. (DSC83/01051)
PRITCHETT, CHARLES H. The Tennessee Valley Authority: A Study in PublicAdministration. New York: Russell & Russell, 1971, 333 pp. (X.520/34269)
SELZNICK, PHILIP. TVA and the Grass Roots: A Study in the Sociology of FormalOrganization. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Publications inCulture and Society, 1949, 274 pp. (Ac.2689.g/59; 08285.i.50)
WHEELER, WILLIAM B. and MICHAEL J. MCDONALD. TVA and the TellicoDam, 1936-1979: A Bureaucratic Crisis in Post-industrial America. Knoxville: Universityof Tennessee Press, 1986, 290 pp. (DSC 86/25643)
K. RECONSTRUCTION FINANCE CORPORATION
JONES, JESSE H. and EDWARD ARALY. Fifty Billion Dollars: My Thirteen Yearswith the RFC, 1932-1945. New York: Macmillan, 1951, 631 pp. (8290.h.5)
OLSON, JAMES S. Herbert Hoover and the Reconstruction Finance Corporation, 1931-1933. Ames: Iowa State University Press, 1977, 155 pp. (X.950/30416)
OLSON, JAMES S. Saving Capitalism: The Reconstruction Finance Corporation and theNew Deal, 1933-1940. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1988, 155 pp. (YC.1991.a.624)
L. SHARECROPPERS AND TENANT FARMERS
74
AGEE, JAMES R. and WALKER EVANS. Let Us Now Praise Famous Men. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1960, 471 pp. (10153.ff.26); London: Peter Owen, 1965, 471. (X.800/789); London: Panther Books, 1969, 428 pp. (X.808/6149)
BÖGER, ASTRID. Documenting Lives: James Agee's and Walker Evans's Let Us NowPraise Famous Men. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 1994, 173 pp. (YA.1996.a.3704)
CONRAD, DAVID E. The Forgotten Farmers: The Story of Sharecroppers in the NewDeal. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1965, 223 pp. (X.311/666)
GRUBBS, DONALD H. Cry from the Cotton: The Southern Tenant Farmers' Union andthe New Deal. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1971, 218 pp. (X.329/6075)
HAGOOD, MARGARET J. Mothers of the South: Portraiture of the White Tenant FarmWoman. Reprint, New York: Greenwood, 1969, 252 pp. (YA.1990.a.21070);Charlottesville and London: University Press of Virginia, 1996, 252 pp. (YC.1997.a.2102)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S., EDWIN R. EMBREE and W. W. ALEXANDER TheCollapse of Cotton Tenancy: Summary of Field Studies and Statistical Surveys, 1933-35. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1935, 81 pp. (Mic.A.10108)
KESTER, HOWARD. Revolt among the Sharecroppers. Reprint, New York: Arno,1969, 98 pp. (X.950/33133)
MITCHELL, H. L. Mean Things Happening in This Land: The Life and Times of H. L.Mitchell, Co-founder of the Southern Tenant Farmers Union. Montclair, N.J.: Allanheld,Osmun, 1979, 358 pp. (X.529/49151)
RAPER, ARTHUR F. Preface to Peasantry: A Tale of Two Black Belt Counties. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1936, 423 pp. (Mic.A.17012)
RAPER, ARTHUR F. and IRA DE A. REID. Sharecroppers All. Reissue, NewYork: Russell & Russell, 1971, 281 pp. (X.809/60316)
STIMPSON, EDDIE. My Remembers: A Black Sharecropper's Recollections of theDepression. Denton: University of North Texas Press, 1996, 167 pp. (YA.1997.b.1745)
M. TAXATION
BEITO, DAVID T. Taxpayers in Revolt: Tax Resistance during the Great Depression. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1989, 216 pp. (YC.1989.b.6068)
BLAKEY, ROY G. and GLADYS M. C. BLAKEY. The Federal Income Tax. NewYork: Longmans, 1940, 640 pp. (06617.ee.31)
75
LEFF, MARK H. The Limits of Symbolic Reform: The New Deal and Taxation, 1933-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984, 308 pp. (YC.1988.b.3709)LENT, GEORGE E. The Impact of the Undistributed Profits Tax, 1936-1937. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1948, 203 pp. (Ac.2688/2)
SHOUP, CARL S. Facing the Tax Problem: A Survey of Taxation in the United Statesand a Program for the Future. New York: Twentieth Century Fund, 1940, 606 pp. (8231.d.72)
SHOUP, CARL S. The Sales Tax in the American States. New York: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1934, 833 pp. (08229.p.7)
N. TRANSPORTATION AND TRAVEL
1. General Studies
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. The Intracoastal Waterway: Norfolk to Key West. Washington, D.C.: GovernmentPrinting Office, 1937, 143 pp. (10413.n.11)
HULTGREN, THOR. American Transportation in Prosperity and Depression. New York: National Bureau of Economic Research, 1948, 397 pp. (Mic.A.8516)
KETTERING, CHARLES F. and ALLEN ORTH. The New Necessity: TheCulmination of a Century of Progress in Transportation. Baltimore, Md.: Williams &Wilkins, 1932, 124 pp. (Mic.A.12772)
MOULTON, HAROLD G., et al. The American Transportation Problem. Washington,D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1933, 915 pp. (Mic.A.10111)
ROBBINS, TRINA and CASEY ROBBINS, eds. Travel and Vacation AdvertisingCuts from the Twenties and Thirties. New York: Dover, 1994, 94 pp. (YK.1995.b.7589)
VAN METRE, T. W. Transportation in the United States. Chicago: Foundation Press,1939, 403 pp. (Mic.A.12755)
WILLEY, MALCOLM M. and STUART A. RICE. Communication Agencies andSocial Life. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 229 pp. (X.800/1629.(1.))
2. Air Transportation
ARCHBOLD, RICK. Hindenburg: An Illustrated History. London: Weidenfeld &Nicolson, 1994, 229 pp. (LB.37.b.598)
ARNOLD, HENRY H. and IRA C. EAKER. This Flying Game. New York andLondon: Funk & Wagnalls, 1936, 275 pp. (08770.c.44); 2d ed., New York andLondon: Funk & Wagnalls, 1938, 307 pp. (08771.cc.15)
76
BERG, A. SCOTT. Lindbergh. London: Macmillan, 1998, 628 pp. (YC.1998.b.5731)CORN, JOSEPH J. The Winged Gospel: America's Romance with Aviation, 1900-1950. New York: Oxford University Press, 1983, 177 pp. (X.622/19118)
DALEY, ROBERT. American Saga: Juan Trippe and His Pan Am Empire. New York: Random House, 1980, 529 pp. (DSC 80/18577)
DAVID, PAUL T. The Economics of Air Mail Transportation. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1934, 235 pp. (Ac.2391/3)
DICK, HAROLD G. The Golden Age of the Great Passenger Airships, Graf Zeppelin andHindenburg. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1985, 226pp. (YK.1994.b.5646)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Who's Who in Aviation: A Directory of Living Men and Women Who Have Contributed tothe Growth of Aviation in the United States, 1942-43. Chicago: Ziff-Davis, 1942. (Mic.B.920)
GOERNER, FRED. The Search for Amelia Earhart. London: Bodley Head, 1966,286 pp. (X.809/2894)
HOEHLING, ADOLPH A. Who Destroyed the Hindenburg? London: Hale, 1962,191 pp. (8237.aa.17)
JOSEPHSON, MATTHEW. Empire of the Air: Juan Trippe and the Struggle for WorldAirways. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1944, 236 pp. (8236.e.15)
KELSEY, BENJAMIN S. The Dragon's Teeth? The Creation of United States Air Powerfor World War II. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1982, 148 pp. (X.800/43223)
KNOWLTON, HUGH. Air Transportation in the United States: Its Growth as aBusiness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 72 pp. (8287.cc.65)
KOMONS, NICK A. Bonfires to Beacons: Federal Civil Aviation Policy under the AirCommerce Act, 1926-1938. Washington, D.C.: Federal Aviation Administration,1978, 454 pp. (AS.1059/144); Washington, D.C., and London: SmithsonianInstitution Press, 1990, 454 pp. (YC.1991.b.360)
LEWIS, W. DAVID and WILLIAM F. TRIMBLE. The Airway to Everywhere: AHistory of All American Aviation, 1937-1953. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of PittsburghPress, 1988, 230 pp. (YA.1992.b.4094)
MAURER, MAURER. Aviation in the U.S. Army, 1919-1939. Washington, D.C.: Office of Air Force History, U.S. Air Force, 1987, 626 pp. (DSC OP-US/6443)
77
NEWTON, WESLEY P. The Perilous Sky: U.S. Aviation Diplomacy and LatinAmerica, 1919-1931. Coral Gables, Fla.: University of Miami Press, 1978, 457 pp. (X.629/21066)OAKES, CLAUDIA M. United States Women in Aviation, 1930-1939. Washington,D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1991, 70 pp. (DSC 99/29330)
PUTNAM, GEORGE P. Soaring Wings: A Biography of Amelia Earhart. London: Harrap, 1940, 270 pp. (10888.e.22)
RAE, JOHN B. Climb to Greatness: The American Aircraft Industry, 1920-1960. Cambridge, Mass., and London: MIT. Press, 1968, 280 pp. (X.510/2337)
SMITH, HENRY L. Airways: The History of Commercial Aviation in the United States. New York: A. A. Knopf, 1942, 430 pp. (8236.g.7)
UNDERWOOD, JEFFERY S. The Wings of Democracy: The Influence of Air Power onthe Roosevelt Administration, 1933-1941. College Station: Texas A&M UniversityPress, 1991, 234 pp. (YA.1993.b.6174)
3. Automobiles
ASCH, NATHAN. The Road: In Search of America. New York: Norton, 1937, 271pp. (Mic.A.12107)
BELASCO, WARREN J. Americans on the Road: From Autocamp to Motel, 1910-1945. Cambridge, Mass., and London: MIT Press, 1979, 212 pp. (X.800/29010)
BLISS, CAREY S. Autos Across America: A Bibliography of Transcontinental AutomobileTravel: 1903-1940. Los Angeles, Calif.: Dawson's Book Shop, 1972, 60 pp. (X.809/22809)
BURNESS, TAD. Cars of the Early Thirties. Philadelphia and London: Chilton,1970, 275 pp. (X.622/1161)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. The Ocean Highway: New Brunswick, New Jersey, to Jacksonville, Florida. New York: Modern Age Books, 1938, 224 pp. (10413.m.16)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. U.S. One: Maine to Florida. New York: Modern Age Books, 1938, 344 pp. (010410.d.2)
GEDDES, NORMAN BEL. Magic Motorways. New York: Random House, 1940,297 pp. (Mic.A.11738)
RUETER, JOHN C. American Road Racing: The Automobile Racing Club of America inthe 1930's. New York: Barnes; London: Thomas Yoseloff, 1963, 139 pp. (7925.h.30)
78
VANDERVEEN, BART H., ed. American Trucks of the Early Thirties. London andNew York: Warne, 1974, 64 pp. (Cup.1262.gg.12)
VANDERVEEN, BART H., ed. American Trucks of the Late Thirties, 1935-1939. London: Warne, 1975, 64 pp. (Cup.1281/14)
4. Railroads
LATHAM, EARL. The Politics of Railroad Coordination, 1933-1936. Cambridge,Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1959, 338 pp. (8247.1.29)
LAUT, AGNES C. The Romance of the Rails: The Story of the American Railroads. New York: Tudor Pub., 1936, 590 pp. (X.622/8305)
MAIKEN, PETER T. Night Trains: The Pullman System in the Golden Years ofAmerican Rail Travel. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1992, 415 pp. (YK.1994.b.2018)
REYNOLDS, ROGER. Famous American Trains and Their Stories. New York: Grosset & Dunlap, 1934, 94 pp. (20018.dd.5)
O. UTILITIES AND ENERGY
ANDERSON, IRVINE H. Aramco, the United States and Saudi Arabia: A Study of theDynamics of Foreign Oil Policy, 1933-1950. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: PrincetonUniversity Press, 1981, 259 pp. (X.529/43326; T44152 OIOC)
BAKER, RALPH H. The National Bituminous Coal Commission: Administration of theBituminous Coal Act, 1937-1941. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Studiesin Historical and Political Science, 1941, 356 pp. (Ac.2689)
BEAUDREAU, BERNARD C. Mass Production, the Stock Market Crash and the GreatDepression: The Macroeconomics of Electrification. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1996, 182 pp. (YC.1997.b.1384)
BONBRIGHT, JAMES C. Public Utilities and the National Power Policies. New York: Columbia University Press, 1940, 82 pp. (08286.ee.62)
BROWN, D. CLAYTON. Electricity for Rural America: The Fight for the REA. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1980, 178 pp. (X.629/14957)
CLARK, JOHN G. Energy and the Federal Government: Fossil Fuel Policies, 1900-1946. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1987, 511 pp. (DSC 87/04478)
COLEMAN, MCALISTER. Men and Coal. New York and Toronto: Farrar &Rinehart, 1943, 350 pp. (8286.b.84)
COYLE, DAVID C., ed. Electric Power on the Farm: The Story of Electricity, ItsUsefulness on Farms and the Movement to Electrify Rural America. Washington, D.C.: Rural Electrification Administration, 1936, 170 pp. (A.S.973/5)
79
FUNIGIELLO, PHILIP J. Toward a National Power Policy: The New Deal and theElectric Utility Industry, 1933-1941. Pittsburgh, Pa.,: University of Pittsburgh Press,1973, 296 pp. (X.620/7947)
JOHNSON, JAMES P. The Politics of Soft Coal: The Bituminous Industry from WorldWar I through the New Deal. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1979,258 pp. (X.622/8692)
MEYER, LORENZO. Mexico and the United States in the Oil Controversy, 1917-1942. Austin and London: University of Texas Press, 1977, 367 pp. (X.320/11064)
MOSHER, WILLIAM E. and FINLA G. CRAWFORD. Public Utility Regulation. New York and London: Harper, 1933, 612 pp. (8224.t.24)
MULLER, FREDERICK W. Public Rural Electrification. Washington, D.C.:American Council on Public Affairs, 1944, 183 pp. (8759.d.33)
PARKER, GLEN L. The Coal Industry: A Study in Social Control. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Public Affairs, 1940. (Mic.A.19488)
RAMSAY, MARION L. Pyramids of Power: The Story of Roosevelt, Insull and theUtility Wars. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1937, 342 pp. (8288.aaa.28)
RANDALL, STEPHEN J. United States Foreign Oil Policy, 1919-1948: For Profits andSecurity. Kingston and Montreal: McGill-Queen's University Press, 1985, 328 pp. (DSC 85/17019)
SHUMAN, RONALD B. The Petroleum Industry: An Economic Survey. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1940, 297 pp. (8232.bb.61)
TOBEY, RONALD C. Technology as Freedom: The New Deal and the ElectricalModernization of the American Home. Berkeley and London: University of CaliforniaPress, 1996, 316 pp. (YC.1997.b.4964)
WATKINS, MYRON W. Oil: Stabilization or Conservation? A Case Study in theOrganization of Industrial Control. New York and London: Harper, 1937, 269 pp.(8234.cc.26)
V. SOCIAL HISTORY
A. GENERAL STUDIES
BOLINO, AUGUST C. From Depression to War: American Society in Transition--1939. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1998, 296 pp. (YC.1998.b.4800)
80
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. Social Work and the Courts: Select Statutes andJudicial Decisions. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1934, 610 pp. (Ac.2691.d/29.(6.))COHN, DAVID L. The Good Old Days: A History of American Morals and Manners asSeen through the Sears, Roebuck Catalogs, 1905 to the Present. New York: Simon andSchuster, 1940, 597 pp. (10413.p.12)
CRESSEY, PAUL G. The Taxi-Dance Hall: A Sociological Study in CommercializedRecreation and City Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 300 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(14.))
ENZLER, CLARENCE J. Some Social Aspects of the Depression, 1930-1935. Washington, D.C.: Catholic University of America Press, 1939, 187 pp. (8290.ff.30)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. Women and Minoritiesduring the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 349 pp. (YC.1991.b.546)
FERGUSON, CHARLES W. Fifty Million Brothers: A Panorama of American Lodgesand Clubs. New York and Toronto: Farrar & Rinehart, 1937, 389 pp. (20032.k.8)
FISCHER, CLAUDE S. America Calling: A Social History of the Telephone to 1940. Berkeley and Oxford: University of California Press, 1992, 424 pp. (YC.1993.b.3858); Berkeley: University of California Press, 1992, 424 pp.(YA.1993.b.4931)
FURNAS, JOSEPH C. Stormy Weather: Crosslights on the Nineteen Thirties; an InfernalSocial History of the United States 1929-1941. New York: Putnam's, 1977, 669 pp. (X.520/20613)
GREEN, HARVEY. The Uncertainty of Everyday Life, 1915-1945. New York: HarperCollins, 1992, 262 pp. (YA.1993.a.12492)
GREENAN, JOHN T., ed. American Civilization Today: A Summary of Recent SocialTrends. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1934, 152 pp. (W.P.10252/5)
HALLGREN, MAURITZ A. Seeds of Revolt: A Study of American Life and the Temperof the American People during the Depression. New York: Knopf, 1933, 369 pp. (010409.eee.65)
OGBURN, WILLIAM F., ed. Social Change and the New Deal. Chicago: Universityof Chicago Press, 1934, 120 pp. (8286.c.10)
PEELER, DAVID P. Hope Among Us Yet: Social Criticism and Social Solace inDepression America. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1987, 340 pp. (YH.1988.b.366)
81
PRESIDENT'S RESEARCH COMMITTEE ON SOCIAL TRENDS. Recent SocialTrends in the United States. 2 vols. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933. (8282.v.27)
RUNDQUIST, EDWARD A. and RAYMOND F. SLETTO. Personality in theDepression: A Study in the Measurement of Attitudes. Minneapolis: University ofMinnesota Institute of Child Welfare, 1936, 398 pp. (Ac.2692.ky)
VAILE, ROLAND S. Research Memorandum on Social Aspects of Consumption in theDepression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 86 pp. (X.529/62782)
WILLEY, MALCOLM M. and STUART A. RICE. Communication Agencies andSocial Life. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 229 pp. (X.800/1629.(1.))
B. CHILDREN AND YOUTH
ALLEN, BETTY and MITCHELL P. BRIGGS. Behave Yourself! Etiquette forAmerican Youth. Chicago: Lippincott, 1937, 163 pp. (8408.h.58)
CLAUSEN, JOHN A. American Lives: Looking Back at the Children of the GreatDepression. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1995, 592 pp. (YC.1995.a.4261)
DAVIS, ALLISON and JOHN DOLLARD. Children of Bondage: The PersonalityDevelopment of Negro Youth in the Urban South. New York: Harper and Row, 1964,299 pp. (X.808/189)
ELDER, GLEN H., JR. Children of the Great Depression: Social Change in LifeExperience. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1977, 400 pp. (X.519/27272)
FORMAN, HENRY J. Our Movie Made Children. New York: Macmillan, 1933,288 pp. (11796.bbb.1)
FRAZIER, EDWARD F. Negro Youth at the Crossroads: Their Personality Developmentin the Middle States. Washington, D.C.: American Youth Commission, 1940, 301 pp. (8288.g.68)
HOLLAND, KENNETH and FRANK E. HILL. Youth in the CCC: Prepared for theAmerican Youth Commission. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Education: 1942, 263 pp. (X.520/7365)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S. Growing Up in the Black Belt: Negro Youth in the RuralSouth. Washington, D.C.: American Youth Commission, 1941, 360 pp. (08385.b.84)
JOHNSON, PALMER O. and OSWALD L. HARVEY. The National YouthAdministration. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Commission on Education, 1938,117 pp. (A.S.988)
82
LINDLEY, BETTY and ERNEST K. LINDLEY. A New Deal for Youth: The Story ofthe National Youth Administration. New York: Viking, 1939, 315 pp. (08385.a.32)
LORWIN, LEWIS L. Youth Work Programs: Problems and Policies. Reprint, NewYork: Arno, 1974, 195 pp. (X.520/34294)
MELVIN, BRUCE L. Rural Youth on Relief. Research Monograph no. 11. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1937, 112 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MELVIN, BRUCE L. and ELNA N. SMITH. Rural Youth: Their Situation andProspects. Research Monograph no. 15. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1938, 167 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MELVIN, BRUCE L. and ELNA N. SMITH. Youth in Agricultural Villages. ResearchMonograph no. 21. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1940, 143pp. (A.S.978/7)
MINEHAN, THOMAS. Boy and Girl Tramps of America. Reprint, Seattle andLondon: University of Washington Press, 1976, 267 pp. (X.529/31736)
PHELPS, ORME W. The Legislative Background of the Fair Labor Standards Act: AStudy of the Growth of National Sentiment in Favor of Governmental Regulation of Wages,Hours and Child Labor. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 71 pp. (Ac.2691.e/5; Mic.A.10070)
PUTTEE, DOROTHY F. and MARY R. COLBY. The Illegitimate Child in Illinois. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937, 250 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(38.))
REIMAN, RICHARD A. The New Deal and American Youth: Ideas and Ideals in aDepression Decade. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1992, 253 pp. (YA.1993.b.2967)
THRASHER, FREDERIC M. The Gang: A Study of 1,313 Gangs in Chicago. 2drev. ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1936, 605 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(17.))
WEISENBERGER, CAROL A. Dollars and Dreams: The National YouthAdministration in Texas. New York: Lang, 1994, 198 pp. (DSC 7303.9990 vol 6)
WILLIAMS, JAMES M. Human Aspects of Unemployment and Relief, with SpecialReference to the Effects of the Depression on Children. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina, 1933, 235 pp. (Ac.2685.kc.(56.))
C. CLOTHING
BAILEY, MARGARET J. Those Glorious Glamour Years: Classic Hollywood CostumeDesign of the 1930's. London: Columbus, 1988, 384 pp. (YV.1989.b.1584)
83
BLUM, STELLA, ed. Everyday Fashions of the Thirties, as Pictured in Sears Catalogs. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1986, 133 pp. (YV.1988.b.2337)
CONNERY, ROBERT H. The Administration of an N.R.A. Code: A Case Study ofthe Men's Clothing Industry. Chicago: Public Administration Service, 1938, 211 pp. (Ac.2286.b)
GRAFTON, CAROL B., ed. Fashions of the Thirties: 476 Authentic Copyright-FreeIllustrations. New York: Dover, 1993, 62 pp. (YK.1995.b.5088)
GOLDMAN, E. S., ed. The New York Story: A History Of The New York ClothingIndustry, 1924-1949. New York: New York Clothing Manufacturers' Exchange,1949, 88 pp. (Mic.A.16778)
TIERNEY, TOM. Thirty from the 30's. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., and London: Prentice-Hall, 1974, 70 pp. (L.45/2390)
D. CRIME [See also III.G; H. Government and Politics: Judicialand Legal System; Federal Bureau of Investigation]
1. Miscellaneous Studies
ASBURY, HERBERT. The Underworld of Chicago: An Informal History. London: Hale, 1941, 364 pp. (6059.b.2)
BLOCK, ALAN A. East Side-West Side: Organizing Crime in New York, 1930-1950. Cardiff: University College Cardiff Press, 1980, 265 pp. (X.529/48372)
BLUMER, HERBERT and PHILIP M. HAUSER. Movies, Delinquency and Crime. New York: Macmillan, 1933, 233 pp. (X.329/7538.(5.))
DOWELL, ELRIDGE F. A History of Criminal Syndicalism Legislation in the UnitedStates. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Studies in Historical and PoliticalScience, 1939, 176 pp. (Ac.2689)
FEDER, SID and JOACHIM F. JOESTEN. The Luciano Story. New York: DavidMcKay, 1954, 327 pp. (6059.h.46)
HOFFMAN, DENNIS E. Scarface Al and the Crime Crusaders: Chicago's Private Waragainst Capone. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1993, 192 pp. (YA.1996.b.706)
KIRCHNER, L. R. Triple Cross Fire! J. Edgar Hoover and the Kansas City UnionStation Massacre. Kansas City, Mo.: Janlar Books, 1993, 176 pp. (YA.1997.a.13158)
LANGMAN, LARRY and DANIEL FINN. A Guide to American Crime Films of theThirties. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1995, 347 pp. (YC.1995.b.3213)
84
LEVINE, GARY. Anatomy of a Gangster: Jack 'Legs' Diamond. South Brunswick,N.J.: Barnes; London: Thomas Yoseloff, 1979, 200 pp. (X.200/38023)LYSING, HENRY. Men Against Crime. New York: D. Kemp, 1938, 265 pp. (6057.t.2)
MILNER, E. R. The Life and Times of Bonnie and Clyde. Carbondale: SouthernIllinois University Press, 1996, 187 pp. (DSC 97/02816)
MILLSPAUGH, ARTHUR C. Crime Control by the National Government. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1937, 306 pp. (Mic.A.8750)
MURCHISON, KENNETH M. Federal Criminal Law Doctrines: The ForgottenInfluence of National Prohibition. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1994, 279 pp. (YC.1995.b.7447)
POWELL, HICKMAN. Ninety Times Guilty. London: Hale, 1939, 287 pp. (6057.r.25)
RECKLESS, WALTER C. Vice in Chicago. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,1933, 314 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(15.))
REYNOLDS, QUENTIN. I, Willie Sutton. London: Cassell, 1954, 273 pp. (10884.l.11)
SCADUTO, ANTHONY. Lucky Luciano: The Man Who Modernized the Mafia. London: Sphere, 1976, 208 pp. (X.108/16622)
STOLBERG, MARY M. Fighting Organized Crime: Politics, Justice and the Legacy ofThomas E. Dewey. Boston: Northeastern University Press, 1995, 315 pp. (DSC95/35704)
TOLAND, JOHN. The Dillinger Days. London: Arthur Barker, 1963, 371 pp. (6957.h.45); London: Mayflower Books, 1978, 286 pp. (X.208/923)
THRASHER, FREDERIC M. The Gang: A Study of 1,313 Gangs in Chicago. 2drev. ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1936, 605 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(17.))
TREHERNE, JOHN. The Strange History of Bonnie and Clyde. London: Cape, 1984,245 pp. (X.200/44481); London: Triad Grafton, 1985, 245 pp. (H.86/649)
VAN CISE, PHILIP S. Fighting the Underworld. London: Eyre & Spottiswoode,1936, 369 pp. (6055.r.5)
WALLIS, MICHAEL. Pretty Boy: The Life and Times of Charles Arthur Floyd. NewYork: St. Martin's Press, 1992, 375 pp. (YA.1993.b.9771)
2. Lindbergh Kidnapping
85
BEHN, NOEL. Lindbergh: The Crime. New York: Atlantic Monthly, 1994, 464 pp. (YA.1995.b.4174)
BERG, A. SCOTT. Lindbergh. London: Macmillan, 1998, 628 pp. (YC.1998.b.5731)
FISHER, JIM. The Lindbergh Case. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press,1987, 480 pp. (YA.1990.b.1934)
WHIPPLE, SIDNEY B. The Lindbergh Crime. New York: Blue Ribbon Books,1935, 341 pp. (X.200/8153); London: Methuen, 1935, 294 pp. (6055.p.27)
E. FAMILY
ANGELL, ROBERT C. The Family Encounters the Depression. Gloucester, Mass.: Peter Smith, 1965, 309 pp. (X.809/4609)
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. The Family and the State: Selected Documents. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1934, 565 pp. (Ac.2691.d/29.(5.))
CAVAN, RUTH S. and KATHERINE H. RANCK. The Family and the Depression: A Study of One Hundred Chicago Families. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1938,208 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36.(36.))
COLE, WILLIAM E. Rural Rehabilitation Services in Knox County, Tennessee 1935: Economic and Social Effects of the Depression upon Relief Families in Knoxville, Tennessee. Knoxville: University of Tennessee, 1936, 32 pp. (8286.f.54)
KOMAROVSKY, MIRRA. The Unemployed Man and His Family--The Effect ofUnemployment upon the Status of the Man in Fifty-nine Families. New York: DrydenPress, 1940, 163 pp. (8287.ee.63)
KYRK, HAZEL. Economic Problems of the Family. New York and London: Harper,1933, 500 pp. (8277.r.25)
KYRK, HAZEL, et al. Family Expenditures for Housing and Household Operation: FiveRegions. Washington, D.C.: Bureau of Home Economics, U.S. Dept. of Agriculture,1941. (A.S.802/5)
KYRK, HAZEL, et al. Family Housing and Facilities: Five Regions. Washington, D.C.:Bureau of Home Economics, U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 1940, 223 pp. (A.S.802/5)
MORGAN, WINONA L. The Family Meets the Depression: A Study of a Group ofHighly Selected Families. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Institute of ChildWelfare, 1939, 126 pp. (Ac.2692.ky)
MOWRER, ERNEST R. Family Disorganization. 2d ed., Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1939, 356 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(21.))
86
MOWRER, ERNEST R. The Family: Its Organization and Disorganization. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 364 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(11.))
NIMKOFF, MEYER F. The Family. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1934, 526 pp. (8286.b.36)
STOUFFER, SAMUEL A. and PAUL F. LAZARSFELD. Research Memorandum onthe Family in the Depression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 221 pp. (X.529/62790)
WANDERSEE, WINIFRED D. Women's Work and Family Values, 1920-1940. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1981, 165 pp. (X.520/25163)
F. FOOD
CUMMINGS, RICHARD O. The American and His Food: A History of Food Habits inthe United States. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1940, 267 pp. (7945.r.6); 2ded., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 291 pp. (7946.e.12).
GAIGE, CROSBY. New York World's Fair Cook Book: The American Kitchen. NewYork: Doubleday, Doran, 1939, 309 pp. (7944.t.37)
JACKSON, CHARLES O. Food and Drug Legislation in the New Deal. Princeton,N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1970, 249 pp. (X.200/3805)
LEVENSTEIN, HARVEY A. Paradox of Plenty: A Social History of Eating in ModernAmerica. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1993, 337 pp. (YC.1993.b.3100; YC.1995.a.1783)
POPPENDIECK, JANET. Breadlines Knee-deep in Wheat: Food Assistance in the GreatDepression. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1986, 306 pp. (DSC86/09585)
G. HOUSING
ABBOTT, EDITH. The Tenements of Chicago, 1908-1935. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1936, 505 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2; Mic.A.16974)
ARONOVICI, CAROL, ed. America Can't Have Housing? New York: Museum ofModern Art, 1934, 78 pp. (Mic.A.16738)
ARONOVICI, CAROL. Housing the Masses. New York: Wiley, 1939, 291 pp. (8287.f.26)
BENT, SILAS. Slaves by the Billion: The Story of Mechanical Progress in the Home. NewYork and Toronto: Longmans, 1938, 244 pp. (8288.e.11)
87
COLEAN, MILES L. American Housing: Problems and Prospects. New York: Twentieth Century Fund, 1944, 466 pp. (08286.k.61; 8287.e.70)
FISHER, ROBERT M. 20 Years of Public Housing: Economic Aspects of the FederalProgram. New York: Harper, 1959, 303 pp. (8297.aa.16)
FORD, JAMES. Slums and Housing, with Special Reference to New York City: History,Conditions, Policy. 2 vols. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1936, 1033pp. (8287.d.11)
MASON, JOSEPH B. History of Housing in the U.S., 1930-1960. Houston: Gulf,1982, 187 pp. (X.805/7387)
POST, LANGDON W. The Challenge of Housing. New York: Farrar & Rinehart,1938, 309 pp. (Mic.A.12428)
RADFORD, GAIL. Modern Housing for America: Policy Struggles in the New Deal Era. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1996, 273 pp. (DSC 97/08208)
SCHNAPPER, MORRIS B., comp. Public Housing in America. New York: H. W.Wilson, 1940, 369 pp. (8287.aa.65)
SHULMAN, HARRY M. Slums of New York. New York: Albert & Charles Boni,1938, 394 pp. (8288.f.31)
STAP, PEYTON. Urban Housing: A Summary of Real Property Inventories Conducted asWork Projects, 1934-1936. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1938,326 pp. (A.S.978/49.(4.))
STRAUS, MICHAEL W. and TALBOT WEGG. Housing Comes of Age. New York: Oxford University Press, 1938, 259 pp. (08286.i.19)
STRAUS, NATHAN. The Seven Myths of Housing. New York: Knopf, 1944, 314pp. (8288.f.54)
TOBEY, RONALD C. Technology as Freedom: The New Deal and the ElectricalModernization of the American Home. Berkeley and London: University of CaliforniaPress, 1996, 316 pp. (YC.1997.b.4964)
TROLANDER, JUDITH A. Settlement Houses and the Great Depression. Detroit,Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1975, 216 pp. (X.800/28437)
VANCE, RUPERT B. and GORDON W. BLACKWELL New Farm Homes for Old: A Study of Rural Public Housing in the South. University: University of Alabama Press,1946, 245 pp. (Mic.A.17705)
VEILLER, LAWRENCE. The Housing Problem in the United States. New York: National Housing Association, 1930, 31 pp. (YA.1998.b.4025)
88
WATSON, FRANK D. Housing Problems and Possibilities in the United States. NewYork and London: Harper, 1935, 100 pp. (8287.bb.3)
WENTWORTH, CYNTHIA and CARL FEISS. New York World's Fair, 1939: Guide to Housing Exhibits. Washington, D.C.: U. S. Housing Authority, 1939, 16 p. (A.S.997/4)
WILSON, MAUD. Housing Requirements of Farm Families in the United States. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 1939, 40 pp. (A.S.802/5)
WOOD, EDITH E. Recent Trends in American Housing. New York: Macmillan Co.,1931, 317 pp. (8285.w.8)
WOOD, EDITH E. Slums and Blighted Areas in the United States. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Federal Emergency Administration of Public Works, 1935, 126 pp. (A.S.917/10)
H. PHILANTHROPY
HOLLIS, ERNEST V. Philanthropic Foundations and Higher Education. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938, 365 pp. (08385.f.113)
RADFORD, NEIL A. The Carnegie Corporation and the Development of American CollegeLibraries, 1928-1941. Chicago: American Library Association, 1984, 257 pp. (2719.x.5617)
SEALANDER, JUDITH. Private Wealth and Public Life: Foundation Philanthropy andthe Reshaping of American Social Policy from the Progressive Era to the New Deal. Baltimore,Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997, 349 pp. (SPIS361.7097309041)
I. POPULATION AND INTERNAL MIGRATION
BROWN, MALCOLM J. and ORIN CASSMORE. Migratory Cotton Pickers inArizona. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1939, 23 pp. (A.S.978/43)
COLLINS, HENRY H. America's Own Refugees: Our 4,000,000 Homeless Migrants. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1941, 323 pp. (10413.p.23)
CROSS, WILLIAM T. Newcomers and Nomads in California. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1937, 149 pp. (08286.a.90)
CROUSE, JOAN M. The Homeless Transient in the Great Depression: New York State,1929-1941. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986, 319 pp.(YC.1987.b.4429)
GOODRICH, CARTER, et al. Migration and Economic Opportunity: The Report of theStudy of Population Redistribution. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1936,763 pp. (8287.d.45)
89
GOODRICH, CARTER L., et al. Migration and Planes of Living, 1920-1934. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1935, 111 pp. (Ac.2692.pi)
GREGORY, JAMES N. American Exodus: The Dust Bowl Migration and Okie Culturein California. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989, 338 pp. (YC.1990.b.6324)
LIVELY, C. E. and CONRAD TAEUBER. Rural Migration in the United States. Research Monograph no. 19. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration,1939, 192 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MCDONALD, MICHAEL. TVA and the Dispossessed: The Resettlement of Populationin the Norris Dam Area. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1982, 334 pp. (DSC83/01051)
MCWILLIAMS, CAREY. Factories in the Field: The Story of Migratory Farm Labor inCalifornia. Boston: Little, Brown, 1939, 334 pp. (X.319/1933)
MCWILLIAMS, CAREY. Ill Fares the Land: Migrants and Migratory Labour in theUnited States. London: Faber & Faber, 1945, 245 pp. (8287.de.71)
MENEFEEE, SELDON C. Mexican Migratory Workers of South Texas. Washington,D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1941, 67 pp. (A.S.978/48)
SHINDO, CHARLES J. Dust Bowl Migrants in the American Imagination. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1997, 252 pp. (YC.1997.b.4928)
STEIN, WALTER J. California and the Dust Bowl Migration. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Greenwood, 1973, 302 pp. (X.329/7027)
THOMPSON, WARREN S. The Growth of Metropolitan Districts in the United States: 1900-1940. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureau of the Census, 1947, 61 pp. (A.S.67/38)
THOMPSON, WARREN S. and PASCAL K. WHELPTON. Population Trends inthe United States. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 415 pp. (X.800/1629.(8.)); reprint, New York: Gordon & Breach, 1969, 415 pp. (X.809/7264)
VANCE, RUPERT B. Research Memorandum on Population Distribution within theUnited States. New York: Social Science Research Council, 1938, 134 pp. (Mic.A.13591(5))
WEBB, JOHN N. and MALCOLM BROWN. Migrant Families. ResearchMonograph no. 18. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1938, 192pp. (A.S.978/7)
90
WEBB, JOHN N. The Migratory-Casual Worker. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1937, 128 pp. (A.S.978/7)
WEISIGER, MARSHA L. Land of Plenty: Oklahomans in the Cotton Fields of Arizona,1933-1942. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1995, 238 pp. (YC.1997.a.1863)
J. PROHIBITION
ASBURY, HERBERT. The Great Illusion: An Informal History of Prohibition. GardenCity, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1950, 344 pp. (8436.d.30)
BEHR, EDWARD. Prohibition: The 13 Years that Changed America. London: BBCBooks, 1997, 262 pp. (YC.1997.b.3089)
CLARK, NORMAN H. The Dry Years: Prohibition and Social Change in Washington. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1965, 304 pp. (X.809/3621)
COFFEY, THOMAS M. The Long Thirst: Prohibition in America, 1920-1933. NewYork: Norton, 1975, 346 pp. (X.809/45343); London: Hamilton, 1976, 346 pp. (X.809/40614)
HARRISON, LEONARD V. After Repeal: A Study of Liquor Control Administration. New York and London: Harper, 1936, 296 pp. (8436.d.15)
KOBLER, JOHN. Ardent Spirits: The Rise and Fall of Prohibition. New York: Putnam's, 1973, 386 pp. (X.520/9005); London: Michael Joseph, 1974, 386 pp.(X.529/18016)
KYVIG, DAVID E., ed. Law, Alcohol and Order: Perspectives on National Prohibition. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1985, 218 pp. (YC.1986.b.5406)
KYVIG, DAVID E. Repealing National Prohibition. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1979, 274 pp. (X.520/21181)
MURCHISON, KENNETH M. Federal Criminal Law Doctrines: The ForgottenInfluence of National Prohibition. Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 1994, 279 pp. (YC.1995.b.7447)
ROSE, KENNETH D. American Women and the Repeal of Prohibition. New York: New York University Press, 1996, 215 pp. (DSC 0857.430 33)
RUMBARGER, JOHN J. Profits, Power and Prohibition: Alcohol Reform and theIndustrializing of America, 1800-1930. Albany: State University of New York Press,1989, 272 pp. (DSC 89/27310)
WHIPPLE, SIDNEY B. Noble Experiment: A Portrait of America under Prohibition. London: Methuen, 1934, 184 pp. (8436.eee.61)
91
K. RACIAL AND ETHNIC GROUPS
1. General Studies
ALLSWANG, JOHN M. The Political Behavior of Chicago's Ethnic Groups, 1918-1932. New York: Arno, 1980, 313 pp. (X.800/42013)
BAYOR, RONALD H. Neighbors in Conflict: The Irish, Germans, Jews and Italians ofNew York City, 1929-1941. 2d ed., Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1988, 232pp. (DSC 88/11202)
CHENG, LUCIE and EDNA BONACICH, eds. Labor Immigration under Capitalism: Asian Workers in the United States before World War II. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1984, 634pp. (X.800/41614)
DU PUY, WILLIAM A. Hawaii and Its Race Problem. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept.of the Interior, 1932, 130 pp. (A.S.190/23)
FELDMAN, HERMAN. Racial Factors in American Industry. New York and London: Harper, 1931, 318 pp. (8285.w.31)
KRENN, MICHAEL L., ed. Race and U.S. Foreign Policy from 1900 through WorldWar II. New York and London: Garland, 1998, 354 pp. (YC.1999.b.652)
KWONG, PETER. Chinatown, New York: Labor and Politics, 1930-1950. New Yorkand London: Monthly Review Press, 1979, 178 pp. (X.809/45531)
MARCUSON, LEWIS R. The Stage Immigrant: The Irish, Italians and Jews in AmericanDrama, 1920-1960. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 309 pp. (YC.1991.a.2819)
MODELL, JOHN. The Economics and Politics of Racial Accommodation: The Japanese ofLos Angeles, 1900-1942. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1977, 201pp. (X.520/12488)
POLENBERG, RICHARD. One Nation Divisible: Class, Race, and Ethnicity in theUnited States Since 1938. Harmondsworth: Penguin Books, 1980, 363 pp. (X.808/33809)
SHAPIRO, HARRY L. Migration and Environment: A Study of the PhysicalCharacteristics of the Japanese Immigrants to Hawaii and the Effects of Environment on TheirDescendants. London: Oxford University Press, 1939, 594 pp. (10008.ppp.23)
STACK, JOHN F. International Conflict in an American City: Boston's Irish, Italians andJews, 1935-1944. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1979, 181 pp. (X.809/45962)
SULLIVAN, PATRICIA. Days of Hope: Race and Democracy in the New Deal Era. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1996, 335 pp. (DSC 96/15728)
92
WAKUKAWA, ERNEST K. A History of the Japanese People in Hawaii. Honolulu: Toyo Shoin, 1938, 439 pp. (YA.1987.a.9620)
WINOKUR, MARK. American Laughter: Immigrants, Ethnicity and 1930s Hollywood Film Comedy. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1995, 310 pp. (YC.1996.a.2667)
WOOFTER, THOMAS J. Races and Ethnic Groups in American Life. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 247 pp. (X.800/1629.(11.))
2. African Americans
a. General Studies
AMES, JESSIE D. The Changing Character of Lynching: Review of Lynching, 1931-1941,with a Discussion of Recent Developments in This Field. Reprint, New York: AMS Press,1973, 70 pp. (YA.1991.a.16268)
BAKER, PAUL E. Negro-White Adjustment: An Investigation and Analysis of Methods inthe Interracial Movement in the United States. New York: Association Press, 1934, 267pp. (20018.h.39)
BAKER, T. LINDSAY and JULIE P. BAKER, eds. The WPA Oklahoma SlaveNarratives. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1996, 543 pp. (DSC96/14748)
BOND, HORACE M. Negro Education in Alabama: A Study in Cotton and Steel. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1939, 358 pp. (08385.f.119); Tuscaloosa andLondon: University of Alabama Press, 1994, 383 pp. (YC.1995.a.2454)
BUNCHE, RALPH J. The Political Status of the Negro in the Age of FDR. Edited byDewey W. Grantham. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1973, 682pp. (X.800/8791)
CARTER, DAN T. Scottsboro: A Tragedy of the American South. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1969, 431 pp. (X.200/4237); London: OxfordUniversity Press, 1971, 431 pp. (X.708/7996); rev. ed., Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press, 1979, 479 pp. (X.709/51413; YC.1998.a.5029)
CHADBOURN, JAMES H. Lynching and the Law. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina, 1933, 221 pp. (Ac.2685.kc.(60.))
COLE, OLEN. The African-American Experience in the Civilian Conservation Corps. Gainesville: University Press of Florida, 1999, 114 pp. (DSC 99/28387)
COMMISSION ON INTERRACIAL COOPERATION. The Mob Still Rides: AReview of the Lynching Record, 1931-1935. Atlanta, Ga.: Commission on InterracialCooperation, 1936, 24 pp. (Mic.A.17693)
93
CRAWFORD, S. C. Quantified Memory: A Study of the WPA and Fisk UniversitySlave Narrative Collection. Chicago: University of Chicago, 1980. (DSC MFR-4358)
DAVIS, ALLISON and JOHN DOLLARD. Children of Bondage: The PersonalityDevelopment of Negro Youth in the Urban South. New York: Harper and Row, 1964,299 pp. (X.808/189)
DINER, HASIA R. In the Almost Promised Land: American Jews and Blacks, 1915-1935. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 271 pp. (X.809/42826)
DOYLE, BERTRAM W. The Etiquette of Race Relations in the South: A Study inSocial Control. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937, 249 pp. (10413.k.31)
DU BOIS, W. E. B. Dusk of Dawn: An Essay toward an Autobiography of a RaceConcept. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1940, 334. (10889.bb.7)
ELLISON, JOHN M. Negro Organizations and Leadership in Relation to Rural Life inVirginia. Blacksburg, Va.: Virginia Agricultural Experiment Station, 1933, 88 pp. (A.S.v.50/2)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT. WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Drums and Shadows: Survival Stories among the Georgia Coastal Negroes. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1940, 274 pp. (010007.h.70)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT. WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. The Negro in Virginia. New York: Hastings House, 1940, 380 pp. (010410.dd.21)
FRANKLIN, JOHN HOPE and ALFRED A. MOSS, JR. From Slavery to Freedom: A History of African Americans. 7th ed., New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1994,680 pp. (YC.1994.b.3982)
FRAZIER, EDWARD F. The Negro Family in Chicago. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1932, 294 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(12.)); Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1939, 686 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(22.))
FRAZIER, EDWARD F. Negro Youth at the Crossroads: Their Personality Developmentin the Middle States. Washington, D.C.: American Youth Commission, 1940, 301 pp. (8288.g.68)FORD, NICK A. The Contemporary Negro Novel: A Study in Race Relations. Boston: Meador Pub.,1936, 108 pp. (11860.aa.13)
GLEASON, ELIZA A. The Southern Negro and the Public Library: A Study of theGovernment and Administration of Public Library Service to Negroes in the South. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 218 pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(23.))
GOINGS, KENNETH W. The NAACP Comes of Age: The Defeat of Judge John J.Parker. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1990, 125 pp. (YA.1993.a.15000)
94
GOSNELL, HAROLD F. Negro Politicians: The Rise of Negro Politics in Chicago. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1935, 404 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36(33.)); Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1967, 396 pp. (X.709/5487)
GRANT, NANCY L. TVA and Black Americans: Planning for the Status Quo. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1990, 207 pp. (YA.1992.b.2589)
GRAY, BRENDA C. Black Female Domestics during the Depression in New York City,1930-1940. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 200 pp. (YC.1993.b.6369)
GREENBERG, CHERYL L. Or Does It Explode? Black Harlem in the Great Depression. New York: Oxford University Press, 1991, 317 pp. (YC.1992.b.4986)
HALL, CHARLES E. Progress of the Negro in Texas. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureauof the Census, 1936, 7 pp. (A.S.67/14)
HALL, JACQUELYN D. Revolt against Chivalry: Jessie Daniel Ames and the Women'sCampaign against Lynching. New York and Guildford: Columbia University Press,1979, 373 pp. (X.520/14444; X.529/74043)
JACKSON, WALTER A. Gunnar Myrdal and America's Conscience: Social Engineeringand Racial Liberalism, 1938-1987. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press,1990, 447 pp. (YA.1993.b.652; YA.1993b.5052)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S. Growing Up in the Black Belt: Negro Youth in the RuralSouth. Washington, D.C.: American Youth Commission, 1941, 360 pp. (08385.b.84)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S. The Negro College Graduate. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 1938, 399 pp. (08385.b.11)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S. The Shadow of the Plantation. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1934; 1966, 214 pp. (010410.eee.26; W.P.3307/214)
JONES, JAMES H. Bad Blood: The Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment. New York: FreePress; London: Collier Macmillan, 1981, 272 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234); New York: Free Press; London: Collier Macmillan International, 1993, 297 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234)
KELLEY, BRENT. The Early All-Stars: Conversations with Standout Baseball Players ofthe 1930s and 1940s. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1997, 199 pp. (YK.1997.a.2997)
KELLEY, BRENT. Voices from the Negro Leagues: Conversations with 52 BaseballStandouts of the Period 1924-1960. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1998,334 pp. (YC.1998.b.647)
KNEEBONE, JOHN T. Southern Liberal Journalists and the Issue of Race, 1920-1944. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 312 pp. (DSC 86/06485)
95
KINSHASA, KWANDO M. The Man from Scottsboro: Clarence Norris and the Infamous1931 Alabama Rape Trial, in His Own Words. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1997, 231 pp. (YC.1997.b.5310)
KIRBY, JOHN B. Black Americans in the Roosevelt Era: Liberalism and Race. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1980, 254 pp. (X.809/52585)
LISIO, DONALD J. Hoover, Blacks and Lily-Whites: A Study of Southern Strategies. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 373 pp. (DSC 85/29520)
MCADAM, DOUG. Political Process and the Development of Black Insurgency, 1930-1970. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1982, 304 pp.(X.520/30314)
MCDONOGH, GARY W., ed. The Florida Negro: A Federal Writers' Project Legacy. Jackson and London: University Press of Mississippi, 1993, 177 pp. (YC.1993.b.5942)
MCGOVERN, JAMES R. Anatomy of a Lynching: The Killing of Claude Neal. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1982, 170 pp. (X.520/35695;YC.1993.a.773)
MCKAY, CLAUDE. Harlem: Negro Metropolis. New York: Dutton, 1940, 262 pp. (010410.f.56)
MANGUM, CHARLES S. The Legal Status of the Negro. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 1940, 436 pp. (6618.bb.1)
NATANSON, NICHOLAS. The Black Image in the New Deal: The Politics of FSAPhotography. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1992, 305 pp. (YA.1994.b.5958)
NORDIN, DENNIS S. The New Deal's Black Congressman: A Life of Arthur WergsMitchell. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1997, 320 pp. (YC.1998.b.362)
OTTLEY, ROI. 'New World A-Coming': Inside Black America. Boston: HoughtonMifflin, 1943, 364 pp. (8287.l.28)
RAPER, ARTHUR F. The Tragedy of Lynching. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina Press, 1933, 499 pp. (Ac.2685.kc.(59.))
REID, IRA DE A. The Negro Immigrant: His Background, Characteristics and SocialAdjustment, 1899-1937. New York: Columbia University Press, 1939, 261 pp. (08286.ee.41); New York: AMS Press, 1970, 261 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(449))
SITKOFF, HARVARD. A New Deal for Blacks: The Emergence of Civil Rights as aNational Issue. Vol. 1, The Depression Decade. New York: Oxford University Press,1978. (X.0529/527(1))
96
STERNSHER, BERNARD, ed. The Negro in Depression and War: Prelude toRevolution, 1930-1945. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1964, 535pp. (X.510/1167); Chicago: Quadrangle, 1969, 338 pp. (X.700/7306)
STIMPSON, EDDIE. My Remembers: A Black Sharecropper's Recollections of theDepression. Denton: University of North Texas Press, 1996, 167 pp. (YA.1997.b.1745)
TATUM, ELBERT L. The Changed Political Thought of the Negro, 1915-1940. Reprint, Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1974, 205 pp. (X.809/21906)
THOMAS, RICHARD W. Life for Us Is What We Make It: Building BlackCommunity in Detroit, 1915-1945. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992, 365pp. (DSC 92/20288)
TROTTER, JOE W. and EARL LEWIS, eds. African Americans in the Industrial Age: A Documentary History, 1915-1945. Boston, Mass.: Northeastern University Press,1996, 316 pp. (DSC 96/32981)
TROTTER, JOE W. Coal, Class and Color: Blacks in Southern West Virginia, 1915-32. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1990, 290 pp. (YA.1993.a.17633)
TUSHNET, MARK V. Making Civil Rights Law: Thurgood Marshall and the SupremeCourt, 1936-1961. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1994, 339 pp. (YC.1994.b.4106)
TUSHNET, MARK V. The NAACP's Legal Strategy Against Segregated Education,1925-1950. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1987, 222pp. (YC.1991.b.4992)
WARNER, W. LLOYD, BUFORD H. JUNKER and WALTER A. ADAMS. Color and Human Nature: Negro Personality Development in a Northern City. Washington, D.C.: American Youth Commission, 1941, 301 pp. (10413.t.28)
WATTS, JILL. God, Harlem U.S.A.: The Father Divine Story. Berkeley and Oxford: University of California Press, 1992, 249 pp. (YC.1992.b.5653; YC.1995.a.2958)
WEATHERFORD, WILLIS D. and CHARLES S. JOHNSON. Race Relations: Adjustment of Whites and Negroes in the United States. Boston: Heath, 1934, 590 pp. (X.520/8204.(5.))
WEISBROT, ROBERT. Father Divine and the Struggle for Racial Equality. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1983, 241 pp. (DSC 83/17080)
WEISS, NANCY J. Farewell to the Party of Lincoln: Black Politics in the Age of FDR. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1983, 333 pp. (X.800/39339)
97
WEISS, NANCY J. The National Urban League, 1910-1940. New York: OxfordUniversity Press, 1974, 402 pp. (X.809/1904)
WOODSON, CARTER G. The Rural Negro. Washington, D.C.: Association forthe Study of Negro Life and History, 1930, 265 pp. (Ac.8444/4)
WOODSON, CARTER G. The Negro Professional Man and the Community, WithSpecial Emphasis on the Physician and Lawyer. Washington, D.C.: Association for theStudy of Negro Life and History, 1934, 365 pp. (08285.h.19)
YOUNG, JAMES O. Black Writers of the Thirties. Baton Rouge: Louisiana StateUniversity Press, 1973, 257 pp. (X.981/11428)
ZANGRANDO, ROBERT L. The NAACP Crusade Against Lynching, 1909-1950. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1980, 309 pp. (X.800/42285)
b. Communism
CRENSHAW, FILES and KENNETH A. MILLER. Scottsboro, the Firebrand ofCommunism. Montgomery, Ala.: Brown Printing Co., 1936, 336 pp. (06617.df.18)
FONER, PHILIP S. and HERBERT SHAPIRO, EDS. American Communism andBlack Americans: A Documentary History, 1930-1934. Philadelphia: Temple UniversityPress, 1991, 381 pp. (YA.1992.b.5483)
NAISON, MARK. Communists in Harlem during the Depression. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1983, 355 pp. (X.800/40619)
RECORD, WILSON. The Negro and the Communist Party. Chapel Hill: Universityof North Carolina Press, 1951, 340 pp. (8177.n.7)
RECORD, WILSON. Race and Radicalism: The NAACP and the Communist Party inConflict. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1964, 237 pp. (Ac.2692.g/14.(25.));Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1966, 237 pp. (X.708/3671)
c. Drama, Theatre and Music
ABRAMSON, DORIS E. Negro Playwrights in the American Theatre, 1925-1959. New York and London: Columbia University Press, 1969, 335 pp. (X.909/18000;X.090/17989)
BARLOW, WILLIAM and CHERYL FINLEY. From Swing to Soul: An IllustratedHistory of African American Popular Music from 1930 to 1960. Washington, D.C.: Elliott& Clark, 1994, 132 pp. (LB.31.b.10728)
BOND, FREDERICK W. The Negro and the Drama: The Direct and IndirectContribution which the American Negro Has Made to Drama and the Legitimate Stage, withthe Underlying Conditions Responsible. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1940, 213pp. (11863.b.38)
98
CRAIG, E. QUITA. Black Drama of the Federal Theatre Era: Beyond the FormalHorizons. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1980, 239 pp. (DSC80/22501)
CUNEY-HARE, MAUD. Negro Musicians and Their Music. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1936, 439 pp. (07899.df.71)
DRIGGS, FRANK and HARRIS LEWINE. Black Beauty, White Heat: A PictorialHistory of Classic Jazz, 1920-1950. New York: Da Capo, 1995, 360 pp. (YA.1998.b.6572)
FRADEN, RENA. Blueprints for a Black Federal Theatre, 1935-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994, 243 pp. (YC.1994.b.4371)
GILL, GLENDA E. White Grease Paint on Black Performers: A Study of the FederalTheatre of 1935-1939. New York: Lang, 1988, 220 pp. (YA.1992.a.4152)
RIJN, GUIDO VAN. Roosevelt's Blues: African-American Blues and Gospel Songs onFDR. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1997, 292 pp. (YC.1999.b.1651)
d. Foreign and Military Affairs
DALFIUME, RICHARD M. Desegregation of the U.S. Armed Forces: Fighting on TwoFronts, 1939-1953. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1969, 252 pp. (X.809/10878)
HARRIS, JOSEPH E. African-American Reactions to War in Ethiopia, 1936-1941. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1994, 185 pp. (YC.1996.b.46)
JAKEMAN, ROBERT J. The Divided Skies: Establishing Segregated Flight Training atTuskegee, Alabama, 1934-1942. Tuscaloosa and London: University of Alabama Press,1992, 416 pp. (YC.1997.a.977)
PATTON, GERALD W. War and Race: The Black Officer in the American Military,1915-1941. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 214 pp. (X.529/47051)
PLUMMER, BRENDA G. Rising Wind: Black Americans and U.S. Foreign Affairs,1935-1960. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1996, 423 pp. (DSC96/19793)
SCOTT, WILLIAM R. The Sons of Sheba's Race: African Americans and the Italo-Ethiopian War, 1935-1941. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1993, 288 pp. (ORW.1993.a.2504 OIOC)
e. Labor
99
BRAZEAL, B. R. The Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters: Its Origin and Development. New York and London: Harper, 1946, 258 pp. (8236.e.27; 8288.f.68)
CAYTON, HORACE R. and GEORGE S. MITCHELL. Black Workers and the NewUnions. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1939, 473 pp. (8289.dd.7)
CHATEAUVERT, MELINDA. Marching Together: Women of the Brotherhood ofSleeping Car Porters. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1998, 267 pp. (DSC98/11466)
FONER, PHILIP S. and RONALD L. LEWIS, eds. The Black Worker: ADocumentary History from Colonial Times to the Present. Vol. 6, The Era of Post-warProsperity and the Great Depression, 1920-1936. Philadelphia: Temple University Press,1981. (X.0800/1579); Vol. 7, The Black Worker from the Founding of the CIO to theAFL-CIO. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983. (X.0800/1579)
FRANKLIN, CHARLES L. The Negro Labor Unionist of New York: Problems andConditions among Negroes in the Labor Unions in Manhattan, with Special Reference to theN.R.A. and post-N.R.A. Situations. New York: Columbia University Press, 1936, 417pp. (08285.h.51); reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968, 415 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(420.))
FUJITA, KUNIKO. Black Worker's Struggles in Detroit's Auto Industry, 1935-1975. Saratoga, Calif.: Century Twenty One, 1980, 130 pp. (X.525/8724)
GREENE, LORENZO J. and CARTER G. WOODSON. The Negro Wage Earner. Washington, D.C.: Association for the Study of Negro Life and History, 1930, 388pp. (Ac.8444/5)
GRIFFLER, KEITH P. What Price Alliance?: Black Radicals Confront White Labor,1918-1938. New York: Garland, 1995, 266 pp. (YC.1995.b.3836)
HARRIS, WILLIAM H. Keeping the Faith: A. Philip Randolph, Milton P. Webster andthe Brotherhood of Sleeping Car Porters, 1925-37. Urbana and London: University ofIllinois Press, 1977, 252 pp. (X.520/12431)
MEIER, AUGUST and ELLIOTT RUDWICK. Black Detroit and the Rise of theUAW. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 289 pp. (X.529/36379)
NORTHRUP, HERBERT R. Organized Labor and the Negro. 2d ed., New Yorkand London: Harper, 1944, 312 pp. (08286.dd.92)
REID, IRA DE A., et al. The Urban Negro Worker in the United States, 1925-1936. 2vols. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, 1938. (A.S.189/3)
SPERO, STERLING D. and ABRAM L. HARRIS. The Black Worker: The Negroand the Labor Movement. New York: Columbia University Press, 1931, 509 pp. (8285.r.23)
100
TROTTER, JOE W., JR. Black Milwaukee: The Making of an Industrial Proletariat,1915-45. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1985, 302 pp. (DSC 85/12464)
3. Hispanics
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. In Defense of La Raza: The Los Angeles MexicanConsulate and the Mexican Community, 1929 to 1936. Tucson: University of ArizonaPress, 1982, 137 pp. (YA.1989.a.16903)
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. and RAYMOND RODRÍGUEZ. Decade ofBetrayal: Mexican Repatriation in the 1930s. Albuquerque: University of New MexicoPress, 1995, 283 pp. (DSC 95/30384)
FORREST, SUZANNE. The Preservation of the Village: New Mexico's Hispanics and theNew Deal. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1989, 253 pp. (DSC89/19019)
GARCIA, MARIO T. Mexican Americans: Leadership, Ideology and Identity, 1930-1960. New Haven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1989, 364 pp. (Ac.2692.m.a./32(36))
GARCIA, RICHARD A. Rise of the Mexican American Middle Class: San Antonio,1929-1941. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1991, 398 pp. (YA.1992.b.4125)
HOFFMAN, ABRAHAM. Unwanted Mexican Americans in the Great Depression: Repatriation Pressures, 1929-1939. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1976, 207 pp. (X.700/25335)KOFAS, JON V. The Struggle for Legitimacy: Latin American Labor and the United States,1930-1960. Tempe: Center for Latin American Studies, Arizona State University,1992, 425 pp. (YA.1992.b.2973; YA.1993.a.2203)
MENEFEEE, SELDON C. Mexican Migratory Workers of South Texas. Washington,D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1941, 67 pp. (A.S.978/48)
REISLER, MARK. By the Sweat of Their Brow: Mexican Immigrant Labor in the UnitedStates, 1900-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 298 pp. (X.529/31635)
RUÍZ, VICKI L. Cannery Women, Cannery Lives: Mexican Women, Unionization andthe California Food Processing Industry, 1930-1950. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1987, 194 pp. (YA.1989.b.7702)
SÁNCHEZ KORROL, VIRGINIA E. From Colonia to Community: The History ofPuerto Ricans in New York City, 1917-1948. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983, 242pp. (X.809/67188); Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1994, 275pp. (YC.1995.a.791)
101
TAYLOR, PAUL S. Mexican Labor in the United States. Berkeley: University ofCalifornia Publications in Economics, 1928-1934. (Ac.2689.g/19)
VARGAS, ZARAGOSA. Proletarians of the North: A History of Mexican IndustrialWorkers in Detroit and the Midwest, 1917-1933. Berkeley and Oxford: University ofCalifornia Press, 1993, 277 pp. (YC.1994.b.5414)
WINTERS, JET C. A Report on the Health and Nutrition of Mexicans Living in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1931, 99 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
4. Jews [See also IX.E. Foreign Relations: Immigration, Refugees, Jews and the Holocaust]
ATHANS, MARY C. The Coughlin-Fahey Connection: Father Charles E. Coughlin,Father Denis Fahey, C.S.Sp., and Religious Anti-Semitism in the United States, 1938-1954. New York: Lang, 1991, 265 pp. (YA.1993.b.1393)
BAUER, YEHUDA. American Jewry and the Holocaust: The American Jewish JointDistribution Committee, 1939-1945. Jerusalem: Institute of Contemporary Jewry,Hebrew University, 1981, 522 pp. (DSC 81/18775)
BAUER, YEHUDA. My Brother's Keeper: A History of the American Jewish JointDistribution Committee, 1929-1939. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society ofAmerica, 1974, 350 pp. (X.809/43744)
BAYOR, RONALD H. Neighbors in Conflict: The Irish, Germans, Jews and Italians ofNew York City, 1929-1941. 2d ed., Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1988, 232pp. (DSC 88/11202)
BERMAN, AARON. Nazism, the Jews and American Zionism, 1933-1948. Detroit,Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1990, 283 pp. (YA.1992.b.2475)
DINER, HASIA R. In the Almost Promised Land: American Jews and Blacks, 1915-1935. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 271 pp. (X.809/42826)
GUROCK, JEFFREY S., ed. America, American Jews and the Holocaust. New Yorkand London: Routledge, 1998, 486 pp. (YC.1999.b.2665)
KANAWADA, LEO V. Franklin D. Roosevelt's Diplomacy and American Catholics,Italians and Jews. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research; Epping: Bowker, 1982, 184 pp. (X.800/35588)
KAUFMAN, MENAHEM. An Ambiguous Partnership: Non-Zionists and Zionists inAmerica, 1939-1948. Jerusalem: Magnes Press, Hebrew University, 1991, 418 pp. (YA.1993.b.8665)
KLIGER, HANNAH, ed. Jewish Hometown Associations and Family Circles in New York: The WPA Jewish Writers' Group Study. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992,164 pp. (DSC 99/12690)
102
LOOKSTEIN, HASKEL. Were We Our Brothers' Keepers? The Public Response ofAmerican Jews to the Holocaust, 1938-1944. New York: Hartmore House, 1985, 287pp. (DSC 86/10994)
MARCUSON, LEWIS R. The Stage Immigrant: The Irish, Italians and Jews in AmericanDrama, 1920-1960. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 309 pp. (YC.1991.a.2819)
STACK, JOHN F. International Conflict in an American City: Boston's Irish, Italians andJews, 1935-1944. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1979, 181 pp. (X.809/45962)
UNITED JEWISH APPEAL. Report to American Jews on Overseas Relief, Palestine andRefugees in the United States. New York and London: Harper, 1942, 92 pp. (X.808/35095)
WENGER, BETH S. New York Jews and the Great Depression: Uncertain Promise. NewHaven, Conn., London: Yale University Press, 1996, 269 pp. (YC.1997.b.844)
5. Native Americans
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. and WILLIAM L. IVERSEN. Education of Children on FederalReservations. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Studyno. 17, 1939, 145 pp. (A.S.988)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. Educational Service for Indians. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 18, 1939, 137 pp. (A.S.988)
HALL, EDWARD T. West of the Thirties: Discoveries among the Navajo and Hopi. New York: Doubleday, 1994, 187 pp. (YA.1996.a.2145)
HAUPTMAN, LAURENCE M. The Iroquois and the New Deal. Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press, 1981, 256 pp. (YH.1986.b.500)
KELLY, LAWRENCE C. The Assault on Assimilation: John Collier and the Origins ofIndian Policy Reform. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1983, 445 pp. (YA.1987.b.1610)
KELLY, LAWRENCE C. The Navajo Indians and Federal Indian Policy, 1900-1935. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1970, 221 pp. (X.800/5985)
KERSEY, HARRY A. The Florida Seminoles and the New Deal, 1933-1942. BocaRaton: Florida Atlantic University Press, 1989, 214 pp. (DSC 92/00078)
PARMAN, DONALD L. The Navajos and the New Deal. New Haven, Conn., andLondon: Yale University Press, 1976, 316 pp. (Ac.2692.ma/32[27])
103
PHILP, KENNETH R. John Collier's Crusade for Indian Reform, 1920-1954. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1977, 304 pp. (YA.1986.a.7466)
SCHRADER, ROBERT F. The Indian Arts and Crafts Board: An Aspect of New DealIndian Policy. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1983, 364 pp. (YV.1989.b.2512)
TAYLOR, GRAHAM D. The New Deal and American Indian Tribalism: TheAdministration of the Indian Reorganization Act, 1934-45. Lincoln and London: University of Nebraska Press, 1980, 203 pp. (X.520/21901)
L. RURAL LIFE
BROWN, D. CLAYTON. Electricity for Rural America: The Fight for the REA. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1980, 178 pp. (X.629/14957)
BROWN, JOSEPHINE CHAPIN. The Rural Community and Social Case Work. NewYork: Family Welfare Association of America, 1934, 165 pp. (Mic.A.19697)
BRUNNER, EDMUND DE S. and IRVING LORGE. Rural Trends in DepressionYears: A Survey of Village-Centered Agricultural Communities, 1930-1936. New York: Columbia University Press, 1937, 387 pp. (08286.bb.74)
BRUNNER, EDMUND DE S. and JAMES H. KOLB. Rural Social Trends. NewYork and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 386 pp. (X.800/1629.(3.))
COLE, WILLIAM E. Rural Rehabilitation Services in Knox County, Tennessee 1935: Economic and Social Effects of the Depression upon Relief Families in Knoxville, Tennessee. Knoxville: University of Tennessee, 1936, 32 pp. (8286.f.54)
COYLE, DAVID C., ed. Electric Power on the Farm: The Story of Electricity, ItsUsefulness on Farms and the Movement to Electrify Rural America. Washington, D.C.: Rural Electrification Administration, 1936, 170 pp. (A.S.973/5)
ELLISON, JOHN M. Negro Organizations and Leadership in Relation to Rural Life inVirginia. Blacksburg, Va.: Virginia Agricultural Experiment Station, 1933, 88 pp. (A.S.v.50/2)
FARNHAM, REBECCA T. and IRENE LINK. Effects of the Works Program on RuralRelief: A Survey of Rural Relief Cases Closed in Seven States, July through November 1935. Research Monograph no. 13. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration,1938, 115 pp. (A.S.978/7)
GAER, JOSEPH. Toward Farm Security: The Problem of Rural Poverty and the Work ofthe Farm Security Administration. Washington, D.C.: Farm Security Administration,1941, 246 pp. (A.S.895/3)
104
GREY, MICHAEL R. New Deal Medicine: The Rural Health Programs of the FarmSecurity Administration. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1999, 238 pp. (DSC 99/19733)
HARDIN, CHARLES M. The Politics of Agriculture: Soil Conservation and the Strugglefor Power in Rural America. Glencoe, Ill.: Free Press, 1952, 282 pp. (7082.e.3)
KIRBY, JACK TEMPLE. Rural Worlds Lost: The American South, 1920-1960. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University, 1987, 390 pp. (DSC 87/14987)
KOLB, JOHN H. and EDMUND DE S. BRUNNER. A Study of Rural Society: ItsOrganization and Changes. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1935, 642 pp. (8286.h.7); rev.ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1940, 694 pp. (8288.f.16)
LIVELY, C. E. and CONRAD TAEUBER. Rural Migration in the United States. Research Monograph no. 19. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration,1939, 192 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MANGUS, A. R. Changing Aspects of Rural Relief. Washington, D.C.: WorksProgress Administration, 1938, 238 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MANGUS, A. R. Rural Regions of the United States. Washington, D.C.: WorksProgress Administration, 1940, 230 pp. (A.S.978/49.(7.))
MELVIN, BRUCE L. Rural Youth on Relief. Research Monograph no. 11. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1937, 112 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MELVIN, BRUCE L. and ELNA N. SMITH. Rural Youth: Their Situation andProspects. Research Monograph no. 15. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1938, 167 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MERTZ, PAUL E. New Deal Policy and Southern Rural Poverty. Baton Rouge andLondon: Louisiana State University Press, 1978, 279 pp. (X.520/13552)
MULLER, FREDERICK W. Public Rural Electrification. Washington, D.C.:American Council on Public Affairs, 1944, 183 pp. (8759.d.33)
MUSTARD, HARRY S. Rural Health Insurance. New York: Commonwealth Fund,1936, 601 pp. (7391.r.10)
SANDERSON, DWIGHT. Research Memorandum on Rural Life in the Depression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 169 pp. (X.529/62783)
VANCE, RUPERT B. Rural Relief and Recovery. Washington, D.C.: WorksProgress Administration, 1939, 32 pp. (A.S.978/22)
VANCE, RUPERT B. and GORDON W. BLACKWELL New Farm Homes for Old: A Study of Rural Public Housing in the South. University: University of Alabama Press,1946, 245 pp. (Mic.A.17705)
105
WILLEFORD, MARY BRISTOW. Income and Health in Remote Rural Areas: AStudy of 400 Families in Leslie County, Kentucky. New York: Columbia University,1932, 88 pp. (08285.h.27)
WOODSON, CARTER G. The Rural Negro. Washington, D.C.: Association forthe Study of Negro Life and History, 1930, 265 pp. (Ac.8444/4)
WORKS, GEORGE ALAN and SIMON O. LESSER. Rural America Today: ItsSchools and Community Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1942, 450 pp. (08385.b.83)
WYNNE, WALLER. Five Years of Rural Relief. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1938, 160 pp. (A.S.978/49.(1.))
ZIMMERMAN, CARLE C. and NATHAN L. WHETTEN. Rural Families onRelief. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1938, 161 pp. (A.S.978/7)
M. TOWNS AND CITIES
ARNOLD, JOSEPH L. The New Deal in the Suburbs: A History of the Greenbelt TownProgram, 1935-1954. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1971, 272 pp. (X.529/15928)
BLUMENTHAL, ALBERT. Small-Town Stuff: A Total Picture of the Intimate Aspects ofVillage Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 416 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(13.))
CONKIN, PAUL K. Tomorrow a New World: The New Deal Community Program. Ithaca, N.Y.: published for the American Historical Association by Cornell UniversityPress, 1959, 350 pp. (08052.1.30)GELFAND, MARK I. A Nation of Cities: The Federal Government and Urban America,1933-1965. New York: Oxford University Press, 1975, 476 pp. (X.809/22119)
KLAUS, SUSAN L., comp. Links in the Chain: Greenbelt, Maryland and the New TownMovement in America: An Annotated Bibliography. Washington, D.C.: Centre ofWashington Area Studies, George Washington University, 1987, 62 pp. (DSC4233.15 13)
LYND, ROBERT S. and HELEN MERRELL LYND. Middletown in Transition: AStudy in Cultural Conflicts. London: Constable, 1937, 604 pp. (010410.b.4)
MCKENZIE, RODERICK D. The Metropolitan Community. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 352 pp. (X.800/1629.(6.))
MEIKLE, JEFFREY L. The City of Tomorrow, Model 1937. London: PentgramDesign, 1984, 35 pp. (YK.1992.a.5412)
106
MUMFORD, LEWIS. The Culture of Cities. London: Secker & Warburg, 1938, 586pp. (08286.k.9)
OGBURN, WILLIAM F. Social Characteristics of Cities. Reprint, New York: Arno,1974, 70 pp. (YA.1994.b.4220)
UNITED STATES RESETTLEMENT ADMINISTRATION. Greenbelt Towns: ADemonstration in Suburban Planning. Washington, D.C.: U.S. ResettlementAdministration, 1936. (A.S.977/8)
N. WELFARE, RELIEF AND SOCIAL SECURITY
ABBOTT, GRACE. From Relief to Social Security: The Development of the New PublicWelfare Services and Their Administration. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941,388 pp. (8286.b.72)
ACHENBAUM, W. ANDREW. Social Security: Visions and Revisions. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1986, 300 pp. (YC.1986.b.3553)
ADAMS, GRACE K. Workers on Relief. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press,1939, 344 pp. (8285.w.41; 8289.c.17)
ARMSTRONG, LOUISE V. We Too Are the People. Reprint, New York: DaCapo, 1972, 474 pp. (YA.1990.a.22610)
ALTMEYER, ARTHUR J. The Formative Years of Social Security. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1966, 314 pp. (X.519/4577; X.529/6767)
BAIRD, ENID, in collaboration with HUGH P. BRINTON. Average General ReliefBenefits, 1933-1938. Washington, D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1940, 89 pp. (A.S.978/51; AS1144/842)BLUMELL, BRUCE D. The Development of Public Assistance in the State of Washingtonduring the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1984, 490 pp.(X.520/38827)
BOAN, FERN. A History of Poor Relief Legislation and Administration in Missouri. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 243 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(53.))
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. The Illinois Poor Law and Its Administration. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 541 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(44.))
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. Public Welfare Administration in the UnitedStates: Select Documents. 2d ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1938, 1229pp. (Ac.2691.d/29.(13.))
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. Social Work and the Courts: Select Statutes andJudicial Decisions. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1934, 610 pp. (Ac.2691.d/29.(6.))
107
BREMER, WILLIAM W. Depression Winters: New York Social Workers and the NewDeal. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1984, 231 pp. (YA.1989.a.18254)
BROCK, WILLIAM R. Welfare, Democracy and the New Deal. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1988, 376 pp. (YH.1988.b.1086)
BROWN, JOSEPHINE CHAPIN. The Rural Community and Social Case Work. NewYork: Family Welfare Association of America, 1934, 165 pp. (Mic.A.19697)
BURNS, ARTHUR E. and EDWARD A. WILLIAMS. Federal Work, Security andRelief Programs. Washington, D.C.: Works Projects Administration, 1941, 159 pp. (A.S.978/7)
CAROTHERS, DORIS. Chronology of the Federal Emergency Relief Administration, May12, 1933, to December 31, 1935. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration,1937, 163 pp. (A.S.978/7)
CHAMBERS, CLARKE A. Seedtime of Reform: American Social Service and SocialAction, 1918-1933. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1963, 326 pp. (X.520/46)
COLCORD, JOANNA C. Cash Relief. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1936,263 pp. (Mic.A.10138)
COLCORD, JOANNA C. Emergency Work Relief: As Carried out in Twenty-sixAmerican Communities, 1930-1931, with Suggestions for Setting up a Program. New York: Russell Sage Foundation, 1932, 286 pp. (Mic.A.10144)
CONKIN, PAUL K. FDR and the Origins of the Welfare State. New York: Crowell,1967, 118 pp. (X.529/11337)
CROUSE, JOAN M. The Homeless Transient in the Great Depression: New York State,1929-1941. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986, 319 pp.(YC.1987.b.4429)
DOUGLAS, PAUL H. Social Security in the United States: An Analysis and Appraisal ofthe Federal Social Security Act. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1936, 384 pp (8287.cc.27); 2d ed., New York and London: Whittlesey House, 1939, 493 pp. (8287.de.52)
DOUGLAS, PAUL H. Standards of Unemployment Insurance. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1933, 251 pp. (Ac.2691.dg2.(19.))
DOUGLAS, PAUL H. and AARON DIRECTOR. The Problem of Unemployment. New York: Macmillan, 1931, 505 pp. (8285.w.3)
EPSTEIN, ABRAHAM. Insecurity: A Challenge to America: A Study of Social Insurancein the United States and Abroad. 2d rev. ed., New York: Random House, 1938, 939pp. (8288.f.34)
108
FALK, I. S. Security Against Sickness: A Study of Health Insurance. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1936, 423 pp. (8234.cc.10)
FARNHAM, REBECCA T. and IRENE LINK. Effects of the Works Program on RuralRelief: A Survey of Rural Relief Cases Closed in Seven States, July through November 1935. Research Monograph no. 13. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration,1938, 115 pp. (A.S.978/7)
FISHER, JACOB. The Response of Social Work to the Depression. Boston: G. K. Hall,1980, 266 pp. (DSC 80/34643)
GAYER, ARTHUR D. Public Works and Unemployment Relief in the United States. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 44 pp. (Ac.1915.b)
GEDDES, ANNE E. Trends in Relief Expenditures, 1910-1935. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1937, 117 pp. (A.S.978/7)
GILBOY, ELIZABETH W. Applicants for Work Relief: A Study of MassachusettsFamilies Under the FERA and WPA. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,1940, 273 pp. (08286.dd.93)
GLICK, FRANK Z. The Illinois Emergency Relief Commission: A Study ofAdministrative and Financial Aspects of Emergency Relief. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1940, 247 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(48.))
HIRSHFIELD, DANIEL S. The Lost Reform: The Campaign for Compulsory HealthInsurance in the United States from 1932 to 1943. Cambridge, Mass.: HarvardUniversity Press, 1970, 221 pp. (X.320/2612)
HOPKINS, HARRY L. Spending to Save: The Complete Story of Relief. Seattle andLondon: University of Washington Press, 1972, 197 pp. (X.529/15526)
HOWARD, DONALD S. The WPA and Federal Relief Policy. New York: RussellSage Foundation, 1943, 879 pp. (08286.k.69)
KELLOGG, RUTH M. The United State [sic] Employment Service. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1933, 192 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36.(29.))
KRUEGER, THOMAS A. And Promises to Keep: The Southern Conference for HumanWelfare, 1938-1948. Nashville: Vanderbilt University Press, 1967, 218 pp. (X.800/3881)
LANE, MARIE D. and FRANCIS STEEGMULLER. America on Relief. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1938, 180 pp. (Mic.A.12429)
LUBOVE, ROY. The Struggle for Social Security, 1900-1935. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1968, 276 pp. (X.519/5449)
109
MCKINLEY, CHARLES and ROBERT W. FRASE. Launching Social Security: ACapture-and-Record Account, 1935-1937. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press,1970, 519 pp. (X.520/7503)
MERIAM, LEWIS. Relief and Social Security. Washington, D.C.: BrookingsInstitution, 1946, 912 pp. (8287.g.57)
MANGUS, A. R. Changing Aspects of Rural Relief. Washington, D.C.: WorksProgress Administration, 1938, 238 pp. (A.S.978/7)
MINK, GWENDOLYN. The Wages of Motherhood: Inequality in the Welfare State,1917-42. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1995, 198 pp. (YC.1996.a.1772)
NASH, GERALD D., NOEL H. PUGACH and RICHARD F. TOMASSON, eds. Social Security: The First Half-Century. Albuquerque: University of New MexicoPress, 1988, 344 pp. (YA.1990.b.4173)
NELSON, DANIEL M. Unemployment Insurance: The American Experience, 1915-1935. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press, 1969, 305 pp. (X.510/2499)
PATTERSON, JAMES T. America's Struggle Against Poverty, 1900-1994. Cambridge,Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1994, 309 pp. (YC.1996.b.1850)
PATTERSON, JAMES T. The Welfare State in America, 1930-1980. Durham: British Association for American Studies, 1981, 43 pp. (X.529/45993)
POPPENDIECK, JANET. Breadlines Knee-deep in Wheat: Food Assistance in the GreatDepression. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1986, 306 pp. (DSC86/09585)
RADOMSKI, ALEXANDER L. Work Relief in New York State, 1931-1935. Morningside Heights, N.Y.: King's Crown Press, 1947, 332 pp. (Mic.A.12367)
ROSE, NANCY E. Put to Work: Relief Programs in the Great Depression. New York: Monthly Review Press, 1994, 144 pp. (DSC 94/16531)
SCHNEIDER, DAVID M. and ALBERT DEUTSCH. The History of Public Welfarein New York State, 1867-1940. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 410 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(51.))
VANCE, RUPERT B. Rural Relief and Recovery. Washington, D.C.: WorksProgress Administration, 1939, 32 pp. (A.S.978/22)
WHITE, R. CLYDE and MARY K. WHITE. Research Memorandum on Social Aspectsof Relief Policies in the Depression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 173 pp. (X.529/62769)
110
WHITING, THEODORE E. and T. J. WOOFTER, JR. Summary Relief and FederalWork Program Statistics, 1933-1940. Washington, D.C.: Works ProjectsAdministration, 1941, 64 pp. (A.S.978/47)
WILCOX, JEROME K. Unemployment Relief Documents: Guide to the OfficialPublications and Releases of F.E.R.A. and the 48 State Relief Agencies. New York: H. W.Wilson, 1936, 95 pp. (8287.e.54)
WILLIAMS, EDWARD A. Federal Aid for Relief. New York: Columbia UniversityPress, 1939. (08286.h.23); reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968, 269 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(452.))
WITTE, EDWIN E. The Development of the Social Security Act. Madison: Universityof Wisconsin Press, 1962, 220 pp. (08052.de.36)
WOODRUFF, NAN E. As Rare as Rain: Federal Relief in the Great Southern Droughtof 1930-31. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1985, 203 pp. (DSC 86/09035)
WYNNE, WALLER. Five Years of Rural Relief. Washington, D.C.: Works ProgressAdministration, 1938, 160 pp. (A.S.978/49.(1.))
ZIMMERMAN, CARLE C. and NATHAN L. WHETTEN. Rural Families onRelief. Washington, D.C.: Works Progress Administration, 1938, 161 pp. (A.S.978/7)
O. WOMEN
ANDERSEN, KRISTI. After Suffrage: Women in Partisan and Electoral Politics before theNew Deal. Chicago and London: University of Chicago, 1996, 191 pp. (DSC96/26553)
BECKER, SUSAN D. The Origins of the Equal Rights Amendment: American FeminismBetween the Wars. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 300 pp. (X.529/51552)
BLACKWELDER, JULIA K. Women of the Depression: Caste and Culture in SanAntonio, 1929-1939. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1984, 279 pp. (YA.1989.b.5948)
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. Women in the Twentieth Century: A Study ofTheir Political, Social and Economic Activities. New York and London: McGraw-Hill,1933, 364 pp. (X.800/1629.(10.))
CHAFE, WILLIAM E. The American Woman: Her Changing Social, Economic andPolitical Roles, 1920-1970. New York: Oxford University Press, 1972, 351 pp. (X.529/15758); London: Oxford University Press, 1974, 351 pp. (X.519/16367)
111
CHATEAUVERT, MELINDA. Marching Together: Women of the Brotherhood ofSleeping Car Porters. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1998, 267 pp. (DSC98/11466)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. Women and Minoritiesduring the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 349 pp. (YC.1991.b.546)
FAULKNER, HOWARD J. and VIRGINIA D. PRUITT, eds. Dear Dr. Menninger: Women's Voices from the Thirties. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press,1997, 258 pp. (DSC 97/13831)
GABIN, NANCY F. Feminism in the Labor Movement: Women and the United AutoWorkers, 1935-1975. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1990, 257 pp. (YA.1993.b.9139)
GOERNER, FRED. The Search for Amelia Earhart. London: Bodley Head, 1966,286 pp. (X.809/2894)
GORDON, FELICE D. After Winning: The Legacy of the New Jersey Suffragists, 1920-1947. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1986, 262 pp. (DSC86/15225)
GRAY, BRENDA C. Black Female Domestics during the Depression in New York City,1930-1940. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 200 pp. (YC.1993.b.6369
HAGOOD, MARGARET J. Mothers of the South: Portraiture of the White Tenant FarmWoman. Reprint, New York: Greenwood, 1969, 252 pp. (YA.1990.a.21070);Charlottesville and London: University Press of Virginia, 1996, 252 pp. (YC.1997.a.2102)
HALL, JACQUELYN D. Revolt against Chivalry: Jessie Daniel Ames and the Women'sCampaign against Lynching. New York and Guildford: Columbia University Press,1979, 373 pp. (X.520/14444; X.529/74043)
HAPKE, LAURA. Daughters of the Great Depression: Woman, Work and Fiction in theAmerican 1930s. Athens and London: University of Georgia Press, 1995, 286 pp. (YC.1996.b.2784)
HILLIS, MARJORIE. New York, Fair or No Fair: A Guide for the Woman Vacationist. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1939, 206 pp. (010410.g.56)
METTLER, SUZANNE. Dividing Citizens: Gender and Federalism in New Deal PublicPolicy. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1998, 239 pp. (DSC98/22624)
MINK, GWENDOLYN. The Wages of Motherhood: Inequality in the Welfare State,1917-42. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1995, 198 pp. (YC.1996.a.1772)
112
OAKES, CLAUDIA M. United States Women in Aviation, 1930-1939. Washington,D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1991, 70 pp. (DSC 99/29330)
PRUETTE, LORINE, ed. Women Workers through the Depression: A Study of WhiteCollar Employment. New York: Macmillan, 1934, 164 pp. (8286.e.55)
PUTNAM, GEORGE P. Soaring Wings: A Biography of Amelia Earhart. London: Harrap, 1940, 270 pp. (10888.e.22)
RABINOWITZ, PAULA. Labor and Desire: Women's Revolutionary Fiction inDepression America. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1991, 222 pp. (DSC 92/02972)
RAUB, PATRICIA. Yesterday's Stories: Popular Women's Novels of the Twenties andThirties. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1994, 131 pp. (YC.1995.b.2537)
ROSE, KENNETH D. American Women and the Repeal of Prohibition. New York: New York University Press, 1996, 215 pp. (DSC 0857.430 33)
RUÍZ, VICKI L. Cannery Women, Cannery Lives: Mexican Women, Unionization andthe California Food Processing Industry, 1930-1950. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1987, 194 pp. (YA.1989.b.7702)
RUPP, LEILA J. Mobilizing Women for War: German and American Propaganda, 1939-1945. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1978, 243 pp. (X.809/43415)
SCHARF, LOIS. To Work and to Wed: Female Employment, Feminism and the GreatDepression. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1980, 240 pp. (X.529/39543)
SCHARF, LOIS and JOAN M. JENSEN, eds. Decades of Discontent: The Women'sMovement, 1920-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1983, 315 pp. (X.520/32353)
SWAIN, MARTHA H. Ellen S. Woodward: New Deal Advocate for Women. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1995, 275 pp. (YC.1996.b.6704)
WANDERSEE, WINIFRED D. Women's Work and Family Values, 1920-1940. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1981, 165 pp. (X.520/25163)
WARE, SUSAN. Beyond Suffrage: Women in the New Deal. Cambridge, Mass., andLondon: Harvard University Press, 1981, 204 pp. (X.800/31656)
WARE, SUSAN. Holding Their Own: American Women in the 1930s. Boston: Twayne, 1982, 223 pp. (DSC 83/26148)
113
WARE, SUSAN. Partner and I: Molly Dewson, Feminism and New Deal Politics. NewHaven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1987, 327 pp. (YC.1988.b.1220)
WEIGLE, MARTA, ed. Women of New Mexico: Depression Era Images. Santa Fe,N.M.: Ancient City Press, 1993, 129 pp. (YA.1995.b.4972)
VI. CULTURAL AND INTELLECTUAL HISTORY
A. BIBLIOGRAPHIES AND GUIDES
KALFATOVIC, MARTIN R. The New Deal Fine Arts Projects: A Bibliography, 1933-1992. Metuchen, N.J., and London: Scarecrow, 1994, 504 pp. (2725.e.2664)
ROSENZWEIG, ROY, ed. Government and the Arts in Thirties America: A Guide toOral Histories and Other Research Materials. Fairfax, Va.: George Mason UniversityPress, 1986, 329 pp. (DSC 88/14938)
WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Archives of the Work ProjectsAdministration and Predecessors, 1933-1943. Brighton: Harvestor Microfilm, 1987, 34pp. (2708.e.1069; 2719.e.1410)
B. MISCELLANEOUS STUDIES
ADAM, T. R. The Museum and Popular Culture. New York: American Associationfor Adult Education, 1939, 177 pp. (08385.aa.10)
ALEXANDER, CHARLES C. Nationalism in American Thought, 1930-1945. Chicago: Rand McNally, 1971. (X.709/12827)
AMERICAN ARTISTS' CONGRESS. Graphic Works of the American Thirties: ABook of 100 Prints. Reprint, New York: Da Capo, 1977, 114 pp. (X.415/5970)
AMERICAN UNION OF DECORATIVE ARTISTS AND CRAFTSMEN. Annual of American Design 1931. New York: Ives Washburn, 1930, 176 pp. (P.P.1711.ka)
BACH, RICHARD F. Silver: An Exhibition of Contemporary American Design byManufacturers, Designers and Craftsmen. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art,1937, 14 pp. (07805.ee.98)
BAIGELL, MATTHEW and JULIA WILLIAMS, eds. Artists Against War and Fascism: Papers of the First American Artists' Congress. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers UniversityPress, 1985, 310 pp. (DSC 89/09287)
BATTERSBY, MARTIN. The Decorative Thirties. New York: Walker, 1971, 208pp. (X.423/1881)
114
BECKER, JANE S. Selling Tradition: Appalachia and the Construction of an AmericanFolk, 1930-1940. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1998,331 pp. (YC.1999.b.522)
BECKHAM, SUE B. Depression Post Office Murals and Southern Culture: A GentleReconstruction. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1989, 338 pp. (DSC89/20879)
BENTON, THOMAS HART. An Artist in America. New York: R. M. McBride,1937, 276 pp. (010410.1.26)
BEST, GARY D. The Nickel and Dime Decade: American Popular Culture during the1930's. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1993, 168 pp. (YC.1993.b.7988)
BRIDWELL, E. NELSON. Superman: From the Thirties to the Seventies. London: Spring Books, 1979, 386 pp. (X.410/10397)
BROWDER, LAURA. Rousing the Nation: Radical Culture in Depression America. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1998, 217 pp. (YC.1999.b.2056)
BRUCE, EDWARD and FORBES WATSON. Art in Federal Buildings. Vol. 1,Mural Designs, 1934-1936. Washington, D.C.: Art in Federal Buildings Inc., 1936,309 pp. (W.P.12825)
CHAMBERS, DAVID L. Indiana: A Hoosier History Based on the Mural Paintings ofThomas Hart Benton. Indianapolis, Ind.: Bobbs-Merrill, 1933, 47 pp. (10411.I.36)CHENEY, MARTHA C. Modern Art in America. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1939, 190 pp. (07812.pp.1)
CLARK, ROBERT J., et al. Design in America: The Cranbrook Vision, 1925-1950. New York: Abrams, 1983, 352 pp. (DSC 84/18182)
CONTRERAS, BELISARIO R. Tradition and Innovation in New Deal Art. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press; London: Associated University Presses,1983, 253 pp. (YV.1988.b.478)
COONEY, TERRY A. Balancing Acts: American Thought and Culture in the 1930's. New York: Twayne; London: Prentice-Hall, 1995, 263 pp. (YC.1995.b.2762)
COSTIGLIOLA, FRANK. Awkward Dominion: American Political, Economic andCultural Relations with Europe, 1919-1933. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press,1984, 381 pp. (DSC 85/08141)
CRUNDEN, ROBERT M. From Self to Society, 1919-1941. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1972, 212 pp. (X.700/9394)
DAVIDSON, DONALD G. The Attack on Leviathan: Regionalism and Nationalism inthe United States. Reprint, Gloucester, Mass.: Peter Smith, 1962, 368 pp. (X.809/2161)
115
DENNIS, JAMES M. Grant Wood: A Study in American Art and Culture. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1986, 256 pp. (LB.31.b.457)
DENNIS, JAMES M. Renegade Regionalists: The Modern Independence of Grant Wood,Thomas Hart Benton and John Steuart Curry. Madison: University of Wisconsin Press,1998, 279 pp. (YC.1998.a.1751)
DENOON, CHRISTOPHER. Posters of the WPA. Los Angeles, Calif.: WheatleyPress, 1987, 175 pp. (DSC 87/29763)
DE SAISSET ART GALLERY AND MUSEUM. New Deal Art: California. SantaClara, Calif.: De Saisset Art Galley and Museum, 1976, 172 pp. (X.419/4345)
DORMAN, ROBERT L. Revolt of the Provinces: The Regionalist Movement in America,1920-1945. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1993, 366 pp. (DSC93/11652)
DUNCAN, ALASTAIR. American Art Deco. London: Thames and Hudson, 1986,288 pp. (LB.31.c.1825)
EKIRCH, ARTHUR A. Ideologies and Utopias: The Impact of the New Deal on AmericanThought. Chicago: Quadrangle, 1969, 307 pp. (X.809/11707)
FAGETTE, PAUL. Digging for Dollars: American Archaeology and the New Deal. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico, 1996, 228 pp. (DSC 97/01614)
FERMI, LAURA. Illustrious Immigrants: The Intellectual Migration from Europe, 1930-41. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1968, 440 pp. (X.800/3238)
FLEMING, DONALD and BERNARD BAILYN, eds. The Intellectual Migration,Europe and America, 1930-1960. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of HarvardUniversity Press, 1969, 748 pp. (X.800/3982)
FORD, HUGH D. Published in Paris: American and British Writers, Painters andPublishers in Paris, 1920-1939. New York: Macmillan, 1975, 453 pp. (X.981/10131)
FRANCI, GIOVANNA, ROSELLA MANGARONI and ESTHER ZASO. AJourney through American Art Deco: Architecture, Design and Cinema in the Twenties andThirties. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1997, 119 pp. (DSC 98/05008)
GEHBARD, DAVID. The National Trust Guide to Art Deco in America. New Yorkand Chichester: Wiley, 1996, 278 pp. (YC.1996.b.8818)
GOODYEAR, A. CONGER. The Museum of Modern Art: The First Ten Years. NewYork: Museum of Modern Art, 1943, 144 pp. (07812.v.7)
116
GREIF, MARTIN. Depression Modern: The Thirties Style in America. New York: Universe Books, 1975, 192 pp. (X.423/2316)
GRIMES, MARY K. and GEORGIANN GERSELL. The Impact of Art Deco, 1925-1940: An Exhibition Held April 20 through May 23, 1976. Indianapolis, Ind.: Indianapolis Museum of Art, 1976, 31 pp. (X.415/3144)
ROSENTHAL, BERNARD M. The Gentle Invasion: Continental Emigré Booksellers ofthe Thirties and Forties and Their Impact on the Antiquarian Booktrade in the United States: A Lecture Given 15 December 1986. New York: Book Arts Press, School of LibraryService, Columbia University, 1987, 17 pp. (ORW.1986.a.3519 OIOC)
HARRIS, JONATHAN. Federal Art and National Culture: The Politics of Identity inNew Deal America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995, 236 pp. (YC.1996.b.641)
HARWELL, RICHARD, ed. Gone with the Wind as Book and Film. Columbia: University of South Carolina Press, 1983, 274 pp. (YH.1988.b.1053;YA.1989.b.6011)
HEILBUT, ANTHONY. Exiled in Paradise: German Refugee Artists and Intellectuals inAmerica, from the 1930s to the Present. Berkeley and London: University of CaliforniaPress, 1997, 524 pp. (YC.1998.a.67)HELLER, STEVEN and LOUISE FILI. Streamline: American Art Deco Graphic Design. San Francisco, Calif.: Chronicle Books, 1995, 132 pp. (YC.1996.b.964)
HUGHES, H. STUART. The Sea Change: The Migration of Social Thought, 1930-1965. New York and London: Harper and Row, 1975, 283 pp. (X.809/45874)
ILLINOIS STATE MUSEUM. After the Great Crash: New Deal Art in Illinois: AnExhibition of Art from the Period 1934-1943, Produced by Artists on the Various Federal ArtProjects in Illinois. Springfield, Ill.: Illinois State Museum Society, 1983, 32 pp. (A.S.I50/996)
JOHNSON, PHILIP. Machine Art. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1934. (Mic.A.9578(5) 7959.g.32); New York: Museum of Modern Art, 60th anniversaryed., 1994. (YC.1996.b.4244)
JONES, ALFRED H. Roosevelt's Image Brokers: Poets, Playwrights and the Use of theLincoln Symbol. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: National UniversityPublications, Kennikat Press, 1974, 134 pp. (X.809/20378)
KENT, DONALD P. The Refugee Intellectual: The Americanization of the Immigrants of1933-1941. New York: Columbia University Press, 1953, 317 pp. (10414.cc.15)
KEPPEL, FREDERICK P. and ROBERT L. DUFFUS. The Arts in American Life. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 227 pp. (X.800/1629.(2.))
117
LAWSON, RICHARD A. The Failure of Independent Liberalism, 1930-1941. NewYork: Putnam's, 1971, 322 pp. (X.809/16890)
LE CORBUSIER. When the Cathedrals Were White: A Journey to the Country of TimidPeople. Translated by Francis E. Hyslop, Jr. London: Routledge, 1947, 217 pp. (07822.b.28)
LONG, FRANK W. Confessions of a Depression Muralist. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1997, 179 pp. (DSC 97/12501)
MCDONALD, WILLIAM F. Federal Relief Administration and the Arts: The Originsand Administrative History of the Arts Projects of the Works Progress Administration. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1969, 869 pp. (X.421/5827)
MCKINZIE, RICHARD D. The New Deal for Artists. Princeton, N.J.: PrincetonUniversity Press, 1973, 203 pp. (LR.414.h.14); Princeton, N.J.: Princeton UniversityPress, 1975, 203 pp. (Cup.1264.a.9)
MARLING, KARAL A. Wall-to-Wall America: A Cultural History of Post-Office Muralsin the Great Depression. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1982, 348 pp. (DSC 83/00444)
MELOSH, BARBARA. Engendering Culture: Manhood and Womanhood in New DealPublic Art and Theater. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press,1991, 297 pp. (YK.1992.b.8794)
MELTZER, MILTON. Violins and Shovels: The WPA Arts Projects. New York: Delacorte, 1976, 160 pp. (X.429/10596)
MILES, ORVELL. The Real Thing: Imitation and Authenticity in American Culture,1880-1940. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1989, 382pp. (YC.1989.b.7657)
MULLEN, BILL and SHERRY LEE LINKON, eds. Radical Revisions: Rereading1930s Culture. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1996, 291 pp. (YA.1997.b.6120)
MUSEUM OF MODERN ART. New Horizons in American Art. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1936, 171 pp. (7810.t.23)
MURESIANU, JOHN M. American Intellectuals and the World Crisis, 1938-1945. New York and London: Garland, 1988, 483 pp. (YC.1991.b.4869)
NEPHEW, SARA. Quilt Designs from the Thirties. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1994, 64 pp. (X.0625/174)
NINKOVICH, FRANK A. The Diplomacy of Ideas: U.S. Foreign Policy and CulturalRelations, 1938-1950. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981, 253pp. (X.800/30372)
118
OSTRANDER, GILMAN M. American Civilization in the First Machine Age, 1890-1940. New York and London: Harper and Row, 1972, 414 pp. (X.700/11999)
OVERMYER, GRACE. Government and the Arts. New York: Norton, 1939, 338pp. (07804.b.29)
PARK, MARLENE and GERALD E. MARKOWITZ. Democratic Vistas: Post Officesand Public Art in the New Deal. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1984, 247 pp. (DSC 85/11087)
PELLS, RICHARD H. Radical Visions and American Dreams: Culture and SocialThought in the Depression Years. New York: Harper and Row, 1974, 424 pp. (X.808/40346)
PETRUCK, PENINAH R. Y. American Art Criticism, 1910-1940. New York andLondon: Garland, 1981, 310 pp. (X.421/25589)
POWERS, RICHARD G. G-men: Hoover's FBI in American Popular Culture. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1983, 356 pp. (YA.1987.b.1604)
PILDAS, AVE. Art Deco: Los Angeles: Photographs. New York and London: Harperand Row, 1977, 64 pp. (X.419/34590)RICKER, JEWETT, ed. Sculpture at a Century of Progress, Chicago, 1933, 1934. Chicago: [1934], 31 pp. (07108.bb.21)
SAYLER, OLIVER M. Revolt in the Arts: A Survey of the Creation, Distribution andAppreciation of Art in America. New York: Brentano's, 1930, 351 pp. (07805.c.35)
SCHRADER, ROBERT F. The Indian Arts and Crafts Board: An Aspect of New DealIndian Policy. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1983, 364 pp. (YV.1989.b.2512)
SCHWARTZ, LAWRENCE H. Marxism and Culture: The CPUSA and Aesthetics inthe 1930s. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1980, 151 pp. (X.809/46019)
STAUB, MICHAEL E. Voices of Persuasion: Politics of Representation in 1930s America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994, 174 pp. (YC.1994.b.6262)
SUGGS, JON C., ed. American Proletarian Culture: The Twenties and the Thirties. Detroit, Mich., and London: Gale Research, 1993. (HLR 809)
TUGWELL, REXFORD G. The Industrial Discipline and the Governmental Arts. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1933, 241 pp. (20017.c.4)
UNIVERSITY OF MICHIGAN MUSEUM OF ART. The Federal Art Project: American Prints from the 1930s in the Collection of the University of Michigan Museum of Art. Ann Arbor: University of Michigan Museum of Art, 1985, 220 pp. (DSC 86/05861)
119
WHITE, JOHN F., ed. Art in Action: American Art Centers and the New Deal. Metuchen, N.J., and London: Scarecrow, 1987, 187 pp. (YC.1988.a.1317)
WIRZ, HANS and RICHARD STRINER. Washington Deco: Art Deco Design in theNation's Capital. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1984, 128 pp. (DSC 85/29175)
C. ADVERTISING
BURT, FRANK A. American Advertising Agencies: An Inquiry into their Origin, Growth,Functions and Future. New York and London: Harper, 1940, 282 pp. (08230.h.47)
MARCHAND, ROLAND. Advertising the American Dream: Making Way forModernity, 1920-1940. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1985,448 pp. (DSC 95/30803)
PEASE, OTIS A. The Responsibilities of American Advertising: Private Control and PublicInfluence, 1920-1940. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1958, 323 pp. (08234.t.10)ROBBINS, TRINA and CASEY ROBBINS, eds. Travel and Vacation AdvertisingCuts from the Twenties and Thirties. New York: Dover, 1994, 94 pp. (YK.1995.b.7589)
D. ARCHITECTURE AND INDUSTRIAL DESIGN
BALFOUR, ALAN. Rockefeller Center: Architecture as Theater. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1978, 248 pp. (X.421/10730)
BARR, ALFRED H., JR., HENRY-RUSSELL HITCHCOCK, JR., PHILIPJOHNSON and LEWIS MUMFORD. Modern Architects. New York: Museum ofModern Art, 1932, 199 pp. (Mic.A.9852(1))
BROWNELL, BAKER and FRANK LLOYD WRIGHT. Architecture and ModernLife. New York and London: Harper, 1937, 339 pp. (07815.bb.29)
BUSH, DONALD J. The Streamlined Decade. New York: Braziller, 1975, 214 pp. (X.622/18500)
CARTER, ROBERT. Fallingwater: Frank Lloyd Wright. London: Phaidon, 1994,60 pp. (LB.31.b.11507)
CERWINSKE, LAURA. Tropical Deco: The Architecture and Design of Old MiamiBeach. New York: Rizzoli, 1981, 95 pp. (LB.31.a.809)
CHENEY, SHELDON W. and MARTHA C. CHENEY. Art and the Machine: AnAccount of Industrial Design in 20th-Century America. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1936, 307 pp. (7809.pp.24)
120
CROWE, MICHAEL F. Deco by the Bay: Art Deco Architecture in the San Francisco BayArea. New York: Viking Studio Books; London: Penguin, 1995, 122 pp. (YC.1996.b.456)
DE LONG, DAVID G., ed. Frank Lloyd Wright: Designs for an American Landscape,1922-1932. London: Thames and Hudson, 1996, 207 pp. (LB.31.b.13261)
HINE, LEWIS W. The Empire State Building. New York and London: Prestel, 1998,103 pp. (LB.31.c.9612)
HITCHCOCK, HENRY-RUSSELL and PHILIP JOHNSON. The InternationalStyle: Architecture since 1922. New York: Norton, 1932, 240 pp. (Mic.A.8998)
JOHNSON, DONALD L. Frank Lloyd Wright versus America: The 1930s. Cambridge, Mass., and London: MIT Press, 1990, 436 pp. (LB.31.a.3117)
KARP, WALTER. The Center: A History and Guide to Rockefeller Center. New York: American Heritage, 1982, 128 pp. (X.805/4755)
LIPMAN, JONATHAN. Frank Lloyd Wright and the Johnson Wax Buildings. London: Architectural Press, 1986, 192 pp. (YV.1987.b.1630)
MEIKLE, JEFFREY L. Twentieth Century Limited: Industrial Design in America, 1925-1939. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1979, 249 pp. (X.421/23630)
MESSLER, NORBERT. The Art Deco Skyscraper in New York. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 1983, 232 pp. (X.429/16572)
MOCK, ELIZABETH. Built in USA--Since 1932. New York: Museum of ModernArt, 1945, 128 pp. (7822.e.3.)
PULOS, ARTHUR J. American Design Ethic: A History of Industrial Design to 1940. Cambridge, Mass., and London: MIT Press, 1983, 441 pp. (X.805/4594)
SHORT, C. W. and R. STANLEY-BROWN. Public Buildings: A Survey ofArchitecture of Projects Constructed by Federal and Other Governmental Bodies between theYears 1933 and 1939 with the assistance of the Public Works Administration. Washington,D.C.: Federal Emergency Administration of Public Works, 1939, 697 pp. (A.S.917/43)
STERN, ROBERT A. M., GREGORY F. GILMARTIN and THOMASMELLINS. New York 1930: Architecture and Urbanism between the Two Wars. NewYork: Rizzoli, 1987, 847 pp. (DSC 87/12958)
TAURANAC, JOHN. The Empire State Building: The Making of a Landmark. NewYork: St. Martin's Griffin, 1997, 383 pp. (YA.1997.b.6808)
121
WILSON, RICHARD G., DIANNE H. PILGRIM and DICKRAN TASHJIAN. The Machine Age in America, 1918-1941. New York: Brooklyn Museum inassociation with Harry N. Abrams,1986, 376 pp. (YA.1994.b.4382)
E. CARTOONS: POLITICAL
DARLING, JAY N. As Ding Saw Herbert Hoover. Ames: Iowa State University Press,1996, 144 pp. (YA.1998.a.12272)
SCHWARTZ, BRUNO. The Story of Japan in China, As Told in American Cartoons. New York: Trans-Pacific News Service, 1938, 30 pp. (20032.h.10)
SCOTT, QUINCY. Best of Quincy Scott: A Picture Panorama of the TurbulentDepression and World War II Years. Portland, Ore.: Oregon Historical Society, 1980,196 pp. (DSC 81/21880)
F. DANCE
ARMITAGE, MERLE, ed. Martha Graham. Los Angeles, Calif.: Merle Armitage,1937, 132 pp. (YM.1988.a.167)
CONNER, LYNNE. Spreading the Gospel of the Modern Dance: Newspaper DanceCriticism in the United States, 1850-1934. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of PittsburghPress, 1997, 177 pp. (YC.1998.a.4265)
CRESSEY, PAUL G. The Taxi-Dance Hall: A Sociological Study in CommercializedRecreation and City Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 300 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(14.))
HOWARD, RUTH E. The Story of American Ballet. New York: Ihra Pub. Co.,1936, 39 pp. (Mic.A.158062)
MARTIN, CAROL. Dance Marathons: Performing American Culture of the 1920s and1930s. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1994, 182 pp. (YC.1995.b.1718)
MARTIN, JOHN. America Dancing: The Background and Personalities of the ModernDance. New York: Dodge Pub. Co., 1936, 320 pp. (07908.h.39)
MUELLER, JOHN. Astaire Dancing: The Musical Films. London: Hamish Hamilton,1986, 440 pp. (LB.31.b.2674)
PREVOTS, NAIMA. Dancing in the Sun: Hollywood Choreographers, 1915-1937. AnnArbor, Mich.: UMI Research Press, 1987, 281 pp. (DSC 8814.3065 no 44)
SHAW, ARNOLD. Let's Dance: Popular Music in the 1930s. Edited by Bill Willard. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998, 241 pp. (HUS.789.300973)
G. DRAMA AND THEATRE
122
ABRAMSON, DORIS E. Negro Playwrights in the American Theatre, 1925-1959. New York and London: Columbia University Press, 1969, 335 pp. (X.909/18000;X.090/17989)
BENTLEY, JOANNE. Hallie Flanagan: A Life in the American Theatre. New York: Knopf, 1988, 436 pp. (DSC 88/22242)
BOND, FREDERICK W. The Negro and the Drama: The Direct and IndirectContribution which the American Negro Has Made to Drama and the Legitimate Stage, withthe Underlying Conditions Responsible. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1940, 213pp. (11863.b.38)
BUTTITTA, TONY and BARRY WITHAM. Uncle Sam Presents: A Memoir of theFederal Theatre, 1935-1939. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1982, 249pp. (DSC 82/19838)
CLURMAN, HAROLD. The Fervent Years: The Story of the Group Theatre and theThirties. London: Dennis Dobson, 1946, 298 pp. (W.P.12353/2); New York: Hill& Wang, 1957, 302 pp. (W.P.14964.a/8)CRAIG, E. QUITA. Black Drama of the Federal Theatre Era: Beyond the FormalHorizons. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1980, 239 pp. (DSC80/22501)
DE ROHAN, PIERRE, ed. Federal Theatre Plays. New York: Random House,1938, 282 pp. (2303.f.13)
DUFFY, SUSAN. American Labor on Stage: Dramatic Interpretations of the Steel andTextile Industries in the 1930s. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1996, 156pp. (YC.1997.b.598)
DUFFY, SUSAN. The Political Left in the American Theatre of the 1930's: ABibliographic Sourcebook. Metuchen, N.J., and London: Scarecrow, 1992, 213 pp. (2725.e.1922)
EUSTIS, MORTON. B'way, Inc.! The Theatre as a Business. New York: Dodd,Mead, 1934, 356 pp. (11797.e.16)
FEARNOW, MARK. The American Stage and the Great Depression: A Cultural Historyof the Grotesque. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997, 214 pp. (YC.1997.b.4105)
FLANAGAN, HALLIE. Arena: The History of the Federal Theatre. New York: B.Blom, 1965, 475 pp. (X.900/3282)
FLEXNER, ELEANOR. American Playwrights, 1918-1938: The Theatre Retreats fromReality. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1938, 331 pp. (11862.d.36)
FRADEN, RENA. Blueprints for a Black Federal Theatre, 1935-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994, 243 pp. (YC.1994.b.4371)
123
GILL, GLENDA E. White Grease Paint on Black Performers: A Study of the FederalTheatre of 1935-1939. New York: Lang, 1988, 220 pp. (YA.1992.a.4152)
GOLDSTEIN, MALCOLM. The Political Stage: American Drama and Theater of theGreat Depression. New York: Oxford University Press, 1974, 482 pp. (X.981/5026)
HIMELSTEIN, MORGAN Y. Drama Was a Weapon: The Left-Wing Theatre in NewYork, 1929-1941. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1963, 300 pp. (X.909/8350)
HOUGHTON, NORRIS. Advance from Broadway: 19,000 Miles of American Theatre. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1941, 416 pp. (11796.c.14)
MANTLE, BURNS. Contemporary American Playwrights. New York: Dodd, Mead,1940, 357 pp. (11862.d.34)
MARCUSON, LEWIS R. The Stage Immigrant: The Irish, Italians and Jews in AmericanDrama, 1920-1960. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 309 pp. (YC.1991.a.2819)
MATHEWS, JANE DE HART. The Federal Theatre, 1935-1939: Plays, Relief andPolitics. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1967, 342 pp. (X.909/11822)
O'CONNOR, JOHN and LORRAINE BROWN, eds. The Federal Theatre Project: 'Free, Adult, Uncensored'. London: Eyre Methuen, 1980, 228 pp. (L.49/681)
O'HARA, FRANK H. Today in American Drama. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1939, 277 pp. (11865.aa.1)
REYNOLDS, R. C. Stage Left: The Development of the American Social Drama in theThirties. Troy, N.Y.: Whitson Pub. Co., 1986, 175 pp. (YL.1990.b.323)
SMITH, WENDY. Real-life Drama: The Group Theatre and America, 1931-1940. New York: Knopf, 1990, 482 pp. (DSC 91/03386)
WALDAU, ROY S. Vintage Years of the Theatre Guild, 1928-1939. Cleveland, Ohio,and London: Press of Case Western Reserve, 1972, 519 pp. (X.981/3610)
WELLES, ORSON. Orson Welles on Shakespeare: The W.P.A. and Mercury TheatrePlayscripts. Edited by Richard France. New York and London: Greenwood, 1990,297 pp. (YC.1991.b.4860)
WHITMAN, WILLSON. Bread and Circuses: A Study of Federal Theatre. New York: Oxford University Press, 1937, 191 pp. (11796.bb.18); London: Oxford UniversityPress, 1938, 191 pp. (11796.bb.22)
WITTLER, CLARENCE J. Some Social Trends in WPA Drama. Washington, D.C.: Catholic University of America Press, 1939, 125 pp. (11872.bb.8)
124
H. EDUCATION
AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF UNIVERSITY PROFESSORS. Depression,Recovery and Higher Education. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1937, 543 pp. (08385.ee.25)
BEALE, HOWARD K. Are American Teachers Free? An Analysis of Restraints upon theFreedom of Teaching in American Schools. New York: Scribner's, 1936, 855 pp. (Ac.8504.aa)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. Educational Service for Indians. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 18, 1939, 137 pp. (A.S.988)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. Public Education in the Territories and Outlying Posssessions. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 16, 1939,243 pp. (A.S.988)BLAUCH, LLOYD E. and WILLIAM L. IVERSEN. Education of Children on FederalReservations. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Studyno. 17, 1939, 145 pp. (A.S.988)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. and J. ORIN POWERS. Public Education in the District ofColumbia. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Studyno. 15, 1938, 99 pp. (A.S. 988)
BOND, HORACE M. Negro Education in Alabama: A Study in Cotton and Steel. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1939, 358 pp. (08385.f.119); Tuscaloosa andLondon: University of Alabama Press, 1994, 383 pp. (YC.1995.a.2454)
BRAX, RALPH S. The First Student Movement: Student Activism in the United Statesduring the 1930s. Port Washington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1981, 121 pp.(X.809/47885)
BRUNNER, EDMUND DE S. Community Organization and Adult Education: AFive-Year Experiment. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1942, 121 pp. (08385.g.17)
CAMPBELL, D. S., FREDERICK H. BAIR and OSWALD L. HARVEY. Educational Activities of the Works Progress Administration. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 14, 1939, 185 pp. (A.S.988)
COHEN, ROBERT. When the Old Left Was Young: Student Radicals and America'sFirst Mass Student Movement, 1929-1941. New York and Oxford: Oxford UniversityPress, 1993, 432 pp. (YC.1993.b.7319)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in Alaska. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Office of Education Bulletin no. 12, 1937, 56 pp. (A.S.202)
125
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in the Panama Canal Zone. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Office of Education Bulletin no. 8, 1939, 63 pp. (A.S.202)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in the Philippine Islands. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Office of Education Bulletin no. 9, 1935, 53 pp. (A.S.202)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in Puerto Rico. Washington, D.C.: U.SOffice of Education Bulletin no. 5, 1934, 52 pp. (A.S. 202)
EAGAN, EILEEN. Class, Culture and the Classroom: The Student Peace Movement of the1930s. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1981, 319 pp. (X.529/64703)
FRENCH, WILL. Education and Social Dividends. New York: Macmillan, 1935, 119pp. (08311.c.68)
GEIGER, ROGER L. To Advance Knowledge: The Growth of American ResearchUniversities, 1900-1940. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1986, 325pp. (YH.1987.b.529)HARBY, SAMUEL F. A Study of Education in the Civilian Conservation Corps Camps ofthe Second Corps Area, April 1933-March 1937. Ann Arbor, Mich.: Edwards, 1938,264 pp. (08385.c.9)
HOLLIS, ERNEST V. Philanthropic Foundations and Higher Education. New York: Columbia University Press, 1938, 365 pp. (08385.f.113)
JOHNSON, CHARLES S. The Negro College Graduate. Chapel Hill: University ofNorth Carolina Press, 1938, 399 pp. (08385.b.11)
JUDD, CHARLES H. Problems of Education in the United States. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 214 pp. (X.800/1629.(5.))
KRUG, EDWARD A. The Shaping of the American High School. 2 vols. New York: Harper and Row, 1964, 72 pp. (W.P.4065/52)
LANGFORD, HOWARD D. Education and the Social Conflict. New York: Macmillan, 1936, 210 pp. (08311.a.49)
LEVINE, DAVID O. The American College and the Culture of Aspiration, 1915-1940. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1986, 281 pp. (DSC 86/22535)
MOREO, DOMINIC W. Schools in the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1996, 203 pp. (YC.1996.a.2124)
NASH, JAY B., ed. Character Education through Physical Education. New York: Barnes, 1932, 315 pp. (08308.a.56)
PATTERSON, SAMUEL H., ERNEST A. CHOATE and EDMUND DE S.BRUNNER. The School in American Society. Scranton, Pa.: International TextbookCo., 1936, 570 pp. (8314.bb.1/1)
126
REEVES, FLOYD W., JOHN DALE RUSSELL, H. C. GREGG, A. J.BRUMBAUGH and L. E. BLAUCH. The Liberal Arts College; Based upon Surveys ofThirty-five Colleges Related to the Methodist Episcopal Church. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1932, 715 pp. (8385.d.40)
REID, CHARLES F. Education in the Territories and Outlying Possessions of the UnitedStates. New York: Teachers College, Columbia University, 1941, 593 pp. (08385.e.128)
TUSHNET, MARK V. The NAACP's Legal Strategy Against Segregated Education,1925-1950. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1987, 222pp. (YC.1991.b.4992)
TYACK, DAVID, ROBERT LOWE and ELISABETH HANSOT. Public Schools inHard Times: The Great Depression and Recent Years. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1984, 267 pp. (X.520/36158)
TYSON, LEVERING and JOSEPHINE MACLATCHY, eds. Education on the Air,and Radio and Education, 1935: Proceedings of the Sixth Annual Institute for Education byRadio, combined with the Fifth Annual Assembly of the National Advisory Council on Radioin Education. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1935, 316 pp. (Ac.2685.gbc)
WALLACE, JAMES M. Liberal Journalism and American Education, 1914-1941. NewBrunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1991, 237 pp. (DSC 91/20678)
WORKS, GEORGE ALAN and SIMON O. LESSER. Rural America Today: ItsSchools and Community Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1942, 450 pp. (08385.b.83)
I. EXPOSITIONS AND WORLD FAIRS
1. General Study
RYDELL, ROBERT W. World of Fairs: The Century-of-Progress Expositions. Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1993, 269 pp. (YC.1994.a.2907)
2. Chicago Century of Progress International Exposition, 1933-1934
BEARD, CHARLES A., ed. A Century of Progress. Chicago and New York: Harper,in cooperation with A Century of Progress Exposition, 1932, 452 pp. (20016.d.20)
CENTURY OF PROGRESS INTERNATIONAL EXPOSITION. The OfficialPictures of a Century of Progress Exposition, Chicago, 1933. Chicago: Reuben H.Donnelley Corp., 1933. (7960.k.6)
127
KETTERING, CHARLES F. and ALLEN ORTH. The New Necessity: TheCulmination of a Century of Progress in Transportation. Baltimore, Md.: Williams &Wilkins, 1932, 124 pp. (Mic.A.12772)
RALEY, DOROTHY, ed. A Century of Progress: Homes and Furnishings. Chicago,Ill.: M. A. Ring Co., 1934, 127 pp. (Mic.A.13010)
RICKER, JEWETT, ed. Sculpture at a Century of Progress, Chicago, 1933, 1934. Chicago, [1934], 31 pp. (07108.bb.21)
3. Golden Gate International Exposition, 1939
INTERNATIONAL BUSINESS MACHINES CORPORATION. ContemporaryArt of 79 Countries: The International Business Machines Corporation Collection Exhibited inits Gallery of Science and Art in the Palace of Electricity and Communication at the GoldenGate International Exposition, San Francisco, California. San Francisco, Calif.: International Business Machines Corp., 1939. (7869.f.22) NEUHAUS, EUGEN. The Art of Treasure Island: First-hand Impressions of theArchitecture, Sculpture, Landscape Design, Color Effects, Mural Decorations, Illuminations andOther Artistic Aspects of the Golden Gate International Exposition of 1939. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1939, 185 pp. (7959.h.57)
4. New York World's Fair, 1939
BLETTER, ROSEMARIE H., et al. Remembering the Future: The New York World'sFair from 1939-1964. New York: Rizzoli, 1989, 208 pp. (DSC q90/00622)
GAIGE, CROSBY. New York World's Fair Cook Book: The American Kitchen. NewYork: Doubleday, Doran, 1939, 309 pp. (7944.t.37)
GELERNTER, DAVID. 1939: The Lost World of the Fair. New York and London: Free Press, 1995, 418 pp. (YK.1996.a.23972)
HARRISON, HELEN A. and JOSEPH P. CUSKER. Dawn of a New Day: The NewYork World's Fair, 1939/40. New York: Queens Museum; New York and London: New York University Press, 1980, 123 pp. (X.421/23214; X.421/23215)
METROPOLITAN MUSEUM OF ART. Life in America: A Special Loan Exhibitionof Paintings Held during the Period of the New York World's Fair. New York: Metropolitan Museum of Art, 1939, 230 pp. (7866.ppp.9)
MONAGHAN, FRANK, ed. New York: The World's Fair City. Garden City, N.Y.: Garden City Pub. Co., 1937, [90] pp. (10410.y.27)
NEW YORK WORLD'S FAIR. American Art Today: New York World's Fair. NewYork: National Art Society, 1939, 342 pp. (7801.dd.2)
128
UNITED STATES NEW YORK WORLD'S FAIR COMMISSION. Report to theCongress of the United States. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office, 1941,299 pp. (A.S.187/2); Supplement, 1941. (A.S.187/2)
UNITED STATES NEW YORK WORLD'S FAIR COMMISSION. United StatesGovernment Building, New York World's Fair, 1940. Washington, D.C.: U.S. NewYork World's Fair Commission, 1940, 23 pp. (A.S.187/11)
WENTWORTH, CYNTHIA and CARL FEISS. New York World's Fair, 1939: Guide to Housing Exhibits. Washington, D.C.: U. S. Housing Authority, 1939, 16 p. (A.S.997/4)
WESTINGHOUSE ELECTRIC & MANUFACTURING COMPANY. The Bookof Record of the Time Capsule of Cupaloy Deemed Capable of Resisting the Effects of Time forFive Thousand Years, Preserving an Account of Universal Achievements, Embedded in theGrounds of the New York World's Fair, 1939. New York: Westinghouse Electric &Manufacturing Co., 1938, 51 pp. (20033.d.15)
WURTS, RICHARD, et al. The New York World's Fair, 1939-1940. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1977, 152 pp. (X.700/25662)
J. FEDERAL WRITERS PROJECT [See also VII. U.S. States, Regions and Territories]
BREWER, JEUTONNE. The Federal Writers' Project: A Bibliography. Metuchen,N.J., and London: Scarecrow, 1994, 160 pp. (2725.e.2768)
HOBSON, ARCHIE, ed. Remembering America: A Sampler of the WPA AmericanGuide Series. New York and Guildford: Columbia University Press, 1985, 391 pp. (YC.1989.b.2684)
MAGIONE, JERRE G. The Dream and the Deal: The Federal Writers' Project, 1935-1943. Boston and Toronto: Little, Brown, 1972, 416 pp. (X.981/9271)
NOGGLE, BURL. Working with History: The Historical Records Survey in Louisiana andthe Nation, 1936-1942. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1981, 139 pp. (X.800/41198)
PENKOWER, MONTY N. The Federal Writers' Project: A Study in GovernmentPatronage of the Arts. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1977, 266 pp. (X.981/21105)
K. FILM
ALEXANDER, WILLIAM L. Film on the Left: American Documentary Film from 1931to 1942. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1981, 355 pp. (X.950/5125)
129
BAILEY, MARGARET J. Those Glorious Glamour Years: Classic Hollywood CostumeDesign of the 1930's. London: Columbus, 1988, 384 pp. (YV.1989.b.1584)
BALIO, TINO. Grand Design: Hollywood as a Modern Business Enterprise, 1930-1939. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1995, 483 pp. (YC.1994.b.6723)
BARRIER, J. MICHAEL. Hollywood Cartoons: American Animation in Its Golden Age. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999, 648 pp. (YC.1999.b.4424)
BAXTER, JOHN. Hollywood in the Thirties. London: Zwemmer; New York: Barnes, 1968, 160 pp. (X.907/9622)
BERGMAN, ANDREW L. We're In the Money: Depression America and Its Films. New York: New York University Press, 1971, 200 pp. (X.981/4225); New York: Harper and Row, 1972, 200 pp. (X.908/25122)
BILLINGSLEY, LLOYD. Hollywood Party: How Communism Seduced the AmericanFilm Industry in the 1930s and 1940s. Rocklin, Calif.: Forum, 1998. (DSC 99/17289)
BLUMER, HERBERT and PHILIP M. HAUSER. Movies, Delinquency and Crime. New York: Macmillan, 1933, 233 pp. (X.329/7538.(5.)
CAMPBELL, RUSSELL. Cinema Strikes Back: Radical Film Making in the UnitedStates, 1930-1942. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research Press, 1982, 387 pp. (X.950/18507)
CEPLAIR, LARRY and STEVEN ENGLUND. The Inquisition in Hollywood: Politicsin the Film Community, 1930-1960. Garden City, N.Y.: Anchor Press/Doubleday,1980, 536 pp. (X.800/32389); Berkeley and London: University of California Press,1983, 546 pp. (YC.1988.a.4436)
CORMACK, MICHAEL J. Ideology and Cinematographic Style in Hollywood, 1930-1939. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1994, 170 pp. (YC.1994.a.429)
DOHERTY, THOMAS P. Pre-Code Hollywood: Sex, Immorality and Insurrection inAmerican Cinema, 1930-1934. New York: Columbia University Press, 1999, 430 pp. (DSC 99/33455)
DOOLEY, ROGER. From Scarface to Scarlett: American Films in the 1930s. NewYork: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1981, 648 pp. (X.955/2272)
EYLES, ALLEN. That Was Hollywood: The 1930's. London: Batsford, 1987, 160 pp. (YC.1988.b.5048)
FAGEN, HERB. White Hats and Silver Spurs: Interviews with 24 Stars of Film andTelevision: Westerns of the Thirties through the Sixties. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1996, 245 pp. (YK.1997.b.3579)
130
FORMAN, HENRY J. Our Movie Made Children. New York: Macmillan, 1933,288 pp. (11796.bbb.1)
JACOBS, LEA. The Wages of Sin: Censorship and the Fallen Woman Film, 1928-1942. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1997, 202 pp. (YC.1997.a.3668)
JACOBS, LEWIS. The Rise of the American Film: A Critical History. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1939, 585 pp. (11797.g.21)
KELLEY, BEVERLY M., with JOHN J. PITNEY, CRAIG R. SMITH andHERBERT E. GOOCH III. Reelpolitik: Political Ideologies in '30s and '40s Films. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1998, 194 pp. (YC.1999.b.1138)
KOBAL, JOHN. Art of the Great Hollywood Portrait Photographers, 1925-1940. London: Allen and Lane, 1980, 291 pp. (DSC F81/0469)
LANGMAN, LARRY and DANIEL FINN. A Guide to American Crime Films of theThirties. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1995, 347 pp. (YC.1995.b.3213)
LOUDON, HUGH. My Hollywood: A Nostalgic Look at Films of the Thirties andForties. Upton-upon-Severn: Self Publishing Association, 1991, 236 pp. (YK.1992.b.1685)
MUELLER, JOHN. Astaire Dancing: The Musical Films. London: Hamish Hamilton,1986, 440 pp. (LB.31.b.2674)
MUSCIO, GIULIANA. Hollywood's New Deal. Philadelphia: Temple UniversityPress, 1996, 259 pp. (YC.1998.a.4848)
PAINE, JEFFERY M. The Simplification of American Life: Hollywood Films of the1930's. New York: Arno, 1977, 305 pp. (X.950/8745)
PREVOTS, NAIMA. Dancing in the Sun: Hollywood Choreographers, 1915-1937. AnnArbor, Mich.: UMI Research Press, 1987, 281 pp. (DSC 8814.3065)
RAMSAYE, TERRY, ed. International Motion Picture Almanac, 1938-39. New York: Quigley Pub. Co., 1938, 1250 pp. (PP.2523.lp); International Motion Picture Almanac,1939-40. New York: Quigley Pub. Co., 1939, 1192 pp. (PP.2523.lp)
RODDICK, NICK. A New Deal in Entertainment: Warner Brothers in the 1930s. London: British Film Institute, 1983, 332 pp. (X.429/15081)
ROFFMAN, PETER and JIM PURDY. The Hollywood Social Problem Film: Madness,Despair and Politics from the Depression to the Fifties. Bloomington: Indiana UniversityPress, 1981, 364 pp. (X.950/27408)
ROSTEN, LEO. Hollywood: The Movie Colony, the Movie Makers. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1941, 436 pp. (Mic.A.15574)
131
SCHWARTZ, NANCY L. The Hollywood Writers' Wars. New York: Knopf, 1982,333 pp. (X.622/20553)
SELDES, GILBERT V. Movies for the Millions: An Account of Motion Pictures,Principally in America. London: Batsford, 1937, 120 pp. (11796.bb.15)
SEVASTAKIS, MICHAEL. Songs of Love and Death: The Classical American HorrorFilm of the 1930s. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1993, 208 pp. (YC.1994.b.2066)
SHINDLER, COLIN. Hollywood in Crisis: Cinema and American Society, 1929-1939. London: Routledge, 1996, 258 pp. (YC.1996.b.5424)
SNYDER, ROBERT L. Pare Lorentz and the Documentary Film. Norman: Universityof Oklahoma Press, 1968, 232 pp. (X.981/1979)SOMMER, ROBIN L. Hollywood: The Glamour Years (1919-1941). London: BisonBooks, 1987, 192 pp. (YC.1988.b.5158)
TAYLOR, JOHN R. Strangers in Paradise: The Hollywood Emigrés, 1930-1950. London: Faber, 1983, 256 pp. (DSC 83/14422)
THORP, MARGARET F. America at the Movies. New Haven, Conn.: YaleUniversity Press, 1939, 313 pp. (11797.b.13); London: Faber & Faber, 1946, 184 pp. (11797.g.30)
TIERNEY, TOM. Thirty from the 30's. Englewood Cliffs, N.J., and London: Prentice-Hall, 1974, 70 pp. (L.45/2390)
VASEY, RUTH. The World According to Hollywood, 1918-1939. Madison: Universityof Wisconsin Press, 1997, 299 pp. (DSC 98/10954)
VERMILYE, JERRY. The Films of the Thirties. Secaucus, N.J.: Citadel Press, 1982,256 pp. (DSC 83/09335)
WEALES, GERALD. Canned Goods as Caviar: American Film Comedy of the 1930's. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1985, 386 pp. (YC.1986.b.1835)
WINOKUR, MARK. American Laughter: Immigrants, Ethnicity and 1930s: HollywoodFilm Comedy. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1995, 310 pp. (YC.1996.a.2667)
L. JOURNALISM AND MASS MEDIA
1. Miscellaneous Studies
ASHLEY, PERRY J., ed. American Newspaper Journalists, 1926-1950. Detroit, Mich.: Gale Research Co., 1984, 410 pp. (HLR 809)
132
BAUMAN, JOHN F. and THOMAS H. COODE. In the Eye of the Great Depression: New Deal Reporters and the Agony of the American People. De Kalb: Northern IllinoisUniversity Press, 1988, 230 pp. (DSC 89/10084)
BENT, SILAS. Newspaper Crusaders: A Neglected Story. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1939, 313 pp. (11865.c.11)
BEST, GARY D. The Critical Press and the New Deal: The Press versus PresidentialPower, 1933-1938. Westport, Conn.: Praeger, 1993, 198 pp. (DSC 93/10729)
BUHITE, RUSSELL D. and DAVID W. LEVY, eds. FDR's Fireside Chats. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1992, 326 pp. (YC.1993.b.6057)
CORTNER, RICHARD C. The Kingfish and the Constitution: Huey Long, the FirstAmendment and the Emergence of Modern Press Freedom in America. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Greenwood, 1996, 196 pp. (YC.1996.b.3578)
DESMOND, ROBERT W. Crisis and Conflict: World News Reporting between TwoWars, 1920-1940. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 1982, 518 pp. (2708.e.1416)
EDWARDS, JEROME E. The Foreign Policy of Colonel McCormick's Tribune, 1929-1941. Reno: University of Nevada Press, 1971, 232 pp. (X.981/4748)
FIELDING, RAYMOND. The March of Time, 1935-1951. New York: OxfordUniversity Press, 1978, 359 pp. (X.800/27469)
GERALD, JAMES E. The Press and the Constitution, 1931-1947. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1948, 173 pp. (11868.h.19)
HEALD, MORREL. Transatlantic Vistas: American Journalists in Europe, 1900-1940. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1988, 281 pp. (YH.1989.b.592)
HICKOK, LORENA. One Third of a Nation: Lorena Hickok Reports on the GreatDepression. Edited by Richard Lowitt and Maurine Beasley. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1981, 378 pp. (X.520/25678)
JACKAWAY, GWENYTH L. Media at War: Radio's Challenge to the Newspapers,1924-1939. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1995, 168 pp. (YC.1996.b.3959)
KNEEBONE, JOHN T. Southern Liberal Journalists and the Issue of Race, 1920-1944. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 312 pp. (DSC 86/06485)
LEAB, DANIEL J. A Union of Individuals: The Formation of the American NewspaperGuild, 1933-1956. New York and London: Columbia University Press, 1970, 362pp. (X.520/3752)
133
LEE, ALFRED M. The Daily Newspaper in America: The Evolution of a SocialInstrument. New York: Macmillan, 1937, 797 pp. (11840.g.38)
LIEBOVICH, LOUIS. Bylines in Despair: Herbert Hoover, the Great Depression and theU.S. News Media. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger, 1994, 223 pp. (YC.1994.b.6954)
LIPPMANN, WALTER. Interpretations, 1931-1932. Edited by Allan Nevins. London: Allen & Unwin, 1932, 361 pp. (W.P.11744); Interpretations, 1933-1935. Edited by Allan Nevins. New York: Macmillan, 1936, 399 pp. (W.P.11744)
LIPSTADT, DEBORAH E. Beyond Belief: The American Press and the Coming of theHolocaust, 1933-1945. New York: Free Press, 1986, 370 pp. (DSC 85/35303)PYLE, ERNIE. Ernie's America: The Best of Ernie Pyle's 1930's Travel Dispatches. Edited by David Nichols. New York: Random House, 1989, 423 pp. (YA.1994.b.8343)
ROOSEVELT, ELEANOR. The White House Press Conferences of Eleanor Roosevelt. Edited by Maurine Beasley. New York and London: Garland, 1983, 354 pp. (X.809/59952)
ROSS, ROBERT W. So It Was True: The American Protestant Press and the NaziPersecution of the Jews. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1980, 374 pp. (X.800/33555)
SELDES, GEORGE. Freedom of the Press. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1935, 380 pp. (11856.f.69)
SELDES, GEORGE. Lords of the Press. New York: Julian Messner, 1938, 408 pp.(11859.ff.12)
SMITH, ROBERT N. The Colonel: The Life and Legend of Robert R. McCormick,1880-1955. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1977, 597 pp. (DSC 98/20916)
STEELE, RICHARD W. Propaganda in an Open Society: The Roosevelt Administrationand the Media, 1933-1941. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1985, 231pp. (YC.1988.a.3654)
WALLACE, JAMES M. Liberal Journalism and American Education, 1914-1941. NewBrunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1991, 237 pp. (DSC 91/20678)
WHITE, GRAHAM. FDR and the Press. Chicago and London: University ofChicago Press, 1979, 186 pp. (X.809/44494)
WILLEY, MALCOLM M. and STUART A. RICE. Communication Agencies andSocial Life. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 229 pp. (X.800/1629.(1.))
134
WINFIELD, BETTY H. FDR and the News Media. Urbana: University of IllinoisPress, 1990, 276 pp. (YA.1993.b.6235); New York and Chichester: ColumbiaUniversity Press, 1994, 276 pp. (YC.1995.a.4833)
2. Radio [See also III.I.4. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Protest Movements: Coughlin,
Charles E.]
AITKEN, HUGH G. J. The Continuous Wave: Technology and American Radio, 1900-1932. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1985, 588 pp. (YK.1989.b.1422)
ARCHER, GLEASON L. Big Business and Radio. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1971,503 pp. (1551/346)
BROWN, ROBERT J. Manipulating the Ether: The Power of Broadcast Radio in ThirtiesAmerica. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1988, 310 pp. (DSC 98/14510)
BUXTON, FRANK and BILL OWEN. The Big Broadcast, 1920-1950. Rev. ed., New York: Viking, 1972, 301 pp. (X.629/20010); 2d ed., Lanham, Md., andLondon: Scarecrow, 1997, 294 pp. (YK.1997.b.1946)
CANTRIL, A. HADLEY and GORDON W. ALLPORT. The Psychology of Radio. New York and London: Harper, 1935, 276 pp. (08756.cc.40)
CANTRIL, HADLEY. The Invasion from Mars: A Study in the Psychology of Panic, withthe Complete Script of the Famous Orson Welles Broadcast. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1940, 228 pp. (20034.bb.8; X.529/53389); New York: Harper and Row, 1966, 224 pp. (X.529/7715)
CULBERT, DAVID H. News for Everyman: Radio and Foreign Affairs in ThirtiesAmerica. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 238 pp. (X.809/42065)
DELONG, THOMAS A. Radio Stars: An Illustrated Biographical Dictionary of 953Performers, 1920 through 1960. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1996, 306pp. (YK.1997.b.1089)
DUNNING, JOHN. Tune In Yesterday: The Ultimate Encyclopedia of Old-time Radio,1925-1976. Englewood Cliffs, N.J.: Prentice-Hall, 1976, 703 pp. (X.950/3557)
GURMAN, JOSEPH B. and MYRON SLAGER Radio Round-ups: Intimate Glimpsesof the Radio Stars. Boston: Lothrop, Lee & Shepard, 1932, 109 pp. (Mic.A.18975)
HOSLEY, DAVID H. As Good as Any: Foreign Correspondence on American Radio,1930-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1984, 165pp. (X.809/65044)
MACDONALD, J. FRED. Don't Touch That Dial! Radio Programming in AmericanLife, 1920-1960. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1980, 412 pp. (X.529/43813)
135
ROSEN, PHILIP T. The Modern Stentors: Radio Broadcasters and the FederalGovernment, 1920-1934. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1980, 267 pp. (X.529/41645)
SCHWOCH, JAMES. The American Radio Industry and Its Latin American Activities,1900-1939. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1990, 184 pp. (YA.1993.b.4521)
SMULYAN, SUSAN. Selling Radio: The Commercialization of American Broadcasting,1920-1934. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1994,223 pp. (YC.1994.b.4760)TYSON, LEVERING and JOSEPHINE MACLATCHY, eds. Education on the Air,and Radio and Education, 1935: Proceedings of the Sixth Annual Institute for Education byRadio, combined with the Fifth Annual Assembly of the National Advisory Council on Radioin Education. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1935, 316 pp. (Ac.2685.gbc)
M. LEISURE, RECREATION AND SPORTS
1. Miscellaneous Studies
BAUMER, WILLIAM H. Sports as Taught and Played at West Point. Harrisburg, Pa.: Military Service Pub. Co., 1941, 351 pp. (X.620/8461)
BUTLER, GEORGE D. Introduction to Community Recreation. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1940, 547 pp. (8289.dd.1)
CRESSEY, PAUL G. The Taxi-Dance Hall: A Sociological Study in CommercializedRecreation and City Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 300 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(14.))
HAMBRIDGE, GOVE. Time to Live: Adventures in the Use of Leisure. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 144 pp. (08408.eee.62)
KELLEY, BRENT. The Early All-Stars: Conversations with Standout Baseball Players ofthe 1930s and 1940s. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1997, 199 pp. (YK.1997.a.2997)
KELLEY, BRENT. Voices from the Negro Leagues: Conversations with 52 BaseballStandouts of the Period 1924-1960. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1998,334 pp. (YC.1998.b.647)
LUNDBERG, GEORGE A., MIRRA KOMAROVSKY and MARY A.MCINERNY. Leisure: A Suburban Study. New York: Columbia University Press,1934, 396 pp. (08285.i.20)
NEUMEYER, MARTIN H. and ESTHER S. NEUMEYER. Leisure and Recreation: A Study of Leisure and Recreation in their Sociological Aspects. New York: Barnes, 1936,405 pp. (8287.b.35)
136
STEINER, JESSE F. Americans at Play: Recent Trends in Recreation and Leisure TimeActivities. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 201 pp. (X.800/1629.(7.))
WEAVER, ROBERT B. Amusements and Sports in American Life. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 195 pp. (7913.tt.12)
2. Olympics
BAKER, WILLIAM J. Jesse Owens: An American Life. New York: Free Press;London: Collier Macmillan, 1986, 289 pp. (YK.1987.b.2061)
GUTTMANN, ALLEN. The Games Must Go On: Avery Brundage and the OlympicMovement. New York and Guildford: Columbia University Press, 1984, 317 pp. (X.622/20491)
HART-DAVIS, DUFF. Hitler's Games: The 1936 Olympics. London: Century,1986, 256 pp. (YC.1986.a.1658); Sevenoaks: Coronet, 1988, 256 pp. (YC.1988.a.9545)
MANDELL, RICHARD D. The Nazi Olympics. London: Souvenir Press, 1972, 316pp. (X.629/4437)
ORGANIZING COMMITTEE, GAMES OF THE XTH OLYMPIAD. OlympicGames: Official Pictorial Souvenir. Los Angeles, Calif.: Organizing Committee, XthOlympiad, 1932, 64 pp. (7912.k.34)
OLYMPIC GAMES. Olympic Games 1936: Official Organ of the XI. Olympic GamesBerlin 1936, no. 15, 88 pp. (Cup.1264.hh.33)
PIEROTH, DORIS H. Their Day in the Sun: Women of the 1932 Olympics. Seattleand London: University of Washington Press, 1996, 186 pp. (DSC 97/03288)
RUBIEN, FREDERICK W., ed. Report of the American Olympic Committee: Games ofthe XIth Olympiad, Berlin, Germany, August 1 to 16, 1936; IVth Olympic Winter Games,Garmisch-Partenkirchen, Germany, February 6 to 16, 1936. New York: AmericanOlympic Committee, 1937, 491 pp. (7913.w.9)
N. LIBRARIES
CASE, HARRY L. Municipal Libraries in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1937,89 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
GLEASON, ELIZA A. The Southern Negro and the Public Library: A Study of theGovernment and Administration of Public Library Service to Negroes in the South. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 218 pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(23.))
RADFORD, NEIL A. The Carnegie Corporation and the Development of American CollegeLibraries, 1928-1941. Chicago: American Library Association, 1984, 257 pp. (2719.x.5617)
137
RING, DANIEL F., ed. Studies in Creative Partnership: Federal Aid to Public Librariesduring the New Deal. Metuchen, N.J.: Scarecrow, 1980, 145 pp. (2719.x.3155)
STANFORD, EDWARD B. Library Extension under the WPA: An Appraisal of anExperiment in Federal Aid. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1944, 284 pp. (YA.1996.b.4586) WAPLES, DOUGLAS and LEON CARNOVSKY. Libraries and Readers in the State ofNew York: The State's Administration of Public and School Libraries with Reference to theEducational Values of Library Services. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 160pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(13.))
WAPLES, DOUGLAS. People and Print: Social Aspects of Reading in the Depression. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937, 228 pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(7.);2719.x.12348); Research Memorandum on Social Aspects of Reading in the Depression. NewYork: Social Science Research Council, 1937, 228 pp. (Mic.A.8935)
O. LITERARY CRITICISM, COLLECTIONS AND MEMOIRS
ADAMIC, LOUIS. My America: 1928-1938. London: Hamish Hamilton, 1939, 669pp. (010410.l.30)
BEACH, JOSEPH W. American Fiction, 1920-1940. New York: Macmillan, 1942,371 pp. (11865.ff.15)
BOGARDUS, RALPH F. and FRED HOBSON, eds. Literature at the Barricades: TheAmerican Writer in the 1930's. University: University of Alabama Press, 1982, 235 pp. (DSC 82/23572)
CONKIN, PAUL K. The Southern Agrarians. Knoxville: University of TennesseePress, 1988, 196 pp. (YA.1990.a.16233)
COWAN, LOUISE. The Fugitive Group: A Literary History. Baton Rouge: LouisianaState University Press, 1959, 277 pp. (X.900/635)
COWLEY, MALCOLM. The Dream of the Golden Mountains: Remembering the 1930s. New York: Viking, 1980, 328 pp. (X.529/46479)
COWLEY, MALCOLM. Think Back on Us: A Contemporary Chronicle of the 1930's. Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press; London andAmsterdam: Feffer & Simons, 1967, 400 pp. (X.809/10592)
DEANE, PATRICK, ed. History in Our Hands: A Critical Anthology of Writings onLiterature, Culture and Politics from the 1930s. London: Leicester University Press, 1998,406 pp. (YC.1998.b.4858)
FILLER, LOUIS, ed. The Anxious Years: America in the Nineteen Thirties: A Collectionof Contemporary Writings. New York: Putnam's, 1963, 375 pp. (X.809/2174)
138
FOLEY, BARBARA. Radical Representations: Politics and Form in U.S. ProletarianFiction, 1929-1941. Durham and London: Duke University Press, 1993, 459 pp. (YC.1994.a.2371)
FORD, NICK A. The Contemporary Negro Novel: A Study in Race Relations. Boston: Meador Pub. Co., 1936, 108 pp. (11860.aa.13)
GINZBERG, ELI. New Deal Days, 1933-1934. New Brunswick, N.J., and London: Transaction Pub., 1997, 109 pp. (DSC 97/24179)
GURKO, LEO. The Angry Decade: An Account of American Literature in the Light ofSocial Conditions, 1930-40. New York: Dodd, Mead, 1947, 306 pp. (11868.f.27)
HAPKE, LAURA. Daughters of the Great Depression: Woman, Work and Fiction in theAmerican 1930s. Athens and London: University of Georgia Press, 1995, 286 pp. (YC.1996.b.2784)
JOSEPHSON, MATTHEW. Infidel in the Temple: A Memoir of the Nineteen-thirties. New York: Knopf, 1967, 513 pp. (X.800/5695)
KAZIN, ALFRED. On Native Grounds: An Interpretation of Modern American ProseLiterature. New York: Reynal & Hitchcock, 1942, 541 pp. (11865.g.19;X989/77273)
KAZIN, ALFRED. Starting Out in the Thirties. London: Secker & Warburg, 1966,166 pp. (X.809/2207)
KAZIN, ALFRED. A Walker in the City. London: Gollancz, 1952, 159 pp. (10890.aaa.43)
LEITCH, VINCENT B. American Literary Criticism from the Thirties to the Eighties. New York: Columbia University Press, 1988, 458 pp. (DSC 88/06002)
LUCCOCK, HALFORD E. American Mirror: Social, Ethical and Religious Aspects ofAmerican Literature, 1930-1940. New York: Macmillan, 1940, 300 pp. (11865.b.24)
MADDEN, DAVID, ed. Proletarian Writers of the Thirties. Carbondale andEdwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press, 1968, 278 pp. (11880.b.4/78)
MADDEN, DAVID, ed. Tough Guy Writers of the Thirties. Carbondale andEdwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press, 1977, 247 pp. (X.950/11244)
RABINOWITZ, PAULA. Labor and Desire: Women's Revolutionary Fiction inDepression America. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1991, 222 pp. (DSC 92/02972)
RAUB, PATRICIA. Yesterday's Stories: Popular Women's Novels of the Twenties andThirties. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1994, 131 pp. (YC.1995.b.2537)
139
REYNOLDS, MICHAEL S. Hemingway: The 1930s. New York and London: Norton, 1997, 360 pp. (DSC 98/06575)SLIDE, ANTHONY, ed. They Also Wrote for the Fan Magazines: Film Articles byLiterary Giants from E. E. Cummings to Eleanor Roosevelt, 1920-1939. Jefferson, N.C.,and London: McFarland, 1992, 149 pp. (YC.1993.a.725)
STEWART, JOHN L. The Burden of Time: The Fugitives and Agrarians: The NashvilleGroups of the 1920's and 1930's and the Writing of John Crowe Ransom, Allen Tate andRobert Penn Warren. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1965, 551 pp. (X.900/1198)
TASHJIAN, DICKRAN. William Carlos Williams and the American Scene, 1920-1940;Whitney Museum of Art, December 12, 1978-February 4, 1979. Berkeley and London: University of California Press for the Whitney Museum of American Art, 1978, 168pp. (X.423/10932)
WELLS, WALTER. Tycoons and Locusts: A Regional Look at Hollywood Fiction of the1930s. Carbondale and Edwardsville: Southern Illinois University Press; London andAmsterdam: Feffer & Simons, 1973, 139 pp. (X.989/25222)
WILSON, EDMUND. The American Earthquake: A Documentary of the Twenties andThirties. London: W. H. Allen, 1958, 576 pp. (010409.ff.58)
WILSON, EDMUND. The Shores of Light: A Literary Chronicle of the Twenties andThirties. London: W. H. Allen, 1952, 814 pp. (11869.aa.21)
WILSON, EDMUND. The Thirties: From Notebooks and Diaries of the Period. Editedby Leon Edel. London: Macmillan, 1980, 753 pp. (X.808/33396)
YOUNG, JAMES O. Black Writers of the Thirties. Baton Rouge: Louisiana StateUniversity Press, 1973, 257 pp. (X.981/11428)
P. MEDICINE AND HEALTH
BACHE, LOUISE F. Health Education in an American City: An Account of a Five-yearProgram in Syracuse, New York. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1934, 116 pp. (7383.e.20)
BEST, HARRY. Blindness and the Blind in the United States. New York: Macmillan,1934, 714 pp. (20017.d.28)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. Vocational Rehabilitation of the Physically Disabled. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 9, 1938, 101 pp. (A.S.988)
BROMBERG, WALTER. Psychiatry between the Wars, 1918-1945: A Recollection. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1982, 184 pp. (X.329/17030)
140
COLLINS, SELWYN D. and CLARK TIBBITS. Research Memorandum on SocialAspects of Health in the Depression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 192 pp. (X.529/62779)COMMITTEE ON THE COSTS OF MEDICAL CARE. Medical Care for theAmerican People: The Final Report of the Committee on the Costs of Medical Care, AdoptedOctober 31, 1932. Chicago: Committee on the Costs of Medical Care, 1932, 213 pp. (7383.p.1/28)
FALK, I. S. Security Against Sickness: A Study of Health Insurance. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1936, 423 pp. (8234.cc.10)
FALK, I. S., C. RUFUS ROREM and MARTHA D. KING. The Costs of MedicalCare: A Summary of Investigations on the Economic Aspects of the Prevention and Care ofIllness. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1933, 623 pp. (7383.1/27)
GREY, MICHAEL R. New Deal Medicine: The Rural Health Programs of the FarmSecurity Administration. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1999, 238 pp. (DSC 99/19733)
GROB, GERALD N. Mental Illness and American Society, 1875-1940. Princeton,N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1983, 428 pp. (X.322/13125)
HARDEN, VICTORIA A. Inventing the NIH: Federal Biomedical Research Policy,1887-1937. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986, 274pp. (YK.1987.b.4404)
HARVEY, A. MCGEHEE. Science at the Bedside: Clinical Research in AmericanMedicine, 1905-1945. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1981, 554 pp. (X.322/10489)
HIRSHFIELD, DANIEL S. The Lost Reform: The Campaign for Compulsory HealthInsurance in the United States from 1932 to 1943. Cambridge, Mass.: HarvardUniversity Press, 1970, 221 pp. (X.320/2612)
JACKSON, CHARLES O. Food and Drug Legislation in the New Deal. Princeton,N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1970, 249 pp. (X.200/3805)
JONES, JAMES H. Bad Blood: The Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment. New York: FreePress; London: Collier Macmillan, 1981, 272 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234); New York: Free Press; London: Collier Macmillan International, 1993, 297 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234)
KINGSBURY, JOHN A. Health in Handcuffs. New York: Modern Age Books,1939, 210 pp. (7382.p.33)
LEVEN, MAURICE. The Incomes of Physicians: An Economic and Statistical Analysis. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1932, 135 pp. (7383.p.1/24)
141
MUSTARD, HARRY S. Rural Health Insurance. New York: Commonwealth Fund,1936, 601 pp. (7391.r.10)
REED, LOUIS S. The Ability to Pay for Medical Care. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1933, 107 pp. (7383.p.1/25)
RORTY, JAMES. American Medicine Mobilizes. New York: Norton, 1939, 358 pp. (Mic.A.12235)
SYDENSTRICKER, EDGAR. Health and Environment. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 217 pp. (X.800/1629.(9.))
WEISKOTTEN, HERMAN G., et al. Medical Education in the United States, 1934-1939. Chicago: American Medical Association, 1940, 259 pp. (7680.dd.27)
WILLEFORD, MARY BRISTOW. Income and Health in Remote Rural Areas: AStudy of 400 Families in Leslie County, Kentucky. New York: Columbia University,1932, 88 pp. (08285.h.27)
WINTERS, JET C. A Report on the Health and Nutrition of Mexicans Living in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1931, 99 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
Q. MUSIC
ARMSTRONG, LOUIS. Swing That Music. London: Longmans, Green, 1937, 144pp. (7900.d.27)
BARLOW, WILLIAM and CHERYL FINLEY. From Swing to Soul: An IllustratedHistory of African American Popular Music from 1930 to 1960. Washington, D.C.: Elliott& Clark, 1994, 132 pp. (LB.31.b.10728)
BINDAS, KENNETH J. All of This Music Belongs to the Nation: The WPA's FederalMusic Project and American Society. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1995, 164pp. (YA.1997.b.2549)
BOURGEOIS, ANNA S. Blueswomen: Profiles of 37 Early Performers, with anAnthology of Lyrics, 1920-1945. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1996, 176pp. (YC.1996.a.4060)
CASSIDY, DONNA. Painting the Musical City: Jazz and Cultural Identity in AmericanArt, 1910-1940. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press,1997, 200 pp. (YC.1997.b.5971)
COPLAND, AARON. Our New Music: Leading Composers in Europe and America. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1941, 305 pp. (7891.bb.5); New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1947, 305 pp. (7900.b.3)
CROWTHER, BRUCE and MIKE PINFOLD. The Big Band Years. NewtonAbbot: David & Charles, 1988, 208 pp. (YM.1988.b.562)
142
CUNEY-HARE, MAUD. Negro Musicians and Their Music. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1936, 439 pp. (07899.df.71) DENISOFF, R. SERGE. Great Day Coming: Folk Music and the American Left. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1971, 219 pp. (X.431/1240)
DEVEAUX, SCOTT. The Birth of Bebop: A Social and Musical History. Berkeley,Calif., and London: University of California Press, 1997, 572 pp. (YC.1998.b.179)
DRIGGS, FRANK and HARRIS LEWINE. Black Beauty, White Heat: A PictorialHistory of Classic Jazz, 1920-1950. New York: Da Capo, 1995, 360 pp. (YA.1998.b.6572)
ERENBERG, LEWIS A. Swingin' the Dream: Big Band Jazz and the Rebirth ofAmerican Culture. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1998, 320 pp.(YC.1998.b.2831)
FORTE, ALLEN. The American Popular Ballad of the Golden Era, 1924-1950. Princeton, N.J., and Chichester: Princeton University Press, 1995, 366 pp. (YC.1996.b.6335)
LIEBERMAN, ROBBIE. My Song Is My Weapon: People's Songs, AmericanCommunism and the Politics of Culture, 1930-1950. Urbana: University of Illinois Press,1989, 201 pp. (YA.1994.b.3000)
LYTTELTON, HUMPHREY. Enter the Giants. London: Robson, 1981, 239 pp. (X.439/11668); London: Urwin, 1984, 239 pp. (X.439/13095)
MANCUSO, CHUCK. Popular Music and the Underground: Foundations of Jazz, Blues,Country and Rock, 1900-1950. Dubuque: Kendall/Hunt Pub. Co., 1996, 626 pp. (YA.1997.b.6158)
MASON, DANIEL G. Tune In, America: A Study of Our Coming Musical Independence. New York: Knopf, 1931, 205 pp. (7899.ppp.21)
RIJN, GUIDO VAN. Roosevelt's Blues: African-American Blues and Gospel Songs onFDR. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1997, 292 pp. (YC.1999.b.1651)
SCANLAN, TOM. The Joy of Jazz: Swing Era, 1935-1947. Golden, Colo.: Fulcrum Pub., 1996, 148 pp. (YA.1997.a.15769)
SCHULLER, GUNTHER. The Swing Era: The Development of Jazz, 1930-1945. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989, 919 pp. (YC.1993.b.1788;YM.1990.b.107)
SCHWARTZ, CHARLES. Cole Porter: A Biography. London: W. H. Allen, 1978,365 pp. (X.431/10493)
143
SCHWARTZ, CHARLES. Gershwin: His Life and Music. New York: Da Capo,1979, 427 pp. (X.439/11615)
SHAW, ARNOLD. Let's Dance: Popular Music in the 1930s. Edited by Bill Willard. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998, 241 pp. (HUS.789.300973)
SIMON, GEORGE T. The Big Bands. Rev. ed., New York: Macmillan; London: Collier Macmillan, 1974, 584 pp. (X.431/2139); 4th ed., New York: Shirmer;London: Collier Macmillan, 1981, 614 pp. (X.439/11888; X.439/11889)
STEWART, REX. Jazz Masters of the Thirties. New York: Da Capo, 1985, 223 pp. (YM.1987.a.192)
STOWE, DAVID W. Swing Changes: Big-Band Jazz in New Deal America. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1994, 299 pp. (YC.1994.b.7150)
TAWA, NICHOLAS E. Serenading the Reluctant Eagle: American Musical Life, 1925-1945. New York: Schirmer Books, 1984, 261 pp. (YM.1989.b.577)
ZANZIG, AUGUSTUS D. Music in American Life, Present and Future. London: Oxford University Press, 1932, 560 pp. (7895.t.23)
R. PHOTOGRAPHY
ABBOTT, BERENICE. Berenice Abbott: The 20's and the 30's: A Traveling Exhibit. Washington, D.C.: published for the National Museum of American Art bySmithsonian Institution Press, 1982, 22 pp. (X.421/25592)
ABBOTT, BERENICE. Documentary Photographs of the 1930s: An Exhibition. Cleveland, Ohio: New Gallery of Contemporary Art, 1980, 64 pp. (DSC 81/11506)
AGEE, JAMES R. and WALKER EVANS. Let Us Now Praise Famous Men. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1960, 471 pp. (10153.ff.26); London: Peter Owen, 1965, 471 pp. (X.800/789); London: Panther Books, 1969, 428 pp. (X.808/6149)
ALSBERG, HENRY G., ed. America Fights the Depression: A Photographic Record of theCivil Works Administration. New York: Coward-McCann, 1934, 160 pp. (Mic.A.12253)
AMERICAN PHOTOGRAPHERS OF THE DEPRESSION: FARM SECURITYADMINISTRATION PHOTOGRAPHS, 1935-1942. London: Thames andHudson, 1991, 91 pp. (YC.1991.a.4326)
ANDERSON, SHERWOOD. Home Town. . . Photographs by Farm SecurityPhotographers. New York: Alliance Book Corp., 1940, 145 pp. (10107.i.41)
BLACK, PATTI CARR, ed. Documentary Portrait of Mississippi: The Thirties. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1982, 128 pp. (X.809/57759)
144
BÖGER, ASTRID. Documenting Lives: James Agee's and Walker Evans's Let Us NowPraise Famous Men. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 1994, 173 pp. (YA.1996.a.3704)
CALDWELL, ERSKINE and MARGARET BOURKE-WHITE. You Have SeenTheir Faces. New York: Viking, 1937, 190 pp. (X.802/218); Athens and London: University of Georgia Press, 1995, 190 pp. (YK.1995.b.14919)
CARLEBACH, MICHAEL L. and EUGENE F. PROVENZO, JR. Farm SecurityAdministration Photographs of Florida. Gainesville: University Press of Florida, 1993,127 pp. (YK.1996.b.1718)
COOKMAN, CLAUDE. The People's America: Farm Security AdministrationPhotographs, 1935-1943, Selections from the Henry Holmes Smith Archive. Bloomington,Ind.: Indiana University Art Museum, 1997, 32 pp. (YA.1998.a.1150)
CURTIS, JAMES C. Mind's Eye, Mind's Truth: FSA Photography Reconsidered. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1989, 139 pp. (DSC q90/04579)
DANIEL, PETE, et al. Official Images: New Deal Photography. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1987, 196 pp. (DSC 89/02039)
DIXON, PENELOPE. Photographers of the Farm Security Administration: An AnnotatedBibliography, 1930-1980. New York: Garland, 1983, 265 pp. (DSC 4072.28 vol373)
EVANS, WALKER. American Photographs. New York: Museum of Modern Art,1938, 198 pp. (Mic.A.9994); 50th anniversary ed., New York: Museum of ModernArt, 1988, 205 pp. (DSC 89/07646)
EVANS, WALKER. Walker Evans. New York: Museum of Modern Art, 1971, 189pp. (X.421/24859); New York: Museum of Modern Art; London: Secker andWarburg, 1972, 191 pp. (X.421/4332)
EVANS, WALKER. Walker Evans, America. Edited by Michael Brix and BirgitMayer. New York: Rizzoli, 1991, 160 pp. (DSC q91/23471)
EVANS, WALKER. Walker Evans at Work: 745 Photographs together with Documentsselected from Letters, Memoranda, Interviews, Notes. New York and London: Harper andRow, 1982, 239 pp. (X.421/24063); London: Thames and Hudson, 1983, 244 pp. (X.421/24304)
EVANS, WALKER. Walker Evans: Photographs for the Farm Security Administration,1935-1938: A Catalog of Photographic Prints Available from the Farm SecurityAdministration Collection in the Library of Congress. New York: Da Capo, 1975, 244 pp. (X.410/10238)
145
FLEISCHHAUER, CARL and BEVERLY W. BRANNAN, eds. DocumentingAmerica, 1935-1943. Berkeley: University of California Press in association with theLibrary of Congress, 1988, 361 pp. (YA.1992.b.2623)
GUTMANN, JOHN. The Restless Decade: John Gutmann's Photographs of the Thirties. Edited by Lew Thomas. New York: Abrams, 1984, 154 pp. (DSC 84/17206)
HORAN, JAMES D. The Desperate Years: A Pictorial History of the Thirties. NewYork: Bonanza Books, 1962, 288 pp. (X.702/252)
HURLEY, F. JACK. Portrait of a Decade: Roy Stryker and the Development ofDocumentary Photography in the Thirties. New York: Da Capo, 1977, 196 pp. (X.415/5326)
JOHNSON, BROOKS. Mountaineers to Main Street: The Old Dominion As SeenThrough Farm Security Administration Photographs. Norfolk, Va.: Chrysler Museum,1985, 165 pp. (DSC 85/23058)
KEARNS, JERRY and LEROY BELLAMY, comps. The Years of Bitterness and Pride: Farm Security Administration, FSA Photographs, 1935-1943. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1975, 85 pp. (Cup.1281/434)
KOBAL, JOHN. Art of the Great Hollywood Portrait Photographers, 1925-1940. London: Allen and Lane, 1980, 291 pp. (DSC F81/0469)
LANGE, DOROTHEA. Dorothea Lange: Photographs of a Lifetime. Millerton, N.Y.: Aperture, 1982, 183 pp. (L.42/2063)
LANGE, DOROTHEA and PAUL S. TAYLOR. An American Exodus: A Record ofHuman Erosion in the Thirties. New Haven, Conn., and London: published for theOakland Museum by Yale University Press, 1969, 145 pp. (Cup.24.e.40)
MACLEISH, ARCHIBALD. Land of the Free. London: Boriswood, 1938, 93 pp. (010410.b.8); New York: Da Capo, 1977, 93 pp. (X.419/34833)
MELTZER, MILTON. Dorothea Lange: A Photographer's Life. New York: Farrar,Straus, Giroux, 1978, 399 pp. (X.421/11179)
MYDANS, CARL, THEODOR JUNG, JOHN VACHON, ARTHURROTHSTEIN, BEN SHAHN, RUSSELL LEE, and MARION POST WOLCOTT. Ohio: A Photographic Portrait, 1935-1941: Farm Security Administration Photographs. Akron, Ohio: Akron Art Institute, 1980, 96 pp. (L.49/3209)
NATANSON, NICHOLAS. The Black Image in the New Deal: The Politics of FSAPhotography. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1992, 305 pp. (YA.1994.b.5958)
OHRN, KARIN B. Dorothea Lange and the Documentary Tradition. Baton Rouge andLondon: Louisiana State University Press, 1980, 277 pp. (X.421/20942)
146
O'NEAL, HANK. Berenice Abbott: American Photographer. New York: McGraw-Hill,1982, 255 pp. (LB.31.c.2003)
O'NEAL, HANK, ed. A Vision Shared: A Classic Portrait of America and Its People,1935-1943. New York: St. Martin's Press, 1976, 309 pp. (L.R.425/197)
PARTRIDGE, ELIZABETH, ed. Dorothea Lange: A Visual Life. Washington, D.C.,and London: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1994, 168 pp. (YC.1996.b.354)
PUCKETT, JOHN R. Five Photo-documentaries from the Great Depression. Ann Arbor,Mich.: UMI Research, 1984, 169 pp. (X.421/27164)
REID, ROBERT L., ed. Back Home Again: Indiana in the Farm Security AdministrationPhotographs, 1935-1943. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987, 144 pp. (LB.31.a.2321)
REID, ROBERT L. Picturing Texas: The FSA-OWI Photographers in the Lone StarState, 1936-1943. Austin, Tex.: Texas State Historical Association, 1994, 208 pp. (LB.37.b.581)
ROGERS, AGNES and FREDERICK LEWIS ALLEN. Metropolis: An AmericanCity in Photographs. New York and London: Harper, 1934, 217 pp. (10410.y.12)
ROSENHEIM, JEFF. Walker Evans and Jane Ninas in New Orleans, 1935-1936. NewOrleans, La.: Historic New Orleans Collection, 1991, 24 pp. (DSC q94/24657)
ROTHSTEIN, ARTHUR. The American West in the Thirties: 122 Photographs. NewYork: Dover; London: Constable, 1981, 121 pp. (L.42/1431)
ROTHSTEIN, ARTHUR. Arthur Rothstein's America in Photographs, 1930-1980. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1984, 89 pp. (LB.31.b.425)
ROTHSTEIN, ARTHUR. The Depression Years as Photographed by Arthur Rothstein. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1978, 119 pp. (X.415/5569)
SAROYAN, WILLIAM and ARTHUR ROTHSTEIN. Look at Us. New York: Cowles Education Corp., 1967, 202 pp. (X.800/4919)
SHAHN, BEN. The Photographic Eye of Ben Shahn. Edited by Davis Pratt. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1975, 147 pp. (Cup.1281/194)
STOTT, WILLIAM. Documentary Expression and Thirties America. London: OxfordUniversity Press, 1976, 361 pp. (X.908/40816); New York: Oxford University Press,1973, 361 pp. (X.800/9111)
147
STRYKER, ROY E. and NANCY WOOD, comps. In This Proud Land: America,1935-1943, as seen in the F.S.A. Photographs. London: Secker and Warburg, 1974,191 pp. (X.805/290)
WEIGLE, MARTA, ed. New Mexicans in Cameo and Camera: New Deal Documentationof Twentieth-Century Lives. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1985, 228pp. (YA.1988.b.6357)
WEIGLE, MARTA, ed. Women of New Mexico: Depression Era Images. Santa Fe,N.M.: Ancient City Press, 1993, 129 pp. (YA.1995.b.4972)
WELTY, EUDORA. One Time, One Place: Mississippi in the Depression: A SnapshotAlbum. New York: Random House, 1971, 111 pp. (X.809/18330)
WILLIS, DEBORAH and JANE LUSAKA, eds. Visual Journal: Harlem and D.C. inthe Thirties and Forties. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press,1996, 208 pp. (LB.31.b.14108)
WOLCOTT, MARION P. Marion Post Wolcott: FSA Photographs. Carmel, Calif.: Friends of Photography, 1983, 48 pp. (DSC 9121.3274 no 34)
YOCHELSON, BONNIE. Berenice Abbott at Work: The Making of Changing NewYork. New York: New Press and Museum of the City of New York, 1997, 339 pp. (DSC f99/1243)
S. RELIGION [See also III.I.4. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Movements: Coughlin, Charles E.;
V.K.4. Social History: Racial and Ethnic Groups: Jews]
CARTER, PAUL A. The Decline and Revival of the Social Gospel: Social and PoliticalLiberalism in American Protestant Churches, 1920-1940. Ithaca, N.Y.: CornellUniversity Press, 1956, 265 pp. (4745.1.14)
DESAULNIERS, LAWRENCE B. The Response in American Catholic Periodicals to theCrises of the Great Depression, 1930-1935. Lanham, Md., and London: UniversityPress of American, 1984, 187 pp. (X.950/37174)
DOUGLASS, H. PAUL and EDMUND DE S. BRUNNER. The Protestant Church asa Social Institution. New York and London: New York Institute of Social andReligious Research, 1935, 368 pp. (4183.e.63)
HALSEY, WILLIAM M. The Survival of American Innocence: Catholicism in an Era ofDisillusionment, 1920-1940. Notre Dame, Ind., and London: University of NotreDame Press, 1980, 230 pp. (X.981/22426)
JOHNSON, FREDERICK E. The Social Gospel Re-examined. New York andLondon: Harper, 1940, 261 pp. (04373.df.55); London: J. Clarke, 1942, 261 pp. (4381.aaa.8)
148
KINCHELOE, SAMUEL C. Research Memorandum on Religion in the Depression. Reprint, New York: Arno, 1972, 158 pp. (X.200/43785)
FLYNN, GEORGE Q. American Catholics and the Roosevelt Presidency, 1932-1936. Lexington: University of Kentucky Press, 1968, 272 pp. (X.200/4204)
FLYNN, GEORGE Q. Roosevelt and Romanism: Catholics and American Diplomacy,1937-1945. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 268 pp. (X.809/42032)
KANAWADA, LEO V. Franklin D. Roosevelt's Diplomacy and American Catholics,Italians and Jews. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research; Epping: Bowker, 1982, 184 pp. (X.800/35588)
MEYER, DONALD B. The Protestant Search for Political Realism, 1919-1941. Berkeleyand Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1960, 482 pp. (4633.i.41)
NAWYN, WILLIAM E. American Protestantism's Response to Germany's Jews andRefugees, 1933-1941. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research, 1981, 330 pp. (X.200/37416)
O'BRIEN, DAVID J. American Catholics and Social Reform: The New Deal Years. NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1968, 287 pp. (X.100/7489)
RIBUFFO, LEO P. The Old Christian Right: The Protestant Far Right from the GreatDepression to the Cold War. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1983, 369 pp. (YA.1987.b.2587)
ROSS, ROBERT W. So It Was True: The American Protestant Press and the NaziPersecution of the Jews. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1980, 374 pp. (X.800/33555)
SEATON, DOUGLAS P. Catholics and Radicals: The Association of Catholic TradeUnionists and the American Labor Movement, from Depression to Cold War. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press, 1981, 269 pp. (DSC 81/19791)
SWIFT, ARTHUR L. Religion Today: A Challenging Enigma. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 300 pp. (4370.eee.13)
WATTS, JILL. God, Harlem U.S.A.: The Father Divine Story. Berkeley and Oxford: University of California Press, 1992, 249 pp. (YC.1992.b.5653; YC.1995.a.2958)
WEISBROT, ROBERT. Father Divine and the Struggle for Racial Equality. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1983, 241 pp. (DSC 83/17080)
T. SCIENCE
149
HEWLETT, RICHARD G. and OSCAR E. ANDERSON. A History of the UnitedStates Atomic Energy Commission. Vol. 1, The New World, 1939-1946. University Park: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1962, 766 pp. (X.0611/118)
KUZNICK, PETER J. Beyond the Laboratory: Scientists as Political Activists in 1930sAmerica. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1987, 363 pp. (YK.1988.b.3806)
LEDERER, SUSAN E. Subjected to Science: Human Experimentation in America beforethe Second World War. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1995, 192 pp. (YC.1995.b.3191)
PANDORA, KATHERINE. Rebels within the Ranks: Psychologists' Critique of ScientificAuthority and Democratic Realities in New Deal America. Cambridge: CambridgeUniversity Press, 1997, 260 pp. (YC.1998.b.1269)
REINGOLD, NATHAN and IDA H. REINGOLD, eds.. Science in America: ADocumentary History, 1900-1939. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press,1981, 490 pp. (X.622/12509)
ROBEY, RONALD C. The America Ideology of National Science, 1919-1930. Pittsburgh, Pa.: University of Pittsburgh Press, 1971, 263 pp. (X.620/2447)
WENDT, GERALD. Science for the World of Tomorrow. New York: Norton, 1939,316 pp. (8713.aa.6)
U. TECHNOLOGY AND TECHNOCRACY
AKIN, WILLIAM E. Technocracy and the American Dream: The Technocrat Movement,1900-1941. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1977, 227 pp. (X.529/31616)
BENT, SILAS. Slaves by the Billion: The Story of Mechanical Progress in the Home. NewYork and Toronto: Longmans, 1938, 244 pp. (8288.e.11)
MUMFORD, LEWIS. Technics and Civilization. London: Routledge, 1934, 495 pp. (8286.c.28)
RAYMOND, ALLEN. What Is Technocracy?. New York and London: McGraw-Hill, 1933, 180 pp. (8277.s.16)
ROSEN, S. MCKEE and LAURA ROSEN. Technology and Society: The Influence ofMachines in the United States. New York: Macmillan, 1941, 474 pp. (8288.ee.62)
SCOTT, HOWARD. Introduction to Technocracy. New York: John Day, 1933, 61pp. (20016.f.21; 08206.ee.21)
SZOSTAK, RICK. Technological Innovation and the Great Depression. Boulder, Colo.,and Oxford: Westview, 1995, 367 pp. (DSC 95/34382)
150
TOBEY, RONALD C. Technology as Freedom: The New Deal and the ElectricalModernization of the American Home. Berkeley and London: University of CaliforniaPress, 1996, 316 pp. (YC.1997.b.4964)
VII. U.S. STATES, REGIONS AND TERRITORIES
A. STATES AND THE DISTRICT OF COLUMBIA
1. Alabama
BOND, HORACE M. Negro Education in Alabama: A Study in Cotton and Steel. Washington, D.C.: Associated Pub., 1939, 358 pp. (08385.f.119); Tuscaloosa andLondon: University of Alabama Press, 1994, 383 pp. (YC.1995.a.2454)
BROWN, JAMES S., JR., ed. Up Before Daylight: Life Histories from the AlabamaWriters' Project, 1938-1939. University: University of Alabama Press, 1982, 261 pp. (X.520/39314)
CARTER, DAN T. Scottsboro: A Tragedy of the American South. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1969, 431 pp. (X.200/4237); London: OxfordUniversity Press, 1971, 431 pp. (X.708/7996); rev. ed., Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press, 1979, 479 pp. (X.709/51413; YC.1998.a.5029)
DAVIS, CHARLES S. The Cotton Kingdom in Alabama. Montgomery, Ala.: AlabamaState Dept. of Archives and History, 1939, 233 pp. (Mic.A.8275)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Alabama: A Guide to the Deep South. New York: R. R. Smith, 1941, 442 pp. (10413.ppp.11)
JONES, JAMES H. Bad Blood: The Tuskegee Syphilis Experiment. New York: FreePress; London: Collier Macmillan, 1981, 272 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234); New York: Free Press; London: Collier Macmillan International, 1993, 297 pp. (YC.1994.b.2234)
KELLEY, ROBIN D. G. Hammer and Hoe: Alabama Communists during the GreatDepression. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1990, 369pp. (YA.1993.b.8285)
KINSHASA, KWANDO M. The Man from Scottsboro: Clarence Norris and the Infamous1931 Alabama Rape Trial, in His Own Words. Jefferson, N.C., and London: McFarland, 1997, 231 pp. (YC.1997.b.5310)
2. Alaska see Territories
3. ArizonaFEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Arizona: A State Guide. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 530 pp. (10413.ppp.2);
151
The WPA Guide to the 1930s Arizona. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1989, 530pp. (YC.1989.a.7170)
WEISIGER, MARSHA L. Land of Plenty: Oklahomans in the Cotton Fields of Arizona,1933-1942. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1995, 238 pp. (YC.1997.a.1863)
4. Arkansas
ALEXANDER, DONALD C. The Arkansas Plantation, 1920-1942. New Haven,Conn.: Yale University Press, 1943, 118 pp. (Ac.2692.ma/18.(2.))
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Arkansas: A Guide to the State. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 447 pp. (10413.ppp.20)
HALL, W. F. and MRS. W. F. HALL. Arkansas, 1836-1936: A Study of Its Growthand Characteristics in Observance of Its Centenary Year, 1936. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Senate, 1936, 48 pp. (A.S.10/4, U.S.Senate Documents, 74th Congress, 2d Session,no. 191)
WHAYNE, JEANNIE M. A New Plantation South: Land, Labor and Federal Favor inTwentieth-Century Arkansas. Charlottesville and London: University Press of Virginia,1996, 324 pp. (YC.1996.b.7321)
5. California
BURKE, ROBERT E. Olson's New Deal for California. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1953, 279 pp. (8175.dd.3)
CHAMBERS, CLARKE A. California Farm Organizations: A Historical Study of theGrange, the Farm Bureau and the Associated Farmers, 1929-1941. Berkeley and LosAngeles: University of California Press, 1952, 277 pp. (10414.e.55)
CROSS, IRA B. A History of the Labor Movement in California. Berkeley: Universityof California Press, 1935, 354 pp. (Ac.2689.g/19; X.520/9067)
CROSS, WILLIAM T. Newcomers and Nomads in California. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1937, 149 pp. (08286.a.90)
CROWE, MICHAEL F. Deco by the Bay: Art Deco Architecture in the San Francisco BayArea. New York: Viking Studio Books; London: Penguin, 1995, 122 pp. (YC.1996.b.456)
DANIEL, CLETUS E. Bitter Harvest: A History of California Farmworkers, 1870-1941. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press, 1981, 348 pp. (X.800/31360)DE SAISSET ART GALLERY AND MUSEUM. New Deal Art: California. SantaClara, Calif.: De Saisset Art Galley and Museum, 1976, 172 pp. (X.419/4345)
152
DE WITT, HOWARD. Violence in the Fields: California Filipino Farm LaborUnionization during the Great Depression. Saratoga, Calif.: Century Twenty One, 1980,139 pp. (DSC 80/33084)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. California's State Capitol. Sacramento, Calif.: California State Printing Office, 1942, 94pp. (A.S.C.3/42)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Los Angeles: A Guide to the City and Its Environs. New York: Hastings House, 1941,433 pp. (10413.ppp.12)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. San Francisco: The Bay and Its Cities. New York: Hastings House, 1940, 531 pp. (10412.ppp.5)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Santa Barbara: A Guide to the Channel City and Its Environs. New York: HastingsHouse, 1941, 206 pp. (10413.ppp.26)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. California: A Guide to the Golden State. New York: Hastings House, 1939, 713 pp.(010410.d.25); rev. ed., New York: Hastings House, 1967, 733 pp. (X.809/10412)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Death Valley: A Guide. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1939, 75pp. (010410.a.33)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. San Diego: A California City. Reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1975, 138 pp. (YA.1990.a.22548)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. The WPA Guide to the Monterey Peninsula. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1989,207 pp. (YC.1990.a.5582)
GEBHARD, DAVID and HARRIETTE VON BRETON, comps. L.A. in theThirties, 1931-1941. Layton, Utah: Peregrine Smith, 1975, 165 pp. (X.415/3143)
GREGORY, JAMES N. American Exodus: The Dust Bowl Migration and Okie Culturein California. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989, 338 pp. (YC.1990.b.6324)
HENSTELL, BRUCE. Sunshine and Wealth: Los Angeles in the Twenties and Thirties. San Francisco, Calif.: Chronicle Books, 1984, 132 pp. (LB.31.b.1353)
HUNTINGTON, EMILY H. Unemployment Relief and the Unemployed in the SanFrancisco Bay Region, 1929-1934. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1939, 106pp. (8288.f.17)
153
LOFTIS, ANNE. Witnesses to the Struggle: Imaging the 1930s California LaborMovement. Reno: University of Nevada Press, 1998, 239 pp. (DSC 98/24858)
MCWILLIAMS, CAREY. Factories in the Field: The Story of Migratory Farm Labor inCalifornia. Boston: Little, Brown, 1939, 334 pp. (X.319/1933)
MODELL, JOHN. The Economics and Politics of Racial Accommodation: The Japanese ofLos Angeles, 1900-1942. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1977, 201pp. (X.520/12488)
MULLINS, WILLIAM H. The Depression and the Urban West Coast, 1929-1933: LosAngeles, San Francisco, Seattle and Portland. Bloomington: Indiana University Press,1991, 176 pp. (DSC 91/11155)
NEUHAUS, EUGEN. The Art of Treasure Island: First-hand Impressions of theArchitecture, Sculpture, Landscape Design, Color Effects, Mural Decorations, Illuminations andOther Artistic Aspects of the Golden Gate International Exposition of 1939. Berkeley: University of California Press, 1939, 185 pp. (7959.h.57)
PERRY, LOUIS B. and RICHARD S. PERRY. A History of the Los Angeles LaborMovement, 1911-1941. Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press,1963, 622 pp. (Ac.2689.hb.(12.))
PILDAS, AVE. Art Deco: Los Angeles: Photographs. New York and London: Harperand Row, 1977, 64 pp. (X.419/34590)
RUÍZ, VICKI L. Cannery Women, Cannery Lives: Mexican Women, Unionization andthe California Food Processing Industry, 1930-1950. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1987, 194 pp. (YA.1989.b.7702)
SAVAGE, CHRISTINE E. New Deal Adobe: The Civilian Conservation Corps and theReconstruction of Mission La Purisima, 1934-1942. Santa Barbara, Calif.: Fithian Press,1991, 162 pp. (YA.1992.a.21027)
SELVIN, DAVID F. A Terrible Anger: The 1934 Waterfront and General Strikes in SanFrancisco. Detroit, Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1996, 272 pp. (YA.1998.a.10565)
SINCLAIR, UPTON B. I, Governor of California, and How I Ended Poverty: A TrueStory of the Future. London: T. Wernie Laurie, 1933, 63 pp. (12601.s.4)
STARR, KEVIN. Endangered Dreams: The Great Depression in California. New Yorkand Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996, 402 pp. (YC.1997.b.1233)
STEIN, WALTER J. California and the Dust Bowl Migration. Westport, Conn., andLondon: Greenwood, 1973, 302 pp. (X.329/7027)
154
WEBER, DEVRA. Dark Sweat, White Gold: California Farm Workers, Cotton and theNew Deal. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1994, 338 pp. (YC.1995.b.2581)
6. Colorado
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Colorado: A Guide to the Highest State. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 511 pp. (10413.ppp.6)
WICKENS, JAMES F. Colorado in the Great Depression. New York: Garland, 1979,448 pp. (X.529/73677)
7. Connecticut
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. History of Milford, Connecticut, 1639-1939. Bridgeport, Conn.: Braunworth, 1939, 204pp. (10413.k.34)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Connecticut: A Guide to Its Roads, Lore, and People. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1938,593 pp. (X.809/25676)
8. Delaware
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Delaware: A Guide to the First State. New York: Viking, 1938, 549 pp. (010410.d.16)
9. District of Columbia
BABSON, ROGER W. Washington and the Depression: Including the Career of W. N.Doak. New York, London: Harper, 1932, 296 pp. (8224.ppp.38)
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. and J. ORIN POWERS. Public Education in the District ofColumbia. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Studyno. 15, 1938, 99 pp. (A.S. 1988)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Washington: City and Capital. Washington, D.C.: Government Printing Office,1937, 1140 pp. (10413.p.10); Washington, D.C.: A Guide to the Nation's Capital. Rev. ed., New York: Hastings House, 1968, 528 pp. (X.809/12891)
GREEN, CONSTANCE M. Washington. Vol. 2, Capital City, 1879-1950. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1963, 558 pp. (100028.ppp.6/2)
PARTON, MARY F. Your Washington. New York and Toronto: Longmans, 1938,193 pp. (010410.k.7)
155
SULLIVAN, LAWRENCE. All About Washington, Including Dining in Washington: An Intimate Guide. New York: John Day, 1932, 283 pp. (X.808/8748)
WILLIS, DEBORAH and JANE LUSAKA, eds. Visual Journal: Harlem and D.C. inthe Thirties and Forties. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press,1996, 208 pp. (LB.31.b.14108)
WIRZ, HANS and RICHARD STRINER. Washington Deco: Art Deco Design in theNation's Capital. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1984, 128 pp. (DSC 85/29175)
10. Florida
CARLEBACH, MICHAEL L. and EUGENE F. PROVENZO, JR. Farm SecurityAdministration Photographs of Florida. Gainesville: University Press of Florida, 1993,127 pp. (YK.1996.b.1718)
CERWINSKE, LAURA. Tropical Deco: The Architecture and Design of Old MiamiBeach. New York: Rizzoli, 1981, 95 pp. (LB.31.a.809)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. AGuide to Key West. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 122 pp. (10413.ppp.7)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Florida: A Guide to the Southernmost State. New York: Oxford University Press, 1939,600 pp. (010410.d.17)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Seeing St. Augustine. Reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1976, 73 pp. (YA.1987.a.214)
KERSEY, HARRY A. The Florida Seminoles and the New Deal, 1933-1942. BocaRaton: Florida Atlantic University Press, 1989, 214 pp. (DSC 92/00078)
MCDONOGH, GARY W., ed. The Florida Negro: A Federal Writers' Project Legacy. Jackson and London: University Press of Mississippi, 1993, 177 pp. (YC.1993.b.5942)
MCGOVERN, JAMES R. Anatomy of a Lynching: The Killing of Claude Neal. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1982, 170 pp. (X.520/35695;YC.1993.a.773)
11. Georgia
HOLMES, MICHAEL S. The New Deal in Georgia: An Administrative History. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1975, 364 pp. (X.809/41931)FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Atlanta: A City of the Modern South. New York: Smith & Durell, 1942, 266 pp. (10413.ppp.29)
156
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT. WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Drums and Shadows: Survival Stories among the Georgia Coastal Negroes. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1940, 274 pp. (010007.h.70)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Georgia: A Guide to Its Town and Countryside. Athens: University of Georgia Press,1940, 559 pp. (010410.dd.18)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. These Are Our Lives: As Told by the People and Written by Members of the Federal Writers'Project in North Carolina, Tennessee and Georgia. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina Press, 1939, 421 pp. (012643.34)
RAPER, ARTHUR F. Preface to Peasantry: A Tale of Two Black Belt Counties. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1936, 423 pp. (Mic.A.17012)
12. Hawaii see Territories
13. Idaho
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Idaho: A Guide in Word and Picture. 2d ed., New York: Oxford University Press,1950, 300 pp. (10414.de.7)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. The Idaho Encyclopedia. Caldwell, Idaho: Caxton Printers, 1938, 452 pp. (Mic.A.9213)
14. Illinois
ABBOTT, EDITH. The Tenements of Chicago, 1908-1935. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1936, 505 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2; Mic.A.16974)
ALLSWANG, JOHN M. The Political Behavior of Chicago's Ethnic Groups, 1918-1932. New York: Arno, 1980, 313 pp. (X.800/42013)
ASBURY, HERBERT. The Underworld of Chicago: An Informal History. London: Hale, 1941, 364 pp. (6059.b.2)
BILES, ROGER. Big City Boss in Depression and War: Mayor Edward J. Kelly ofChicago. De Kalb: Northern Illinois University Press, 1984, 219 pp. (YA.1987.b.4139)
BRECKINRIDGE, SOPHONISBA P. The Illinois Poor Law and Its Administration. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 541 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(44.))
CAVAN, RUTH S. and KATHERINE H. RANCK. The Family and the Depression: A Study of One Hundred Chicago Families. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1938,208 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36.(36.))
157
CENTURY OF PROGRESS INTERNATIONAL EXPOSITION. The OfficialPictures of a Century of Progress Exposition, Chicago, 1933. Chicago: Reuben H.Donnelley Corp., 1933. (7960.k.6)
COHEN, LIZABETH. Making a New Deal: Industrial Workers in Chicago, 1919-1939. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990, 526 pp. (YC.1991.b.1030);Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992, 526 pp. (YK.1992.a.8514)
FARIS, ROBERT E. LEE. Chicago Sociology, 1929-1932. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1970, 173 pp. (X.519/10975)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Illinois: A Descriptive and Historical Guide. Chicago: A. C. McClurg, 1939, 687 pp. (010410.dd.15)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Chicago and Suburbs. Reprint, Evanston, Ill.: Chicago Historical Bookworks, 1991,263 pp. (YA.1992.a.22839)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Cairo Guide. Reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1976, 62 pp. (YA.1987.a.213)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Galena Guide. Reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1976, 79 pp. (YA.1987.a.287)
FRAZIER, EDWARD F. The Negro Family in Chicago. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1932, 294 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(12.)); Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1939, 686 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(22.))
GLICK, FRANK Z. The Illinois Emergency Relief Commission: A Study ofAdministrative and Financial Aspects of Emergency Relief. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1940, 247 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(48.))
GOSNELL, HAROLD F. Machine Politics: Chicago Model. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1937, 229 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36.(35.)); 2d ed., Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1968, 247 pp. (X.708/4456)
GOSNELL, HAROLD F. Negro Politicians: The Rise of Negro Politics in Chicago. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1935, 404 pp. (Ac.2691.d/36(33.)); Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1967, 396 pp. (X.709/5487)
HOFFMAN, DENNIS E. Scarface Al and the Crime Crusaders: Chicago's Private Waragainst Capone. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University Press, 1993, 192 pp. (YA.1996.b.706)
ILLINOIS STATE MUSEUM. After the Great Crash: New Deal Art in Illinois: AnExhibition of Art from the Period 1934-1943, Produced by Artists on the Various Federal Art
158
Projects in Illinois. Springfield, Ill.: Illinois State Museum Society, 1983, 32 pp. (A.S.I50/996)
NEWELL, BARBARA W. Chicago and the Labor Movement: Metropolitan Unionism inthe 1930's. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1961, 288 pp. (8280.aa.28)
OBLINGER, CARL D. Divided Kingdom: Work, Community, and the Mining Wars inthe Central Illinois Coal Fields during the Great Depression. Springfield, Ill.: Illinois StateHistorical Society, 1991, 265 pp. (YA.1994.a.12499)
PUTTEE, DOROTHY F. and MARY R. COLBY. The Illegitimate Child in Illinois. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1937, 250 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(38.))
RECKLESS, WALTER C. Vice in Chicago. Chicago: University of Chicago Press,1933, 314 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(15.))
THRASHER, FREDERIC M. The Gang: A Study of 1,313 Gangs in Chicago. 2drev. ed., Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1936, 605 pp. (Ac.2691.d/37.(17.))
15. Indiana
CHAMBERS, DAVID L. Indiana: A Hoosier History Based on the Mural Paintings ofThomas Hart Benton. Indianapolis, Ind.: Bobbs-Merrill, 1933, 47 pp. (10411.I.36)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Indiana: A Guide to the Hoosier State. New York: Oxford University Press, 1941, 548pp. (010410.dd.23)
REID, ROBERT L., ed. Back Home Again: Indiana in the Farm Security AdministrationPhotographs, 1935-1943. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1987, 144 pp. (LB.31.a.2321)
16. Iowa
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Iowa: A Guide to the Hawkeye State. New York: Viking, 1938, 583 pp. (010410.d.18)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Guide to Cedar Rapids and Northeast Iowa. Cedar Rapids, Iowa: Laurence Press, 1937,79 pp. (Mic.A.11127)
17. Kansas
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Kansas: A Guide to the Sunflower State. New York: Viking, 1939, 538 pp. (10413.ppp.1)
SCHRUBEN, FRANCIS W. Kansas in Turmoil, 1930-1936. Columbia: Universityof Missouri Press, 1969, 240 pp. (X.800/6527)
159
SUGGS, GEORGE G. Union Busting in the Tri-State: The Oklahoma, Kansas andMissouri Metal Workers' Strike of 1935. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1986,282 pp. (DSC 86/27042)
18. Kentucky
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Kentucky: A Guide to the Bluegrass State. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1939, 489 pp. (10413.m.23)
HEVENER, JOHN W. Which Side Are You On? The Harlan County Coal Miners,1931-39. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1978, 216 pp. (X.800/29882; X.800/37354)
NATIONAL COMMITTEE FOR THE DEFENSE OF POLITICALPRISONERS. Harlan Miners Speak: Report on Terrorism in the Kentucky Coal Fields. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1932, 348 pp. (Mic.A.18925)
WILLEFORD, MARY BRISTOW. Income and Health in Remote Rural Areas: AStudy of 400 Families in Leslie County, Kentucky. New York: Columbia University,1932, 88 pp. (08285.h.27)
19. Louisiana [See also III.I.5. Government and Politics: Opposition Parties and Protest Movements:
Long, Huey P.]
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Louisiana: A Guide to the State. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 746 pp. (10412.ppp.8); rev. ed., New York: Hastings House, 1971, 711 pp. (X.809/18404)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. New Orleans City Guide. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1938, 430 pp. (Mic.A.11498)
KANE, HARNETT T. Louisiana Hayride: The American Rehearsal for Dictatorship,1928-1940. New York: Morrow, 1941, 471 pp. (Mic.A.9498)
NOGGLE, BURL. Working with History: The Historical Records Survey in Louisiana andthe Nation, 1936-1942. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1981, 139 pp. (X.800/41198)
ROSENHEIM, JEFF. Walker Evans and Jane Ninas in New Orleans, 1935-1936. NewOrleans, La.: Historic New Orleans Collection, 1991, 24 pp. (DSC q94/24657)SINDLER, ALLAN P. Huey Long's Louisiana: State Politics, 1920-1952. Baltimore,Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1956, 316 pp. (9617.e.21); Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1968, 316 pp. (X.709/9314)
20. Maine
160
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Maine: A Guide 'Down East'. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1937, 476 pp. (X.809/25673)
21. Maryland
ARGERSINGER, JO ANN E. Toward a New Deal in Baltimore: People andGovernment in the Great Depression. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press,1988, 284 pp. (YC.1988.b.6639)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Maryland: A Guide to the Old Line State. New York: Oxford University Press, 1940,561 pp. (010410.d.28)
22. Massachusetts
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Boston Looks Seaward: The Story of the Port, 1630-1940. Boston: Bruce Humphries,1941, 316 pp. (08805.h.52)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Massachusetts: A Guide to Its Places and People. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1937, 675pp. (10413.n.10)
GILBOY, ELIZABETH W. Applicants for Work Relief: A Study of MassachusettsFamilies Under the FERA and WPA. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press,1940, 273 pp. (08286.dd.93)
HUTHMACHER, JACOB J. Massachusetts People and Politics, 1919-1933. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1959, 328 pp. (9088.ff.8)
STACK, JOHN F. International Conflict in an American City: Boston's Irish, Italians andJews, 1935-1944. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1979, 181 pp. (X.809/45962)
TROUT, CHARLES H. Boston: The Great Depression and the New Deal. NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1977, 401 pp. (X.809/43684)
23. Michigan
CLARK, ROBERT J., et al. Design in America: The Cranbrook Vision, 1925-1950. New York: Abrams, 1983, 352 pp. (DSC 84/18182)FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Michigan: A Guide to the Wolverine State. New York: Oxford University Press, 1941,682 pp. (010410.dd.20)
FUJITA, KUNIKO. Black Worker's Struggles in Detroit's Auto Industry, 1935-1975. Saratoga, Calif.: Century Twenty One, 1980, 130 pp. (X.525/8724)
161
JOHNSON, CHRISTOPHER H. Maurice Sugar: Law, Labor and the Left in Detroit,1912-1950. Detroit, Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1988, 334 pp. (YA.1990.b.4428)
MEIER, AUGUST and ELLIOTT RUDWICK. Black Detroit and the Rise of theUAW. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 289 pp. (X.529/36379)
ORTQUIST, RICHARD T. Depression Politics in Michigan, 1929-1933. New Yorkand London: Garland, 1982, 276 pp. (YA.1986.b.3188)
SUGAR, MAURICE. Ford Hunger March. Berkeley, Calif.: Meiklejohn CivilLiberties Institute, 1980. (DSC 5536.395 v 1)
THOMAS, RICHARD W. Life for Us Is What We Make It: Building BlackCommunity in Detroit, 1915-1945. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992, 365pp. (DSC 92/20288)
VARGAS, ZARAGOSA. Proletarians of the North: A History of Mexican IndustrialWorkers in Detroit and the Midwest, 1917-1933. Berkeley and Oxford: University ofCalifornia Press, 1993, 277 pp. (YC.1994.b.5414)
24. Minnesota
FAUE, ELIZABETH. Community of Suffering and Struggle: Women, Men and the LaborMovement in Minneapolis, 1915-1945. Chapel Hill: University of North CarolinaPress, 1991, 295 pp. (YA.1992.b.4587)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Minnesota: A State Guide. New York: Viking, 1938, 523 pp. (010410.d.20)
GIESKE, MILLARD L. Minnesota Farmer-Laborism: The Third-Party Alternative. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1979, 398 pp. (X.520/30230)
HAYNES, JOHN E. Dubious Alliance: The Making of Minnesota's DFL Party. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1984, 264 pp. (DSC 84/22325)
MAYER, GEORGE H. The Political Career of Floyd B. Olson. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1951, 329 pp. (8177.l.19)
TWETON, D. JEROME. The New Deal at the Grass Roots: Programs for the People inOtter Tail County, Minnesota. St. Paul, Minn.: Minnesota Historical Society Press,1988, 205 pp. (YA.1992.b.6858)
25. Mississippi
BLACK, PATTI CARR, ed. Documentary Portrait of Mississippi: The Thirties. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1982, 128 pp. (X.809/57759)
162
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Mississippi: A Guide to the Magnolia State. New York: Viking, 1938, 545 pp. (10413.m.12); Mississippi: The WPA Guide to the Magnolia State. Jackson and London: University Press of Mississippi, 1988, 545 pp. (YC.1989.a.2954)
MORGAN, CHESTER M. Redneck Liberal: Theodore G. Bilbo and the New Deal. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1985, 274 pp. (DSC 86/07544)
WELTY, EUDORA. One Time, One Place: Mississippi in the Depression: A SnapshotAlbum. New York: Random House, 1971, 111 pp. (X.809/18330)
26. Missouri
BOAN, FERN. A History of Poor Relief Legislation and Administration in Missouri. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 243 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(53.))
DORSETT, LYLE W. The Pendergast Machine. New York: Oxford University Press,1968, 163 pp. (X.709/6593)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Missouri: A Guide to the 'Show Me' State. New York: Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1941,652 pp. (10413.ppp.15); The WPA Guide to 1930s Missouri. Lawrence: UniversityPress of Kansas, 1986, 652 pp. (YC.1988.a.11668)
KIRCHNER, L. R. Triple Cross Fire! J. Edgar Hoover and the Kansas City UnionStation Massacre. Kansas City, Mo.: Janlar Books, 1993, 176 pp. (YA.1997.a.13158)
POPE, ROWENA M. The Hungry Years: The Story of One Family's Struggle forSurvival during the Great Depression. Circle Pines, Minn.: Bold Blue Jay Publications,1982, 169 pp. (YA.1987.a.2831)
SUGGS, GEORGE G. Union Busting in the Tri-State: The Oklahoma, Kansas andMissouri Metal Workers' Strike of 1935. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1986,282 pp. (DSC 86/27042)
27. Montana
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Montana: A State Guide Book. New York: Viking, 1939, 427 pp. (10413.m.20)
28. Nebraska
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Nebraska: A Guide to the Cornhusker State. New York: Viking, 1939, 424 pp. (010410.dd.2)
29. Nevada
163
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Nevada: A Guide to the Silver State. Portland, Ore.: Binfords & Mort, 1940, 315 pp. (10413.ppp.3)
MOEHRING, EUGENE P. Resort City in the Sunbelt: Las Vegas, 1930-1970. Reno: University of Nevada Press, 1989, 329 pp. (DSC 6081.632, no. 29)
STEVENS, JOSEPH E. Hoover Dam: An American Adventure. Norman: Universityof Oklahoma Press, 1988, 326 pp. (YC.1989.b.1739)
30. New Hampshire
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. New Hampshire: A Guide to the Granite State. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1938, 559pp. (X.809/25674)
31. New Jersey
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Stories of New Jersey: Its Significant Places, People and Activities. Port Washington, N.Y.,and London: Kennikat Press, 1972, 422 pp. (X.809/16935)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. New Jersey: A Guide to Its Present and Past. New York: Viking, 1939, 735 pp. (10413.m.21); The WPA Guide to 1930's New Jersey. New Brunswick, N.J., andLondon: Rutgers University Press, 1989, 735 pp. (YC.1990.a.7446)
GORDON, FELICE D. After Winning: The Legacy of the New Jersey Suffragists, 1920-1947. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1986, 262 pp. (DSC86/15225)
32. New Mexico
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. New Mexico: A Guide to the Colorful State. New York: Hastings House, 1940, 458 pp. (010410.dd.24); The WPA Guide to 1930s New Mexico. Tucson: University ofArizona Press, 1989, 458 pp. (YC.1989.a.7171)
FORREST, SUZANNE. The Preservation of the Village: New Mexico's Hispanics and theNew Deal. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1989, 253 pp. (DSC89/19019)MELZER, RICHARD. Madrid Revisited: Life and Labor in a New Mexico MiningCamp in the Years of the Great Depression. Santa Fe, N.M.: Lightning Tree, 1976, 63pp. (YA.1987.b.1079)
WEIGLE, MARTA, ed. New Mexicans in Cameo and Camera: New Deal Documentationof Twentieth-Century Lives. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1985, 228pp. (YA.1988.b.6357)
164
WEIGLE, MARTA, ed. Women of New Mexico: Depression Era Images. Santa Fe,N.M.: Ancient City Press, 1993, 129 pp. (YA.1995.b.4972)
33. New York [See also VI.I.4. Cultural and Intellectual History: Expositions and World Fairs: New York
World's Fair, 1939]
ABBOTT, BERENICE and ELIZABETH MCCAUSLAND. New York in theThirties. New York: Dover; London: Constable, 1973, 97 pp. (Cup.1281/50)
BACHE, LOUISE F. Health Education in an American City: An Account of a Five-yearProgram in Syracuse, New York. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, Doran, 1934, 116 pp. (7383.e.20)
BALFOUR, ALAN. Rockefeller Center: Architecture as Theater. New York andLondon: McGraw-Hill, 1978, 248 pp. (X.421/10730)
BAYOR, RONALD H. Neighbors in Conflict: The Irish, Germans, Jews and Italians ofNew York City, 1929-1941. 2d ed., Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1988, 232pp. (DSC 88/11202)
BEATON, CECIL W. H. Cecil Beaton's New York. London: Batsford, 1938, 261 pp. (010410.b.13)
BLETTER, ROSEMARIE H., et al. Remembering the Future: The New York World'sFair from 1939-1964. New York: Rizzoli, 1989, 208 pp. (DSC q90/00622)
BLOCK, ALAN A. East Side-West Side: Organizing Crime in New York, 1930-1950. Cardiff: University College Cardiff Press, 1980, 265 pp. (X.529/48372)
BREMER, WILLIAM W. Depression Winters: New York Social Workers and the NewDeal. Philadelphia: Temple University Press, 1984, 231 pp. (YA.1989.a.18254)
CROUSE, JOAN M. The Homeless Transient in the Great Depression: New York State,1929-1941. Albany: State University of New York Press, 1986, 319 pp.(YC.1987.b.4429)
DAVIS, KENNETH S. FDR: The New York Years, 1928-1933. New York: Random House, 1985, 512 pp. (DSC 86/03601)
FAY, EDGAR R. Londoner's New York. London: Methuen, 1936, 235 pp. (010409.ee.59)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. New York: A Guide to the Empire State. New York: Oxford University Press, 1940,782 pp. (010410.dd.11)
165
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. New York City Guide. New York: Random House, 1939, 708 pp. (010410.d.27);London: Constable, 1939, 708 pp. (10413.m.9)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. The Berkshire Hills. New York and London: Funk & Wagnalls, 1939, 368 pp. (10413.n.9)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. New York Panorama: A Comprehensive View of the Metropolis. London: Constable,1939, 526 pp. (010410.k.18)
FORD, JAMES. Slums and Housing, with Special Reference to New York City: History,Conditions, Policy. 2 vols. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1936, 1033pp. (8287.d.11)
FRANKLIN, CHARLES L. The Negro Labor Unionist of New York: Problems andConditions among Negroes in the Labor Unions in Manhattan, with Special Reference to theN.R.A. and post-N.R.A. Situations. New York: Columbia University Press, 1936, 417pp. (08285.h.51); reprint, New York: AMS Press, 1968, 415 pp. (Ac.2688/2.(420.))
FREEMAN, JOSHUA B. In Transit: The Transport Workers Union in New York City,1933-1936. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1989, 434pp. (YH.1990.b.507)
GARRETT, CHARLES. The La Guardia Years: Machine and Reform Politics in NewYork City. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1961, 423 pp. (X.709/799)
GOLDMAN, E. S., ed. The New York Story: A History Of The New York ClothingIndustry, 1924-1949. New York: New York Clothing Manufacturers' Exchange,1949, 88 pp. (Mic.A.16778)
GRAY, BRENDA C. Black Female Domestics during the Depression in New York City,1930-1940. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 200 pp. (YC.1993.b.6369)
GREENBERG, CHERYL L. Or Does It Explode? Black Harlem in the Great Depression. New York: Oxford University Press, 1991, 317 pp. (YC.1992.b.4986)
HILLIS, MARJORIE. New York, Fair or No Fair: A Guide for the Woman Vacationist. Indianapolis, Ind., and New York: Bobbs-Merrill, 1939, 206 pp. (010410.g.56)
HIMELSTEIN, MORGAN Y. Drama Was a Weapon: The Left-Wing Theatre in NewYork, 1929-1941. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1963, 300 pp. (X.909/8350)
HINE, LEWIS W. The Empire State Building. New York and London: Prestel, 1998,103 pp. (LB.31.c.9612)
166
INGALLS, ROBERT P. Herbert H. Lehman and New York's Little New Deal. NewYork: New York University Press, 1975, 287 pp. (X.802/11014)
KARP, WALTER. The Center: A History and Guide to Rockefeller Center. New York: American Heritage, 1982, 128 pp. (X.805/4755)
KESSNER, THOMAS. Fiorello H. La Guardia and the Making of Modern New York. New York: McGraw-Hill, 1989, 700 pp. (DSC 90/07258)
KLIGER, HANNAH, ed. Jewish Hometown Associations and Family Circles in New York: The WPA Jewish Writers' Group Study. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1992,164 pp. (DSC 99/12690)
KWONG, PETER. Chinatown, New York: Labor and Politics, 1930-1950. New Yorkand London: Monthly Review Press, 1979, 178 pp. (X.809/45531)
MCKAY, CLAUDE. Harlem: Negro Metropolis. New York: Dutton, 1940, 262 pp. (010410.f.56)
MANN, ARTHUR. La Guardia: A Fighter Against His Times, 1882-1933. Chicagoand London: University of Chicago Press, 1969, 384 pp. (X.0709/252.(1.))
MANN, ARTHUR. La Guardia Comes to Power: 1933. Philadelphia: Lippincott,1965, 199 pp. (X.809/4844); Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press,1969, 199 pp. (X.0709/252.(2.))
MESSLER, NORBERT. The Art Deco Skyscraper in New York. Frankfurt am Main: Lang, 1983, 232 pp. (X.429/16572)
MILLETT, JOHN D. The Works Progress Administration in New York City. Chicago: Public Administration Service, 1938, 228 pp. (Ac.2286.b)
NAISON, MARK. Communists in Harlem during the Depression. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1983, 355 pp. (X.800/40619)
RADOMSKI, ALEXANDER L. Work Relief in New York State, 1931-1935. Morningside Heights, N.Y.: King's Crown Press, 1947, 332 pp. (Mic.A.12367)
ROGERS, AGNES and FREDERICK LEWIS ALLEN. Metropolis: An AmericanCity in Photographs. New York and London: Harper, 1934, 217 pp. (10410.y.12)
SÁNCHEZ KORROL, VIRGINIA E. From Colonia to Community: The History ofPuerto Ricans in New York City, 1917-1948. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983, 242pp. (X.809/67188); Berkeley and London: University of California, 1994, 275 pp. (YC.1995.a.791)
SCHNEIDER, DAVID M. and ALBERT DEUTSCH. The History of Public Welfarein New York State, 1867-1940. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 410 pp. (Ac.2691.dg/2.(51.))
167
SHULMAN, HARRY M. Slums of New York. New York: Albert & Charles Boni,1938, 394 pp. (8288.f.31)
STERN, ROBERT A. M., GREGORY F. GILMARTIN and THOMASMELLINS. New York 1930: Architecture and Urbanism between the Two Wars. NewYork: Rizzoli, 1987, 847 pp. (DSC 87/12958)
TAURANAC, JOHN. The Empire State Building: The Making of a Landmark. NewYork: St. Martin's Griffin, 1997, 383 pp. (YA.1997.b.6808)
WAPLES, DOUGLAS and LEON CARNOVSKY. Libraries and Readers in the State ofNew York: The State's Administration of Public and School Libraries with Reference to theEducational Values of Library Services. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1939, 160pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(13.))
WATTS, JILL. God, Harlem U.S.A.: The Father Divine Story. Berkeley and Oxford: University of California Press, 1992, 249 pp. (YC.1992.b.5653; YC.1995.a.2958)
WENGER, BETH S. New York Jews and the Great Depression: Uncertain Promise. NewHaven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1996, 269 pp. (YC.1997.b.844)
WILLIS, DEBORAH and JANE LUSAKA, eds. Visual Journal: Harlem and D.C. inthe Thirties and Forties. Washington, D.C., and London: Smithsonian Institution Press,1996, 208 pp. (LB.31.b.14108)
YOCHELSON, BONNIE. Berenice Abbott at Work: The Making of Changing NewYork. New York: New Press and Museum of the City of New York, 1997, 339 pp. (DSC f99/1243)
34. North Carolina
ABRAMS, DOUGLAS C. Conservative Constraints: North Carolina and the New Deal. Jackson.: University Press of Mississippi, 1992, 285 pp. (YC.1993.b.4186)
BADGER, Anthony. J. North Carolina and the New Deal. Raleigh, N.C.: NorthCarolina Dept. of Cultural Resources, Division of Archives and History, 1981, 102 pp.(DSC 84/34230)
BADGER, Anthony J. Prosperity Road: The New Deal, Tobacco and North Carolina. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1980, 295 pp. (X.520/36870)
BELL, JOHN L. Hard Times: Beginnings of the Great Depression in North Carolina,1929-1933. Raleigh, N.C.: North Carolina Dept. of Cultural Resources, Division ofArchives and History, 1982, 87 pp. (DSC 85/09003)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. North Carolina: A Guide to the Old North State. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina Press, 1939, 601 pp. (10413.ppp.19)
168
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. These Are Our Lives: As Told by the People and Written by Members of the Federal Writers'Project in North Carolina, Tennessee and Georgia. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina Press, 1939, 421 pp. (012643.34)
LEFFLER, HUGH T., ed. North Carolina History Told by Contemporaries. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1934, 454 pp. (010410.ee.46)
MORRISON, JOSEPH L. Governor O. Max Gardner: A Power in North Carolina andNew Deal Washington. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1971, 323 pp. (X.800/7507)
PURYEAR, ELMER L. Democratic Party Dissension in North Carolina, 1928-1936. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1962, 251 pp. (Ac.2685.k/4)
35. North Dakota
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. North Dakota: A Guide to the Northern Prairie State. Fargo, N.D.: Knight Printing Co.,1938, 371 pp.; 2d ed., New York: Oxford University Press, 1950, 352 pp. (10414.de.9)
36. Ohio
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. The Ohio Guide. New York: Oxford University Press, 1940, 634 pp. (010410.d.29);New York: Oxford University Press, 1953, 634 pp. (10414.b.26)
KORTH, PHILIP A. and MARGARET R. BEEGLE. I Remember Like Today: TheAuto-Lite Strike of 1934. East Lansing: Michigan State University Press, 1988, 245 pp. (YA.1990.b.3526)
MYDANS, CARL, THEODOR JUNG, JOHN VACHON, ARTHURROTHSTEIN, BEN SHAHN, RUSSELL LEE and MARION POST WOLCOTT. Ohio: A Photographic Portrait, 1935-1941: Farm Security Administration Photographs. Akron, Ohio: Akron Art Institute, 1980, 96 pp. (L.49/3209)
37. Oklahoma
BAKER, T. LINDSAY and JULIE P. BAKER, eds. The WPA Oklahoma SlaveNarratives. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1996, 543 pp. (DSC96/14748)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Oklahoma: A Guide to the Sooner State. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press,1945, 445 pp. (010410.dd.39); The WPA Guide to 1930s Oklahoma. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1986, 442 pp. (YC.1988.a.3502)
169
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Tulsa: A Guide to the Oil Capital. Tulsa, Okla.: Mid-West Printing Co., 1938, 79 pp. (Mic.A.18219)
MCGINNIS, PATRICK E. Oklahoma's Depression Radicals: Ira M. Finley and theVeterans of Industry of America. New York: Lang, 1991, 192 pp. (YA.1993.b.1828)
SUGGS, GEORGE G. Union Busting in the Tri-State: The Oklahoma, Kansas andMissouri Metal Workers' Strike of 1935. Norman: University of Oklahoma Press, 1986,282 pp. (DSC 86/27042)
WEISIGER, MARSHA L. Land of Plenty: Oklahomans in the Cotton Fields of Arizona,1933-1942. Norman and London: University of Oklahoma Press, 1995, 238 pp. (YC.1997.a.1863)
38. Oregon
CORNING, HOWARD M., ed. Dictionary of Oregon History: Compiled from theResearch Files of the Former Oregon Writers' Project with Much Added Material. Portland,Ore.: Binfords & Mort, 1956, 281 pp. (Mic.A.16112)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Oregon: End of the Trail. Portland, Ore.: Binfords & Mort, 1940, 549 pp. (010410.dd.19)
MULLINS, WILLIAM H. The Depression and the Urban West Coast, 1929-1933: LosAngeles, San Francisco, Seattle and Portland. Bloomington: Indiana University Press,1991, 176 pp. (DSC 91/11155)
39. Pennsylvania
CARTER, ROBERT. Fallingwater: Frank Lloyd Wright. London: Phaidon, 1994,60 pp. (LB.31.b.11507)
COODE, THOMAS H. and JOHN F. BAUMAN. People, Poverty, and Politics: Pennsylvanians during the Great Depression. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press;London: Associated University Presses, 1981, 276 pp. (X.809/59903)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Pennsylvania: A Guide to the Keystone State. New York: Oxford University Press,1940, 660 pp. (010410.dd.7)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Erie: A Guide to the City and County. Philadelphia: William Penn Association ofPhiladelphia, 1938, 133 pp. (10413.p.20)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Philadelphia: A Guide to the Nation's Birthplace. Philadelphia: William Penn
170
Association, 1937, 704 pp. (10413.n.12); The WPA Guide to Philadelphia. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1988, 704 pp. (DSC 89/06179)
IRWIN, RICHARD. Work for a Living: The Story of the WPA in Pennsylvania. Harrisburg, Pa.: Work Projects Administration, 1943, 99 pp. (Mic.A.16746)
STUART, JAMES L. Marshaling Men in Allegheny County: A Report on the Local CivilWorks Administration and Work Division Activities, November 1933 to August 1934. Allegheny Co., Pa.: Emergency Relief Administration of Allegheny County, 1934, 37pp. (8287.cc.42)
40. Rhode Island
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Rhode Island: A Guide to the Smallest State. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1937, 500 pp. (010410.d.9)
LEVINE, ERWIN L. Theodore Francis Green: The Rhode Island Years, 1906-1936. Providence, R.I.: Brown University Press, 1963, 222 pp. (X.800/1578)
LEVINE, ERWIN L. Theodore Francis Green: The Washington Years, 1937-1960. Providence, R.I.: Brown University Press, 1971, 179 pp. (X.800/8613)
41. South Carolina
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. South Carolina: A Guide to the Palmetto State. New York: Oxford University Press,1941, 514 pp. (010410.dd.12)
42. South Dakota
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. South Dakota: A Guide to the State. 2d ed., New York: Hastings House, 1952, 421pp. (X.809/25672)
43. Tennessee
BILES, ROGER. Memphis in the Great Depression. Knoxville: University ofTennessee Press, 1986, 174 pp. (DSC 88/12760)
COLE, WILLIAM E. Rural Rehabilitation Services in Knox County, Tennessee, 1935: Economic and Social Effects of the Depression upon Relief Families in Knoxville, Tennessee. Knoxville: University of Tennessee, 1936, 32 pp. (8286.f.54)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Tennessee: A Guide to the State. New York: Viking, 1939, 558 pp. (010410.dd.5)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. These Are Our Lives: As Told by the People and Written by Members of the Federal Writers'
171
Project in North Carolina, Tennessee and Georgia. Chapel Hill: University of NorthCarolina Press, 1939, 421 pp. (012643.34)
LEE, DAVID D. Tennessee in Turmoil: Politics in the Volunteer State, 1920-1932. Memphis, Tenn.: Memphis State University Press, 1979, 204 pp. (X.800/32229)
MINTON, JOHN D. The New Deal in Tennessee, 1932-1938. New York: Garland,1979, 351 pp. (X.809/65962)
44. Texas
ALLEN, RUTH A. Chapters in the History of Organized Labor in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1941, 258 pp. (Mic.A.8328)
ALLEN, RUTH A. and SAM B. BARTON. Wage Earners Meet the Depression. Austin: University of Texas, 1935, 105 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
BLACKWELDER, JULIA K. Women of the Depression: Caste and Culture in SanAntonio, 1929-1939. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1984, 279 pp. (YA.1989.b.5948)
CASE, HARRY L. Municipal Libraries in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1937,89 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
COTNER, ROBERT C., et al. Texas Cities and the Great Depression. Austin, Tex.: Texas Memorial Museum, 1973, 215 pp. (X.700/25843)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Beaumont: A Guide to the City and Its Environs. Houston: Anson Jones Press, 1939,167 pp. (010410.dd.6)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Corpus Christi: A History and Guide. Corpus Christi, Tex.: Corpus Christi CallerTimes, 1942, 245 pp. (010410.dd.35)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Texas: A Guide to the Lone Star State. New York: Hastings House, 1940, 718 pp. (010410.dd.25)
GARCIA, RICHARD A. Rise of the Mexican American Middle Class: San Antonio,1929-1941. College Station: Texas A&M University Press, 1991, 398 pp. (YA.1992.b.4125)
GREEN, GEORGE N. The Establishment in Texas Politics: The Primitive Years, 1938-1957. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1979, 306 pp. (X.800/28086)
HALL, CHARLES E. Progress of the Negro in Texas. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Bureauof the Census, 1936, 7 pp. (A.S.67/14)
172
MENEFEEE, SELDON C. Mexican Migratory Workers of South Texas. Washington,D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1941, 67 pp. (A.S.978/48)
PATENAUDE, LIONEL V. Texans, Politics and the New Deal. New York: Garland,1983, 237 pp. (DSC 87/10409)
REID, ROBERT L. Picturing Texas: The FSA-OWI Photographers in the Lone StarState, 1936-1943. Austin, Tex.: Texas State Historical Association, 1994, 208 pp. (LB.37.b.581)
WEISENBERGER, CAROL A. Dollars and Dreams: The National YouthAdministration in Texas. New York: Lang, 1994, 198 pp. (DSC 7303.9990 vol 6)
WHISENHUNT, DONALD W. The Depression in Texas: The Hoover Years. NewYork and London: Garland, 1983, 249 pp. (X.800/38929)
WINTERS, JET C. A Report on the Health and Nutrition of Mexicans Living in Texas. Austin: University of Texas, 1931, 99 pp. (Ac.2685.c/5)
45. Utah
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Utah: A Guide to the State. New York: Hastings House, 1941, 595 pp. (10413.ppp.10)
46. Vermont
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. Vermont: A Guide to the Green Mountain State. 3d ed., Boston: Houghton Mifflin,1968, 452 pp. (X.809/7819)
JUDD, RICHARD M. The New Deal in Vermont: Its Impact and Aftermath. NewYork: Garland, 1979, 409 pp. (YA.1986.a.4383)
47. Virginia
ELLISON, JOHN M. Negro Organizations and Leadership in Relation to Rural Life inVirginia. Blacksburg, Va.: Virginia Agricultural Experiment Station, 1933, 88 pp. (A.S.v.50/2)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. The Negro in Virginia. New York: Hastings House, 1940, 380 pp. (010410.dd.21)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Prince William: The Story of Its People and Its Places. Richmond, Va.: Whittet &Shepperson, 1941, 261 pp. (10413.ppp.17)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Virginia: A Guide to the Old Dominion. New York: Oxford University Press, 1940,
173
699 pp. (010410.dd.13); New York: Oxford University Press, 1953, 710 pp. (10414.b.27)
HEINEMANN, RONALD L. Depression and New Deal in Virginia: The EnduringDominion. Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 1983, 267 pp. (YA.1989.b.5932)
JOHNSON, BROOKS. Mountaineers to Main Street: The Old Dominion As SeenThrough Farm Security Administration Photographs. Norfolk, Va.: Chrysler Museum,1985, 165 pp. (DSC 85/23058)
MARTIN-PERDUE, NANCY J. and CHARLES L. PERDUE, JR., eds. TalkAbout Trouble: A New Deal Portrait of Virginians in the Great Depression. Chapel Hilland London: University of North Carolina Press, 1996, 493 pp. (YA.1997.b.5980)
48. Washington
BLUMELL, BRUCE D. The Development of Public Assistance in the State of Washingtonduring the Great Depression. New York and London: Garland, 1984, 490 pp.(X.520/38827)
CLARK, NORMAN H. The Dry Years: Prohibition and Social Change in Washington. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1965, 304 pp. (X.809/3621)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Washington: A Guide to the Evergreen State. Portland, Ore.: Binsfords & Mort, 1941,687 pp. (10413.ppp.22)
HILLMAN, ARTHUR. The Unemployed Citizens League of Seattle. University ofWashington Publications in the Social Sciences vol. 5, no. 3. Seattle: University ofWashington Press, 1934. (Ac.2692.x/8) MULLINS, WILLIAM H. The Depression and the Urban West Coast, 1929-1933: LosAngeles, San Francisco, Seattle and Portland. Bloomington: Indiana University Press,1991, 176 pp. (DSC 91/11155)
49. West Virginia
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. West Virginia: A Guide to the Mountain State. New York: Oxford University Press,1941, 559 pp. (010410.dd.22)
TROTTER, JOE W. Coal, Class and Color: Blacks in Southern West Virginia, 1915-32. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1990, 290 pp. (YA.1993.a.17633)
50. Wisconsin
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Wisconsin: A Guide to the Badger State. New York: Duell, Sloan & Pearce, 1941, 651pp. (10413.ppp.9)
174
FROKER, RUDOLPH K. and JOSEPH G. KNAPP. Farmers' Purchasing Associationsin Wisconsin. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Farm Credit Administration, 1937, 118 pp. (A.S.929/6)
GARLOCK, FRED L. Country Banking in Wisconsin during the Depression. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of Agriculture, 1941, 112 pp. (A.S.800/2)
LIPMAN, JONATHAN. Frank Lloyd Wright and the Johnson Wax Buildings. London: Architectural Press, 1986, 192 pp. (YV.1987.b.1630)
LORENCE, JAMES J. Gerald J. Boileau and the Progressive-Farmer-Labor Alliance: Politics of the New Deal. Columbia and London: University of Missouri Press, 1994,324 pp. (YC.1994.b.3865)
MILLER, JOHN E. Governor Philip F. La Follette, the Wisconsin Progressives and theNew Deal. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1982, 229 pp. (DSC 83/01017)
TROTTER, JOE W., JR. Black Milwaukee: The Making of an Industrial Proletariat,1915-45. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1985, 302 pp. (DSC 85/12464)
YOUNG, KIMBALL, JOHN LEWIS GILLIN and CALVERT L. DEDRICK. TheMadison Community. University of Wisconsin Studies in the Social Sciences andHistory no. 21. Madison: University of Wisconsin, 1934, 229 pp. (Ac.1792/6)
51. Wyoming
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Wyoming: A Guide to Its History, Highways, and People. New York: OxfordUniversity Press, 1941, 490 pp. (010410.dd.10)
B. REGIONAL STUDIES
1. General Studies
DAVIDSON, DONALD G. The Attack on Leviathan: Regionalism and Nationalism inthe United States. Reprint, Gloucester, Mass.: Peter Smith, 1962, 368 pp. (X.809/2161)
DORMAN, ROBERT L. Revolt of the Provinces: The Regionalist Movement in America,1920-1945. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1993, 366 pp. (DSC93/11652)
2. Midwest and West
BONNIFIELD, PAUL M. The Dust Bowl: Men, Dirt and Depression. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1980, 232 pp. (X.800/31118)
175
DONNELLY, THOMAS C., ed. Rocky Mountain Politics. Albuquerque: Universityof New Mexico Press, 1940, 340 pp. (X.800/42068)
FEINMAN, ROBERT L. Twilight of Progressivism: The Western Republican Senatorsand the New Deal. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press,1981, 262 pp. (DSC 4672.031, v.1 99th series)
HURT, R. DOUGLAS. The Dust Bowl: An Agricultural and Social History. Chicago: Nelson-Hall, 1981, 214 pp. (DSC 81/31451)
LOWITT, RICHARD. The New Deal and the West. Bloomington: IndianaUniversity Press, 1984, 283 pp. (YA.1988.b.6077); Norman and London: Universityof Oklahoma, 1993, 283 pp. (YC.1994.a.1955)
MORGAN, DAN. Rising in the West: The True Story of an 'Okie' Family from theGreat Depression through the Reagan Years. New York: Knopf, 1992, 532 pp.(YA.1993.b.3123)
MULLINS, WILLIAM H. The Depression and the Urban West Coast, 1929-1933: LosAngeles, San Francisco, Seattle and Portland. Bloomington: Indiana University Press,1991, 176 pp. (DSC 91/11155)
ROTHSTEIN, ARTHUR. The American West in the Thirties: 122 Photographs. NewYork: Dover; London: Constable, 1981, 121 pp. (L.42/1431)
SALOUTOS, THEODORE and JOHN D. HICKS. Twentieth-Century Populism: Agricultural Discontent in the Middle West, 1900-1939. Lincoln: University of NebraskaPress, 1961, 581 pp. (X.319/2219)
SHINDO, CHARLES J. Dust Bowl Migrants in the American Imagination. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1997, 252 pp. (YC.1997.b.4928)VARGAS, ZARAGOSA. Proletarians of the North: A History of Mexican IndustrialWorkers in Detroit and the Midwest, 1917-1933. Berkeley and Oxford: University ofCalifornia Press, 1993, 277 pp. (YC.1994.b.5414)
WHISENHUNT, DONALD W., ed. The Depression in the Southwest. PortWashington, N.Y.: Kennikat Press, 1980, 162 pp. (DSC 80/22466)
WORSTER, DONALD. Dust Bowl: The Southern Plains in the 1930s. Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 277 pp. (X.800/35630); New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 277 pp. (X.800/15315)
3. South
BECKER, JANE S. Selling Tradition: Appalachia and the Construction of an AmericanFolk, 1930-1940. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1998,331 pp. (YC.1999.b.522)
176
BECKHAM, SUE B. Depression Post Office Murals and Southern Culture: A GentleReconstruction. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1989, 338 pp. (DSC89/20879)
BILES, ROGER. The South and the New Deal. Lexington: University Press ofKentucky, 1994, 205 pp. (DSC 94/06564)
COBB, JAMES C. Industrialization and Southern Society, 1877-1984. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1984, 185 pp. (YC.1988.a.11787)
COBB, JAMES C. and MICHAEL V. NAMORATO, eds. The New Deal and theSouth. Jackson: University Press of Mississippi, 1984, 173 pp. (YA.1989.a.19488)
COBB, JAMES C. The Selling of the South: The Southern Crusade for IndustrialDevelopment, 1936-1980. Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press,1982, 293 pp. (X.520/29042)
DAVIS, ALLISON and JOHN DOLLARD. Children of Bondage: The PersonalityDevelopment of Negro Youth in the Urban South. New York: Harper and Row, 1964,299 pp. (X.808/189)
DOLLARD, JOHN. Caste and Class in a Southern Town. New Haven, Conn.: YaleUniversity Press for Institute of Human Relations, 1937, 502 pp. (20031.bb.23)
DUNBAR, ANTHONY P. Against the Grain: Southern Radicals and Prophets, 1929-1959. Charlottesville: University Press of Virginia, 1981, 306 pp. (X.800/40793)
FREIDEL, FRANK B. F.D.R. and the South. Baton Rouge: Louisiana StateUniversity Press, 1965, 102 pp. (X.708/3048)
GLEASON, ELIZA A. The Southern Negro and the Public Library: A Study of theGovernment and Administration of Public Library Service to Negroes in the South. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1941, 218 pp. (Ac.2691.dia/2.(23.))
HEARD, ALEXANDER and DONALD S. STRONG. Southern Primaries andElections, 1920-1949. Freeport, N.Y.: Books for Libraries Press, 1970, 206 pp. (YA.1992.b.2826)
HERRING, HARRIET L. Southern Industry and Regional Development. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1940, 103 pp. (Mic.A.10120)
HODGES, JAMES A. New Deal Labor Policy and the Southern Cotton Textile Industry,1933-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1986, 252 pp. (DSC88/31623)
HOLLEY, WILLIAM C., ELLEN WINSTON and T. J. WOOFTER. The PlantationSouth, 1934-1937. Washington, D.C.: Work Projects Administration, 1940, 124 pp. (A.S.978/7)
177
KIRBY, JACK TEMPLE. Rural Worlds Lost: The American South, 1920-1960. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University, 1987, 390 pp. (DSC 87/14987)
KNEEBONE, JOHN T. Southern Liberal Journalists and the Issue of Race, 1920-1944. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 312 pp. (DSC 86/06485)
KRUEGER, THOMAS A. And Promises to Keep: The Southern Conference for HumanWelfare, 1938-1948. Nashville, Tenn.: Vanderbilt University Press, 1967, 218 pp. (X.800/3881)
LEMERT, BENJAMIN F. The Cotton Textile Industry of the Southern AppalachianPiedmont. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1933, 188 pp. (8231.bb.27)
LISIO, DONALD J. Hoover, Blacks and Lily-Whites: A Study of Southern Strategies. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1985, 373 pp. (DSC 85/29520)
MERTZ, PAUL E. New Deal Policy and Southern Rural Poverty. Baton Rouge andLondon: Louisiana State University Press, 1978, 279 pp. (X.520/13552)
MICHIE, ALLAN A. and FRANK RHYLICH. Dixie Demagogues. New York: Vanguard Press, 1939, 298 pp. (20033.b.25)
OATES, MARY J. The Role of the Cotton Textile Industry in the Economic Development ofthe American Southeast, 1900-1940. New York: Arno, 1975, 221 pp. (X.520/14988)
O'BRIEN, MICHAEL. The Idea of the American South, 1920-1941. Baltimore, Md.,and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1979, 273 pp. (X.800/27917)
ODUM, HOWARD W. Southern Regions of the United States. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1936, 664 pp. (Mic.A.8814); reprint, New York: Agathon Press, 1969, 664 pp. (X.800/39858)
ROBINSON, JOHN L. Living Hard: Southern Americans in the Great Depression. Washington, D.C.: University Press of America, 1981, 262 pp. (DSC 81/23094)
SALMOND, JOHN A. A Southern Rebel: The Life and Times of Aubrey WillisWilliams, 1890-1965. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1983, 337 pp. (YA.1986.b.226)
SCHULMAN, BRUCE J. From Cotton Belt to Sunbelt: Federal Policy, EconomicDevelopment and the Transformation of the South, 1938-1980. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1991, 333 pp. (YC.1991.b.2994); Durham, N.C., andLondon: Duke University Press, 1994, 333 pp. (YC.1995.b.7479)
SMITH, DOUGLAS L. The New Deal in the Urban South. Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press, 1988, 287 pp. (YC.1991.b.4258)
178
TERRILL, TOM E. and JERROLD HIRSCH, eds. Such as Us: Southern Voices ofthe Thirties. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1979, 302 pp. (X.800/36843)
TINDALL, GEORGE B. The Emergence of the New South, 1913-1945. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press; Austin, Tex.: Littlefield Fund for Southern Historyof the University of Texas, 1967, 807 pp. (W.P.b.9/10)
TWELVE SOUTHERNERS. I'll Take My Stand: The South and the AgrarianTradition. New York and London: Harper, 1930, 359 pp. (010410.f.44)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE. Economic and SocialProblems and Conditions of the Southern Appalachians. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. ofAgriculture, 1935, 184 pp. (A.S.802/5)
VANCE, RUPERT B. Human Geography of the South: A Study in Regional Resourcesand Human Adequacy. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Social Study Series,1932, 596 pp. (Ac.2685.kc.(55))
VANCE, RUPERT B. and GORDON W. BLACKWELL New Farm Homes for Old: A Study of Rural Public Housing in the South. University: University of Alabama Press,1946, 245 pp. (Mic.A.17705)
WOODRUFF, NAN E. As Rare as Rain: Federal Relief in the Great Southern Droughtof 1930-31. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1985, 203 pp. (DSC 86/09035)
ZIEGER, HAROLD H., ed. Organized Labor in the Twentieth-Century South. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1991, 289 pp. (YA.1993.b.11674)
C. TERRITORIES
1. General Studies
BLAUCH, LLOYD E. Public Education in the Territories and Outlying Posssessions. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Advisory Committee on Education Staff Study no. 16, 1939,243 pp. (A.S.988)
CONN, STETSON, ROSE C. ENGELMAN and BYRON FAIRCHILD. Guardingthe United States and Its Outposts. Washington, D.C.: Office of the Chief of MilitaryHistory, Dept. of the Army, 1964, 593 pp. (A.S.742/14)
REID, CHARLES F. Education in the Territories and Outlying Possessions of the UnitedStates. New York: Teachers College, Columbia University, 1941, 593 pp. (08385.e.128)
2. Alaska
179
ANDERSON, H. DEWEY and WALTER C. EELLS. Alaska Natives: A Study ofTheir Sociological and Educational Status. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press,1935, 472 pp. (Ac.2692.ne)
CLARK, HENRY W. Alaska: The Last Frontier. New York: Grosset & Dunlap,1939, 246 pp. (9555.pp.17)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in Alaska. Washington, D.C.: U.S.Office of Education Bulletin no. 12, 1937, 56 pp. (A.S.202)
FEDERAL WRITERS' PROJECT, WORKS PROGRESS ADMINISTRATION. A Guide to Alaska: Last American Frontier. By Merle Colby. New York: Macmillan,1939, 427 pp. (10413.m.15)
3. Guam
POMEROY, EARL S. Pacific Outpost: American Strategy in Guam and Micronesia. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1951, 198 pp. (Ac.2692.n/12.(23.))
4. Hawaii
BARBER, JOSEPH, JR. Hawaii: Our Restless Rampart. Indianapolis, Ind.: Bobbs-Merrill, 1941, 285 pp. (10493.ff.41)
DU PUY, WILLIAM A. Hawaii and Its Race Problem. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept.of the Interior, 1932, 130 pp. (A.S.190/23)
HOBBS, JEAN. Hawaii: A Pageant of the Soil. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford UniversityPress; London: Oxford University Press, 1935, 185 pp. (10493.bb.13)
SHAPIRO, HARRY L. Migration and Environment: A Study of the PhysicalCharacteristics of the Japanese Immigrants to Hawaii and the Effects of Environment on TheirDescendants. London: Oxford University Press, 1939, 594 pp. (10008.ppp.23)
SHOEMAKER, JAMES H. Labor in the Territory of Hawaii. Washington, D.C.: U.S.House Doc., 76th Congress, 3d Session, no. 848, 1940, 244 pp. (A.S.10)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. General InformationRegarding the Territory of Hawaii. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior, 1937,56 pp. (A.S.193/41); 1941, 56 pp. (A.S.193/57)
WAKUKAWA, ERNEST K. A History of the Japanese People in Hawaii. Honolulu: Toyo Shoin, 1938, 439 pp. (YA.1987.a.9620)
5. Panama Canal Zone
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in the Panama Canal Zone. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Office of Education Bulletin no. 8, 1939, 63 pp. (A.S.202)
180
DIMOCK, MARSHALL E. Government-operated Enterprises in the Panama Canal Zone. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1934, 248 pp. (Ac.2691.d/53.(1.))
PADELFORD, NORMAN J. The Panama Canal in Peace and War. New York: Macmillan, 1942, 327 pp. (X.809/28347)
6. Philippine Islands
CHURCHILL, BERNARDITA R. The Philippine Independence Missions to the UnitedStates, 1919-1934. Manila: National Historical Institute, 1983, 442 pp. (ST 310/310)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in the Philippine Islands. Washington,D.C.: U.S. Office of Education Bulletin no. 9, 1935, 53 pp. (A.S.202)
DURAN, PIO. Philippine Independence and the Far Eastern Question. Manila: Community Pub., 1935, 303 pp. (YA.1988.a.5454)
FRIEND, THEODORE. Between Two Empires: The Ordeal of the Philippines, 1929-1946. New Haven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1965, 312 pp. (Ac.2692.md; X.700/2009)
GALLEGO, MANUEL V. The Price of Philippine Independence under the Tydings-McDuffie Act. Manila: Barristers' Book Co., 1939, 732 pp. (YA.1988.b.388)
KIRK, GRAYSON L. Philippine Independence: Motives, Problems and Prospects. NewYork: Farrar & Rinehart, 1936, 278 pp. (20032.b.18)
MALCOLM, GEORGE A. The Commonwealth of the Philippines. New York andLondon: Appleton-Century, 1936, 511 pp. (010056.c.17)
MATTHEWS, M. ALICE. Philippine Independence: Select List of Books and Articles onIndependence of the Philippine Islands, Published since 1930. Washington, D.C.: CarnegieEndowment for International Peace Library, 1939, 7 pp. (YA.1990.b.8632)
OSIAS, CAMILO and MAURO BARADI. The Philippine Charter of Liberty. Baltimore, Md.: French-Bray Printing Co., 1933, 225 pp. (20018.h.34)
PHILIPPINE ISLANDS. Statistical Handbook of the Philippine Islands. Manila: Philippine Islands Dept. of Agriculture and Natural Resources, 1933, 187 pp. (S.T.220/20)
7. Puerto Rico
ARGÜELLES, MARÍA DEL PILAR. Morality and Power: The U.S. ColonialExperience in Puerto Rico from 1898 to 1948. Lanham, Md., and London: UniversityPress of America, 1996, 237 pp. (YC.1996.a.3487)
181
CLARK, TRUMAN R. Puerto Rico and the United States, 1917-1933. Pittsburgh,Pa.: University of Pittsburgh Press; London: Feffer and Simons, 1975, 238 pp. (X.809/40685)
COOK, KATHERINE M. Public Education in Puerto Rico. Washington, D.C.: U.SOffice of Education Bulletin no. 5, 1934, 52 pp. (A.S. 202)
MATHEWS, THOMAS G. Puerto Rican Politics and the New Deal. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1960, 345 pp. (X.700/365)
PUERTO RICO RECONSTRUCTION ADMINISTRATION in cooperationwith THE WORK PROJECTS ADMINISTRATION. Puerto Rico: A Guide to theIsland Boriquén. New York: University Society, 1940, 409 pp. (010481.cc.6;X.809/27669)
RECK, DAISY. Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands. New York and Toronto: Farrar &Rinehart, 1939, 241 pp. (010481.cc.3)
SÁNCHEZ KORROL, VIRGINIA E. From Colonia to Community: The History ofPuerto Ricans in New York City, 1917-1948. Westport, Conn.: Greenwood, 1983, 242pp. (X.809/67188); Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1994, 275pp. (YC.1995.a.791)
8. Virgin Islands
BOYER, WILLIAM W. Civil Liberties in the U.S. Virgin Islands, 1917-1949. St.Croix: Antilles Graphic Arts, 1982, 184 pp. (X.529/58209)
COCHRAN, HAMILTON. These Are the Virgin Islands. New York: Prentice-Hall,1937, 236 pp. (10482.h.40)
EVANS, LUTHER H. The Virgin Islands: From Naval Base to New Deal. Ann Arbor,Mich.: Edwards, 1945, 365 pp. (O8157.f.71)
RECK, DAISY. Puerto Rico and the Virgin Islands. New York and Toronto: Farrar &Rinehart, 1939, 241 pp. (010481.cc.3)
REID, CHARLES F., ed. Bibliography of the Virgin Islands of the United States. NewYork: H. W. Wilson Co., 1941, 225 pp. (11924.d.33)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. Annual Report of theGovernor of the Virgin Islands, 1931. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of the Interior,1931. (A.S.227/4)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF THE INTERIOR. General InformationRegarding the Virgin Islands of the United States. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of theInterior, 1936, 43 pp. (A.S.227/5); 1939, 53 pp. (A.S.193/52)
VIII. MILITARY AFFAIRS
182
ABBAZIA, PATRICK. Mr. Roosevelt's Navy: The Private War of the U.S. AtlanticFleet, 1939-1942. Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press, 1975, 520 pp. (X.800/28435)
ARNOLD, HENRY H. and IRA C. EAKER. This Flying Game. New York andLondon: Funk & Wagnalls, 1936, 275 pp. (08770.c.44); 2d ed., New York andLondon: Funk & Wagnalls, 1938, 307 pp. (08771.cc.15)
BLAND, LARRY I. and SHARON R. RITENOUR, eds. The Papers of GeorgeCatlett Marshall. Vol. 1, 'The Soldierly Spirit,' December 1880-June 1939. Baltimore,Md., and London: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1981. (X.0520/709(1))
BLAND, LARRY I., SHARON R. RITENOUR and CLARENCE E.WUNDERLIN, JR., eds. The Papers of George Catlett Marshall. Vol. 2, 'We CannotDelay', July 1, 1939-December 6, 1941. Baltimore, Md., and London: Johns HopkinsUniversity Press, 1986. (X.0520/709(2))
CONN, STETSON and BYRON FAIRCHILD. The Framework of HemisphericDefense. Washington, D.C.: Office of the Chief of Military History, Dept. of theArmy, 1960, 470 pp. (A.S.742/14)
CONN, STETSON, ROSE C. ENGELMAN and BYRON FAIRCHILD. Guardingthe United States and Its Outposts. Washington, D.C.: Office of the Chief of MilitaryHistory, Dept. of the Army, 1964, 593 pp. (A.S.742/14)COPP, DEWITT. A Few Great Captains: The Men and Events that Shaped theDevelopment of U.S. Air Power. Garden City, N.Y.: Doubleday, 1980, 531 pp. (X.622/16425)
COWMAN, IAN. Dominion or Decline: Anglo-American Naval Relations on the Pacific,1937-1941. Oxford: Berg, 1996, 327 pp. (YC.1997.a.3278)
DALFIUME, RICHARD M. Desegregation of the U.S. Armed Forces: Fighting on TwoFronts, 1939-1953. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1969, 252 pp. (X.809/10878)
DAVIS, GEORGE T. A Navy Second to None: The Development of Modern AmericanNaval Policy. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1940, 508 pp. (Ac.2692.mef.(2.))
DORWART, JEFFERY M. Conflict of Duty: The U.S. Navy's Intelligence Dilemma,1919-1945. Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press, 1983, 262 pp. (YC.1987.b.67)
GRIFFITH, ROBERT K. Men Wanted for the U.S. Army: America's Experience with anAll-Volunteer Army Between the World Wars. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1982, 259 pp. (X.800/35352)
HARROD, FREDERICK S. Manning the New Navy: The Development of a ModernNaval Enlisted Force, 1899-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1978,276 pp. (X.800/27650)
183
HUZAR, ELIAS. The Purse and the Sword: Control of the Army by Congress throughMilitary Appropriations, 1933-1950. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1950, 417pp. (8175.dd.13)
JAKEMAN, ROBERT J. The Divided Skies: Establishing Segregated Flight Training atTuskegee, Alabama, 1934-1942. Tuscaloosa and London: University of Alabama Press,1992, 416 pp. (YC.1997.a.977)
JAMES, D. CLAYTON. The Years of MacArthur. Vol. 1, 1880-1941. London: LeoCooper, 1970. (X.0809/396)
KELSEY, BENJAMIN S. The Dragon's Teeth? The Creation of United States Air Powerfor World War II. Washington, D.C.: Smithsonian Institution Press, 1982, 148 pp. (X.800/43223)
LEUTZE, JAMES. Bargaining for Supremacy: Anglo-American Naval Collaboration,1937-1941. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina, 1977, 328 pp. (X.800/28720)
LINN, BRIAN M. Guardians of Empire: The U.S. Army and the Pacific, 1902-1940. Chapel Hill and London: University of North Carolina Press, 1997, 343 pp. (YA.1998.b.1764)
MACARTHUR, DOUGLAS. Reminiscences. London: Heinemann, 1964, 438 pp. (X.631/109)
MCFARLAND, KEITH D. Harry H. Woodring: A Political Biography of FDR'sControversial Secretary of War. Lawrence: University Press of Kansas, 1975, 346 pp. (X.800/28060)
MAROLDA, EDWARD J., ed. FDR and the U.S. Navy. New York: St. Martin'sPress, 1998, 202 pp. (DSC 98/32346)
MATLOFF, MAURICE. Mr. Roosevelt's Three Wars: FDR as War Leader. ColoradoSprings, Colo.: U.S. Air Force Academy, 1964, 21 pp. (A.S.1030/4)
MAURER, MAURER. Aviation in the U.S. Army, 1919-1939. Washington, D.C.: Office of Air Force History, U.S. Air Force, 1987, 626 pp. (DSC OP-US/6443)
MILLER, EDWARD S. War Plan Orange: The U.S. Strategy to Defeat Japan, 1897-1945. Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press, 1991, 509 pp. (YC.1994.b.430)
PARRISH, THOMAS. Roosevelt and Marshall: Partners in Politics and War. NewYork: Morrow, 1989, 608 pp. (DSC 89/30260)
PATTON, GERALD W. War and Race: The Black Officer in the American Military,1915-1941. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1981, 214 pp. (X.529/47051)
184
POGUE, FORREST C. George C. Marshall: Education of a General, 1880-1939. London: MacGibbon & Kee, 1964, 447 pp. (X.0631/1)
POGUE, FORREST C. George C. Marshall: Ordeal and Hope, 1939-1942. London: MacGibbon & Kee, 1968, 491 pp. (X.0631/1.(2.))
RICHARDSON, JAMES O., AS TOLD TO GEORGE C. DYER, JR. On theTreadmill to Pearl Harbor: The Memoirs of Admiral James O. Richardson. Washington,D.C.: Office of Naval History, Navy Dept.,1973, 558 pp. (A.S.332/38)
SIMPSON, B. MITCHELL. Admiral Harold R. Stark: Architect of Victory, 1939-1945. Columbia: University of South Carolina Press, 1989, 326 pp. (DSC 89/19023)
UNDERWOOD, JEFFERY S. The Wings of Democracy: The Influence of Air Power onthe Roosevelt Administration, 1933-1941. College Station: Texas A&M UniversityPress, 1991, 234 pp. (YA.1993.b.6174)
VILLARD, OSWALD G. Our Military Chaos: The Truth about Defense. New Yorkand London: Knopf, 1939, 202 pp. (8011.b.2)
WATSON, MARK S. The War Department: Chief of Staff: Prewar Plans andPreparations. Washington, D.C.: Historical Division, Dept. of the Army, 1950, 551pp. (A.S.742/1)WHEELER, GERALD E. Prelude to Pearl Harbor: The United States Navy and the FarEast, 1921-1931. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1963, 212 pp. (X.631/301); Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1968, 211 pp. (X.709/24790)
WILSON, JOHN R. M. Herbert Hoover and the Armed Forces: A Study of PresidentialAttitudes and Policy. New York and London: Garland, 1993, 275 pp. (YC.1993.b.5264)
IX. FOREIGN RELATIONS
A. GENERAL STUDIES
ADAMS, FREDERICK C. Economic Diplomacy: The Export-Import Bank and AmericanForeign Policy, 1934-1939. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1976, 289 pp. (X.520/11681)
ADLER, SELIG. The Uncertain Giant: 1921-1941: American Foreign Policy Between theWars. New York: Macmillan; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1965, 340 pp. (X.709/3051); New York: Collier Books; London: Collier-Macmillan, 1969, 340 pp. (X.708/5624)
AMBROSE, STEPHEN E. Rise to Globalism: American Foreign Policy since 1938. London: Allen Lane, 1971, 352 pp. (X.800/5812); Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1973,352 pp. (X.708/10640)
185
BARBER, WILLIAM J. Designs within Disorder: Franklin D. Roosevelt, the Economistsand the Shaping of American Foreign Policy, 1933-1945. Cambridge: CambridgeUniversity Press, 1996, 178 pp. (YC.1997.b.200)
BEARD, CHARLES A. American Foreign Policy in the Making, 1932-1940: A Study inResponsibilities. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1946, 336 pp. (9617.c.10)
BECKETT, GRACE. The Reciprocal Trade Agreements Program. New York: Columbia University Press, 1941, 142 pp. (8222.bb.23)
BLOOMFIELD, ARTHUR I. Capital Imports and the American Balance of Payments,1934-39: A Study in Abnormal International Capital Transfers. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1950, 340 pp. (8230.bb.47)
BUELL, RAYMOND L. The Hull Trade Program and the American System. NewYork: Foreign Policy Association, 1938, 48 pp. (Mic.A.12246(7))
BUTLER, MICHAEL A. Cautious Visionary: Cordell Hull and Trade Reform, 1933-1937. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1998, 240 pp. (DSC98/29466)
COLE, WAYNE S. Determinism and American Foreign Relations during the Franklin D.Roosevelt Era. Lanham, Md., and London: University Press of America, 1995, 110 pp. (YC.1997.a.2348)
CRAIG, GORDON A. AND FELIX GILBERT, eds. The Diplomats, 1919-1939. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1953, 700 pp. (8009.1.21)
CULBERT, DAVID H. News for Everyman: Radio and Foreign Affairs in ThirtiesAmerica. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 238 pp. (X.809/42065)
DALLEK, ROBERT. Franklin D. Roosevelt and American Foreign Policy, 1932-1945. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 657 pp. (X:809/44883); Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 657 pp. (X.808/34988); New York andOxford: Oxford University Press, 1979, 671 pp. (YC.1995.a.3878)
DESMOND, ROBERT W. Crisis and Conflict: World News Reporting between TwoWars, 1920-1940. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press, 1982, 518 pp. (2708.e.1416)
DEXTER, BYRON, ed. The Foreign Affairs Bibliography: New Evaluations ofSignificant Books on International Relations, 1920-1970. New York and London: published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Bowker, 1972, 936 pp. (X.800/13802)
DUBOFSKY, MELVYN and STEPHEN BURWOOD, eds. American Foreign Policyin the 1930s. New York and London: Garland, 1990, 261 pp. (YC.1991.b.561)
EDWARDS, JEROME E. The Foreign Policy of Colonel McCormick's Tribune, 1929-1941. Reno: University of Nevada Press, 1971, 232 pp. (X.981/4748)
186
FEIS, HERBERT. The Diplomacy of the Dollar: First Era, 1919-1932. Baltimore,Md.: Johns Hopkins Press, 1950, 81 pp. (Ac.2689/5)
FEIS, HERBERT. 1933: Characters in Crisis. Boston, Toronto: Little, Brown, 1966,366 pp. (X.709/6925)
FERRELL, ROBERT H. American Diplomacy in the Great Depression: Hoover-StimsonForeign Policy, 1929-1933. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1957, 319 pp. (Ac.2692.md)
FLEMING, DENNA F. The United States and the World Court, 1920-1966. Rev. ed.,New York: Russell & Russell, 1968, 233 pp. (X.808/6794)
FLEMING, DENNA F. The United States and World Organization, 1920-1933. NewYork: Columbia University Press, 1938, 569 pp. (08286.k.15)
FLYNN, GEORGE Q. Roosevelt and Romanism: Catholics and American Diplomacy,1937-1945. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 268 pp. (X.809/42032)
GARDNER, LLOYD C. Economic Aspects of New Deal Diplomacy. Madison: University of Wisconsin, 1964, 409 pp. (X.700/2309)
HALASZ, NICHOLAS. Roosevelt Through Foreign Eyes. Princeton, N.J.: VanNostrand, 1961, 340 pp. (10866.cc.26)
HEALD, MORREL. Transatlantic Vistas: American Journalists in Europe, 1900-1940. Kent, Ohio, and London: Kent State University Press, 1988, 281 pp. (YH.1989.b.592)
HIGHAM, CHARLES. Trading with the Enemy: An Exposé of the Nazi-AmericanMoney Plot, 1933-1949. London: Hale, 1983, 277 pp. (X.809/57463)
HILTON, STANLEY E. Brazil and the Great Powers, 1930-1939: The Politics of TradeRivalry. Austin and London: University of Texas Press, 1976, 304 pp. (X.800/12344;X.0700/112 (38))
HOSLEY, DAVID H. As Good as Any: Foreign Correspondence on American Radio,1930-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1984, 165pp. (X.809/65044)
JABLON, HOWARD. Crossroads of Decision: The State Department and Foreign Policy,1933-1937. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1983, 182 pp. (X.809/60658)
KANAWADA, LEO V. Franklin D. Roosevelt's Diplomacy and American Catholics,Italians and Jews. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research; Epping: Bowker, 1982, 184 pp. (X.800/35588)
187
KENNAN, GEORGE F. From Prague after Munich: Diplomatic Papers, 1938-1940. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1968, 266 pp. (X.709/7079;X.709/12668)
KENNAN, GEORGE F. Memoirs, 1925-1950. London: Hutchinson, 1968, 583 pp. (X.700/2743)
KENNEDY, THOMAS C. Charles A. Beard and American Foreign Policy. Gainesville: University Press of Florida, 1975, 199 pp. (X.800/28643)
KOTTMAN, RICHARD N. Reciprocity and the North Atlantic Triangle, 1932-1938. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1968, 294 pp. (X.519/6146)
KRENN, MICHAEL L., ed. Race and U.S. Foreign Policy from 1900 through WorldWar II. New York and London: Garland, 1998, 354 pp. (YC.1999.b.652)
LANGER, WILLIAM L. and S. EVERETT GLEASON. The Challenge to Isolation: The World Crisis of 1937-1940 and American Foreign Policy. 2 vols. New York: Harperand Row, 1964, 794 pp. (X.709/1379)
LEIGH, MICHAEL. Mobilizing Consent: Public Opinion and American Foreign Policy,1937-1947. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 187 pp. (X.809/42070)
LEWIS, CLEONA. America's Stake in International Investments. Washington, D.C.: Institute of Economics, 1938, 710 pp. (Ac.2391.(13.))
LOCKWOOD, WILLIAM W. The Foreign Trade Policy of the United States. NewYork: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 58 pp. (Ac.1915.b.)
LOCKWOOD, WILLIAM W. Trade and Trade Rivalry between the United States andJapan. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 66 pp. (Ac.1915.b)
LONG, BRECKINRIDGE. The War Diary of Breckinridge Long: Selections from theYears 1939-1944. Edited by Fred L. Israel. Lincoln: University of Nebraska Press,1966, 410 pp. (X.700/3119)
MADDEN, JOHN T., MARCUS NADLER and HARRY C. SAUVAIN. America'sExperience as a Creditor Nation. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1937, 333 pp. (Mic.A.8712)
MARKS, FREDERICK W., III. Wind over Sand: The Diplomacy of Franklin Roosevelt. Athens and London: University of Georgia Press, 1988, 462 pp. (YC.1988.b.8022;YC.1991.b.1271)
MINNEN, CORNELIS A. VAN and JOHN F. SEARS, eds. FDR and HisContemporaries: Foreign Perceptions of an American President. Basingstoke: Macmillan,1992, 248 pp. (YC.1993.a.919)
188
MOFFAT, JAY P. The Moffat Papers: Selections from the Diplomatic Journals of JayPierrepont Moffat, 1919-1943. Edited by Nancy H. Hooker. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1956, 408 pp. (8178.c.5)
MURESIANU, JOHN M. American Intellectuals and the World Crisis, 1938-1945. New York and London: Garland, 1988, 483 pp. (YC.1991.b.4869)
MYERS, WILLIAM S. The Foreign Policies of Herbert Hoover, 1929-1933. New Yorkand London: Scribner's, 1940, 259 pp. (08004.ee.59)
NEVINS, J. ALLAN. The New Deal and World Affairs: A Chronicle of InternationalAffairs, 1933-1945. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1950, 332 pp. (W.P.14751/56)
NEVINS, J. ALLAN and LOUIS M. HACKER, eds. The United States and Its Place inWorld Affairs, 1918-1943. Boston: Heath, 1943, 612 pp. (9617.aa.21)
NEVINS, J. ALLAN. The United States in a Chaotic World: A Chronicle of InternationalAffairs, 1918-1933. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1950, 252 pp. (X.709/1384.(55.))NINKOVICH, FRANK A. The Diplomacy of Ideas: U.S. Foreign Policy and CulturalRelations, 1938-1950. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1981, 253pp. (X.800/30372)
NIXON, EDGAR B., ed. Franklin D. Roosevelt and Foreign Affairs, March 1933-January 1937. 3 vols. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,1969. (X.0702/111); Donald B. Shewe, ed. Franklin D. Roosevelt and Foreign Affairs. Second series, January 1937-August 1939. Vol. 17, Index. Edited by Daryl L. Revoldt. New York and Toronto: Clearwater Pub. Co., 1983. (X.805/5362)
OLSSON, CHRISTER. Congress and the Executive: The Making of United StatesForeign Policy, 1933-1940. Stockholm: Esselte Studium, 1982, 209 pp. (X.0709/430(16))
OSTROWER, GARY B. Collective Insecurity: The United States and the League ofNations during the Early Thirties. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press; London: Associated University Presses, 1979, 287 pp. (X.809/50272; X.809/58058)
PHILLIPS, WILLIAM. Ventures in Diplomacy. London: John Murray, 1955, 308 pp. (10864.df.48)
PLUMMER, BRENDA G. Rising Wind: Black Americans and U.S. Foreign Affairs,1935-1960. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1996, 423 pp. (DSC96/19793)
RANDALL, STEPHEN J. United States Foreign Oil Policy, 1919-1948: For Profits andSecurity. Kingston and Montreal: McGill-Queen's University Press, 1985, 328 pp. (DSC 85/17019)
189
RANGE, WILLARD. Franklin D. Roosevelt's World Order. Athens: University ofGeorgia Press, 1959, 219 pp. (9105.c.15)
RAUCH, BASIL. Roosevelt: From Munich to Pearl Harbor: A Study in the Creation of aForeign Policy. New York: Da Capo, 1967, 527 pp. (X.809/65584)
RIGGS, A. R. and TOM VELK. Cordell Hull, The New Deal, and Inter-AmericanTrade. Montreal: Dept. of Economics, McGill University, 1993, 17 pp. (DSC9349.7383 2/93)
ROBERTS, JOHN W. Putting Foreign Policy to Work: The Role of Organized Labor inAmerican Foreign Relations, 1932-1941. New York: Garland, 1995, 322 pp. (DSC95/35655)
ROWLAND, BENJAMIN M. Commercial Conflict and Foreign Policy: A Study inAnglo-American Relations, 1932-1938. New York: Garland, 1987, 431 pp. (YC.1988.a.8209)
STALEY, ALVAH E. Raw Materials in Peace and War. New York: Council onForeign Relations, 1937, 326 pp. (8290.d.18)SCHATTSCHNEIDER, ELMER E. Politics, Pressures and the Tariff: A Study of FreePrivate Enterprise in Pressure Politics, as Shown in the 1929-1930 Revision of the Tariff. New York: Prentice-Hall, 1935, 301 pp. (20030.c.1)
STEWARD, DICK. Trade and Hemisphere: The Good Neighbor Policy and ReciprocalTrade. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1975, 307 pp. (X.520/11498)
TASCA, HENRY J. The Reciprocal Trade Policy of the United States: A Study in TradePhilosophy. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1938, 371 pp. (8231.f.4)
TAYLOR, ALONZO E. The New Deal and Foreign Trade. New York: Macmillan,1935, 301 pp. (8231.aa.14; 8232.b.44)
WALLACE, BENJAMIN B. and LYNN R. EDMINSTER. International Control ofRaw Materials. Washington, D.C.: Brookings Institution, 1930, 479 pp. (8224.aa.34)
WALLACE, HENRY A. America Must Choose: The Advantages and Disadvantages ofNationalism, of World Trade and of a Planned Middle Course. New York: Foreign PolicyAssociation; Boston: World Peace Foundation, 1934, 33 pp. (X.510/993)
WILSON, HUGH R. Diplomat Between the Wars. New York and Toronto: Longmans, 1941, 344 pp. (10888.d.21; 9100.b.37)
B. APPROACH TO ENTRY INTO SECOND WORLD WAR
BARRON, GLORIA J. Leadership in Crisis: FDR and the Path to Intervention. NewYork and London: Kennikat Press, 1973, 145 pp. (X.800/8830)
190
BEARD, CHARLES A. President Roosevelt and the Coming of War, 1941: A Study inAppearances and Realities. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1948, 614 pp. (YA.1993.b.7893)
DIVINE, ROBERT A. The Reluctant Belligerent: American Entry into World War II. New York: Wiley, 1965, 172 pp. (X.709/1834)
HEINRICHS, WALDO H. Threshold of War: Franklin D. Roosevelt and AmericanEntry into World War II. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1988, 279pp. (YH.1989.b.793; 1991.a.3256)
KETCHUM, RICHARD M. The Borrowed Years, 1938-1941: America on the Way toWar. New York: Random House, 1989, 896 pp. (DSC 90/07233)
KINSELLA, WILLIAM E. Leadership in Isolation: FDR and the Origins of the SecondWorld War. Boston: G. K. Hall, 1978, 282 pp. (X.800/28430)
MURESIANU, JOHN M. American Intellectuals and the World Crisis, 1938-1945. New York and London: Garland, 1988, 483 pp. (YC.1991.b.4869)
OFFNER, ARNOLD A., ed. The Origins of the Second World War: American ForeignPolicy and World Politics, 1917-1941. New York: Praeger, 1975, 268 pp. (X.800/28522)
RUPP, LEILA J. Mobilizing Women for War: German and American Propaganda, 1939-1945. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1978, 243 pp. (X.809/43415)
RUSSETT, BRUCE M. No Clear and Present Danger: A Skeptical View of the U.S.Entry into World War II. Boulder, Colo., and Oxford: Westview, 1997, 111 pp. (YC.1998.a.533)
SMITH, GEOFFREY S. To Save a Nation: American Countersubversives, the New Deal and the Coming of World War II. New York: Basic Books, 1973, 244 pp. (X.800/9320; X.800/8482)
TANSILL, CHARLES C. Back Door to War: The Roosevelt Foreign Policy, 1933-1941. Chicago: Regnery, 1952, 690 pp. (8177.m.26)
C. ISOLATIONISM, PACIFISM AND NEUTRALITY
ADLER, SELIG. The Isolationist Impulse: Its Twentieth-Century Reaction. London andNew York: Abelard-Schuman, 1957, 538 pp. (9617.1.11)
BAIGELL, MATTHEW and JULIA WILLIAMS, eds. Artists Against War and Fascism: Papers of the First American Artists' Congress. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers UniversityPress, 1985, 310 pp. (DSC 89/09287)
191
BRADLEY, PHILLIPS. Can We Stay out of War? New York: Norton, 1936, 288pp. (08008.aa.54)
BUELL, RAYMOND L. Isolated America. 2d ed., New York and London: Knopf,1940, 457 pp. (9617.aa.9)
CHATFIELD, CHARLES. For Peace and Justice: Pacifism in America, 1914-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1971, 447 pp. (X.800/8033)
COLE, WAYNE S. Roosevelt and the Isolationists, 1932-45. Lincoln: University ofNebraska Press, 1983, 698 pp. (X.800/42365)
COLE, WAYNE S. Senator Gerald P. Nye and American Foreign Relations. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1963, 293 pp. (9317.i.13)
CRECRAFT, EARL W. Freedom of the Seas. New York and London: Appleton-Century, 1935, 304 pp. (6836.ee.17) DAVIDSON, FRANK P. and GEORGE S. VIERECK, eds. Before America Decides: Foresight in Foreign Affairs. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1938, 318 pp. (08004.ee.10)
DE CONDE, ALEXANDER, ed. Isolation and Security. Durham, N.C.: DukeUniversity Press, 1957, 204 pp. (8178.c.20)
DIVINE, ROBERT A. The Illusion of Neutrality. Chicago: University of ChicagoPress, 1962, 370 pp. (09059.m.39)
DOENECKE, JUSTUS D. Anti-intervention: A Bibliographical Introduction toIsolationism and Pacifism from World War I to the Early Cold War. New York andLondon: Garland, 1987, 421 pp. (YC.1992.a.1232)
DRUMMOND, DONALD F. The Passing of American Neutrality, 1937-1941. AnnArbor: University of Michigan Press, 1955, 409 pp. (Ac.2685/33)
DULLES, ALLEN W. and HAMILTON F. WELSH. Can America Stay Neutral? New York and London: Harper, 1939, 277 pp. (20033.ff.25)
DULLES, ALLEN W. and HAMILTON F. WELSH. Can We Be Neutral? 2d ed.,New York: published for the Council on Foreign Relations by Harper, 1936, 192 pp. (8177.k.37)
DULLES, JOHN FOSTER. War, Peace and Change. New York and London: Harper, 1939, 170 pp. (8425.s.43); London: Macmillan, 1939, 170 pp. (8425.s.56)
FENWICK, CHARLES C. American Neutrality: Trial and Failure. New York: NewYork University Press; London: Oxford University Press, 1940, 190 pp. (Ac.2686.ca.(8.))
192
HOOVER, HERBERT C. Shall We Send Our Youth to War? New York: Coward-McCann, 1939, 36 pp. (8011.aa.3)
JESSUP, PHILIP C. International Security: The American Role in Collective Action forPeace. New York: Council on Foreign Relations, 1935, 157 pp. (8011.c.62)
JOHNSON, WALTER. The Battle Against Isolationism. Chicago: University ofChicago Press, 1944, 269 pp. (08176.a.52)
JONAS, MANFRED. Isolationism in America, 1935-1941. Ithaca, N.Y.: CornellUniversity Press, 1966, 315 pp. (X.709/4266)
MATTHEWS, MARY ALICE, comp. The Peace Movement: Select List of References onthe Work of National and International Organizations for the Advancement of Peace, withSpecial Attention to the Movement in the United States. Washington, D.C.: CarnegieEndowment for International Peace Library, 1940, 67 pp. (Mic.A.10146)
NELSON, JOHN K. The Peace Prophets: American Pacifist Thought, 1919-1941. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1967, 153 pp. (Ac.2685.k/4)
POWASKI, RONALD E. Toward an Entangling Alliance: American Isolationism,Internationalism and Europe, 1901-1950. New York and London: Greenwood, 1991,288 pp. (YC.1991.b.2970)
SCHACHT, JOHN N., ed. Three Faces of Midwestern Isolationism: Gerald P. Nye,Robert E. Wood, John L. Lewis. Iowa City, Iowa: Center for the Study of the RecentHistory of the United States, 1981, 72 pp. (X.809/67229)
SCHNEIDER, JAMES C. Should America Go to War? The Debate over Foreign Policy inChicago, 1939-1941. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1989, 289 pp. (YC.1989.b.5934)
SEAVEY, JAMES M. Neutrality Legislation in the United States. Washington, D.C.: J.M. Seavey, 1939, 129 pp. (Mic.A.12380)
THOMAS, NORMAN M. and BERTRAM D. WOLFE. Keep America Out of War: A Program. New York: Frederick A. Stokes, 1939, 184 pp. (Mic.A.10024)
VILLARD, OSWALD G. Our Military Chaos: The Truth about Defense. New Yorkand London: Knopf, 1939, 202 pp. (8011.b.2)
WILTZ, JOHN E. From Isolation to War, 1931-1941. London: Routledge & KeganPaul, 1968, 152 pp. (X.709/7722)
WRIGHT, PHILIP QUINCY, ed. Neutrality and Collective Security: Lectures on theHarris Foundation 1936. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1936, 276 pp. (08008.aa.44)
D. ARMAMENTS AND NAVAL LIMITATION
193
COULTER, MATTHEW W. The Senate Munitions Inquiry of the 1930s: Beyond theMerchants of Death. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1977, 182 pp. (YC.1998.b.198)
DETZER, DOROTHY. Appointment on the Hill. New York: Henry Holt, 1948,262 pp. (10891.aa.21)
ENGELBRECHT, HELMUTH C. and FRANK C. HANIGHEN. Merchants ofDeath: A Study of the International Armament Industry. London: Routledge, 1934, 312pp. (08425.ee.66)
KAUFMAN, ROBERT G. Arms Control during the Pre-Nuclear Era: The United Statesand Naval Limitation between the Two World Wars. New York: Columbia UniversityPress, 1990, 289 pp. (DSC 90/17239)
O'CONNOR, RAYMOND G. Perilous Equilibrium: The United States and the LondonNaval Conference of 1930. Lawrence: University of Kansas Press, 1962, 188 pp. (X.631/523); New York: Greenwood, 1969, 188 pp. (X.800/4471)
STEDMAN, MURRAY S. Exporting Arms: The Federal Arms Exports Administration,1935-1945. New York: Kings Crown Press, 1947, 150 pp. (08425.f.99)
UNITED STATES DEPARTMENT OF STATE. The London Naval Conference,1935: Report of the Delegates of the United States of America, Text of the London NavalTreaty of 1936 and Other Documents. Washington, D.C.: U.S. Dept. of State, 1936,444 pp. (A.S.420/45)
WILTZ, JOHN E. In Search of Peace: The Senate Munitions Inquiry, 1934-1936. BatonRouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1963, 277 pp. (X.631/703)
E. IMMIGRATION, REFUGEES, JEWS AND THEHOLOCAUST [See also V.K.4. Social History: Racial andEthnic Groups: Jews]
ADAMIC, LOUIS. America and the Refugees. New York: Public Affairs Committee,1939, 32 pp. (8288.f.13)
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. In Defense of La Raza: The Los Angeles MexicanConsulate and the Mexican Community, 1929 to 1936. Tucson: University of ArizonaPress, 1982, 137 pp. (YA.1989.a.16903)
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. and RAYMOND RODRÍGUEZ. Decade ofBetrayal: Mexican Repatriation in the 1930s. Albuquerque: University of New MexicoPress, 1995, 283 pp. (DSC 95/30384)
BAUER, YEHUDA. American Jewry and the Holocaust: The American Jewish JointDistribution Committee, 1939-1945. Jerusalem: Institute of Contemporary Jewry,Hebrew University, 1981, 522 pp. (DSC 81/18775)
194
BAUER, YEHUDA. My Brother's Keeper: A History of the American Jewish JointDistribution Committee, 1929-1939. Philadelphia: Jewish Publication Society ofAmerica, 1974, 350 pp. (X.809/43744)
BERMAN, AARON. Nazism, the Jews and American Zionism, 1933-1948. Detroit,Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1990, 238 pp. (YA.1992.b.2475)
BRECHER, FRANK W. Reluctant Ally: United States Foreign Policy toward the Jewsfrom Wilson to Roosevelt. New York and London: Greenwood, 1991, 168 pp. (YC.1992.b.1264)
CATT, CARRIE CHAPMAN. Asylum for Refugees under our Immigration Laws. NewYork: Committee of Ten, 1934, 32 pp. (8286.d.31)
CHENG, LUCIE and EDNA BONACICH, eds. Labor Immigration under Capitalism: Asian Workers in the United States before World War II. Berkeley and London: University of California Press, 1984, 634pp. (X.800/41614)
DAVIE, MAURICE R. World Immigration: With Special Reference to the United States. New York: Macmillan, 1936, 588 pp. (8287.c.19)
DIVINE, ROBERT A. American Immigration Policy, 1924-1952. New Haven, Conn.: Yale University Press, 1957, 220 pp. (Ac.2692.md/3)
FEINGOLD, HENRY L. The Politics of Rescue: The Roosevelt Administration and theHolocaust, 1938-1945. New Brunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1970, 394 pp. (X.800/6805)
FERMI, LAURA. Illustrious Immigrants: The Intellectual Migration from Europe, 1930-41. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1968, 440 pp. (X.800/3238)
FIELDS, HAROLD. The Refugee in the United States. New York: Oxford UniversityPress, 1938, 229 pp. (08286.ee.33)
FLEMING, DONALD and BERNARD BAILYN, eds. The Intellectual Migration,Europe and America, 1930-1960. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of HarvardUniversity Press, 1969, 748 pp. (X.800/3982)
FRIEDMAN, SAUL S. No Haven for the Oppressed: United States Policy toward JewishRefugees, 1938-1945. Detroit, Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1973, 315 pp. (X.800/11011)
GUROCK, JEFFREY S., ed. America, American Jews and the Holocaust. New Yorkand London: Routledge, 1998, 486 pp. (YC.1999.b.2665)
ROSENTHAL, BERNARD M. The Gentle Invasion: Continental Emigré Booksellers ofthe Thirties and Forties and Their Impact on the Antiquarian Booktrade in the United States:
195
A Lecture Given 15 December 1986. New York: Book Arts Press, School of LibraryService, Columbia University, 1987, 17 pp. (ORW.1986.a.3519 OIOC)
HEILBUT, ANTHONY. Exiled in Paradise: German Refugee Artists and Intellectuals inAmerica, from the 1930s to the Present. Berkeley and London: University of CaliforniaPress, 1997, 524 pp. (YC.1998.a.67)
HOFFMAN, ABRAHAM. Unwanted Mexican Americans in the Great Depression: Repatriation Pressures, 1929-1939. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1976, 207 pp. (X.700/25335)
HUGHES, H. STUART. The Sea Change: The Migration of Social Thought, 1930-1965. New York and London: Harper and Row, 1975, 283 pp. (X.809/45874)
KAUFMAN, MENAHEM. An Ambiguous Partnership: Non-Zionists and Zionists inAmerica, 1939-1948. Jerusalem: Magnes Press, Hebrew University, 1991, 418 pp. (YA.1993.b.8665)
KENT, DONALD P. The Refugee Intellectual: The Americanization of the Immigrants of1933-1941. New York: Columbia University Press, 1953, 317 pp. (10414.cc.15)
LIPSTADT, DEBORAH E. Beyond Belief: The American Press and the Coming of theHolocaust, 1933-1945. New York: Free Press, 1986, 370 pp. (DSC 85/35303)
LOOKSTEIN, HASKEL. Were We Our Brothers' Keepers? The Public Response ofAmerican Jews to the Holocaust, 1938-1944. New York: Hartmore House, 1985, 287pp. (DSC 86/10994)
NAWYN, WILLIAM E. American Protestantism's Response to Germany's Jews andRefugees, 1933-1941. Ann Arbor, Mich.: UMI Research, 1981, 330 pp. (X.200/37416)
NEWTON, VERNE W., ed. FDR and the Holocaust. New York: St. Martin's Press,1996, 278 pp. (YA.1997.a.8147)
REISLER, MARK. By the Sweat of Their Brow: Mexican Immigrant Labor in the UnitedStates, 1900-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 298 pp. (X.529/31635)
ROSS, ROBERT W. So It Was True: The American Protestant Press and the NaziPersecution of the Jews. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1980, 374 pp. (X.800/33555)
SHAPIRO, HARRY L. Migration and Environment: A Study of the PhysicalCharacteristics of the Japanese Immigrants to Hawaii and the Effects of Environment on TheirDescendants. London: Oxford University Press, 1939, 594 pp. (10008.ppp.23)
196
STRAUSS, HERBERT A., ed. Jewish Immigrants of the Nazi Period in the USA. 6vols. New York and London: Saur, 1978-1987. (vols. 1-3, 5-6: X.0800/1550; vol.4: DSC 93/01718-9)
UNITED JEWISH APPEAL. Report to American Jews on Overseas Relief, Palestine andRefugees in the United States. New York and London: Harper, 1942, 92 pp. (X.808/35095)
WYMAN, DAVID S. Paper Walls: America and the Refugee Crisis, 1938-1941. Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1968, 306 pp. (X.800/4942)
F. SPECIFIC AREAS
1. Regionsa. Asia
ALDRICH, RICHARD J. The Key to the South: Britain, the United States andThailand during the Approach of the Pacific War, 1929-1942. Kuala Lumpur, Oxford andNew York: Oxford University Press, 1993, 416 pp. (YC.1993.a.4357)
ANDERSON, IRVINE H., JR. The Standard-Vacuum Oil Company and United StatesEast Asian Policy, 1933-1941. Princeton, N.J., and London: Princeton UniversityPress, 1975, 260 pp. (X.809/40412)
BEN-ZVI, ABRAHAM. The Illusion of Deterrence: The Roosevelt Presidency and theOrigins of the Pacific War. Boulder, Colo., and London: Westview, 1987, 136pp. (YC.1988.a.6970)
BISSON, T. A. American Policy in the Far East, 1931-1940. New York: InternationalSecretariat, Institute of Pacific Relations, 1940, 162 pp. (09059.c.19.(1);09059.c.19(2))
BORG, DOROTHY. The United States and the Far Eastern Crisis of 1933-1938: Fromthe Manchurian Incident through the Initial Stage of the Undeclared Sino-Japanese War. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1964, 674 pp. (15235.a.99/14)
BORG, DOROTHY and SHUMPEI OKAMOTO. Pearl Harbor as History: Japanese-American Relations, 1931-1941. New York and London: Columbia University Press,1973, 801 pp. (Ac.2688.q./10.(22.); Ac.2688.q/10.(27.))
BURNS, RICHARD D. and EDWARD M. BENNETT, eds. Diplomats in Crisis: United States-Chinese-Japanese Relations, 1919-1941. Santa Barbara, Calif.: ABC-Clio,1974, 346 pp. (X.800/25318)
CONROY, HILARY and HARRY WRAY, eds. Pearl Harbor Reexamined: Prologueto the Pacific War. Honolulu: University of Hawaii Press, 1990, 200 pp. (DSC90/14786)
197
DOENECKE, JUSTUS D., comp. The Diplomacy of Frustration: The Manchurian Crisisof 1931-1933, as Revealed in the Papers of Stanley K. Hornbeck. Stanford, Calif.: HooverInstitution Press, 1981, 214 pp. (X.800/32705)
DOENECKE, JUSTUS D. When the Wicked Rise: American Opinion-Makers and theManchurian Crisis of 1931-1933. Lewisburg, Pa.: Bucknell University Press; Cranbury,N.J.: Associated University Presses, 1984, 188 pp. (DSC 84/09921)
ESTHUS, RAYMOND A. From Enmity to Alliance: U.S.-Australian Relations, 1931-1941. Seattle: University of Washington Press, 1964, 180 pp. (X.709/4393)
FEIS, HERBERT. The Road to Pearl Harbor: The Coming of War between the UnitedStates and Japan. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1950, 356 pp. (09059.k.2) GREW, JOSEPH C. Ten Years in Japan. London: Hammond, 1944, 480 pp. (09059.b.19; T3342); New York: Simon and Schuster, 1944, 554 pp. (9059.df.35)
GREW, JOSEPH C. Turbulent Era: A Diplomatic Record of Forty Years, 1904-1945. Edited by Walter Johnson. 2 vols. London: Hammond, 1953. (10889.b.27)
GRISWOLD, A. WHITNEY. The Far Eastern Policy of the United States. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1939, 530 pp. (Ac.2692.mef.(1))
HEINRICHS, WALDO H. American Ambassador: Joseph C. Grew and the Developmentof the United States Diplomatic Tradition. Boston and Toronto: Little, Brown, 1966, 460pp. (X.800/4038); New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1986, 460 pp. (YC.1987.a.10183)
HERZOG, JAMES H. Closing the Open Door: American-Japanese DiplomaticNegotiations, 1936-1941. Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press, 1973, 295 pp. (YA.1989.b.7911)
IRIYE, AKIRA. After Imperialism: The Search for a New Order in the Far East, 1921-1931. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1965, 375 pp. (15235.a.99/22)
IRIYE, AKIRA. The Origins of the Second World War in Asia and the Pacific. London: Longman, 1987, 375 pp. (YC.1987.a.4422; YK.1989.a.772)
IRIYE, AKIRA and WARREN COHEN, eds. American, Chinese and JapanesePerspectives on Wartime Asia, 1931-1939. Wilmington, Del.: SR Books, 1990, 308 pp. (DSC 90/16191)
JOHNSTONE, WILLIAM C. The United States and Japan's New Order. Rev. ed.,New York: Oxford University Press, 1941, 403 pp. (9010.bb.15)
KESARIS, PAUL. The MAGIC Documents: Summaries and Transcripts of the Top SecretDiplomatic Communications of Japan, 1938-1945. Washington, D.C.: UniversityPublications of America, 1980. (SPR.MIC.A.169; OPL327.52)
198
KOGINOS, MANNY T. The Panay Incident: Prelude to War. Lafayette, Ind.: Purdue University Studies, 1967, 154 pp. (X.800/6594)
KUHL, STANLEY. The United States and the Far East: Certain Fundamentals of Policy. Boston: World Peace Foundation, 1942, 100 pp. (08175.bb.30)
LOCKWOOD, WILLIAM W. Trade and Trade Rivalry between the United States andJapan. New York: Institute of Pacific Relations, 1936, 66 pp. (Ac.1915.b)
MODELL, JOHN. The Economics and Politics of Racial Accommodation: The Japanese ofLos Angeles, 1900-1942. Urbana and London: University of Illinois Press, 1977, 201pp. (X.520/12488)
NEU, CHARLES E. The Troubled Encounter: The United States and Japan. New York: Wiley, 1975, 257 pp. (X.809/20607)
POOLE, PETER A. The United States and Indochina, from FDR to Nixon. Hinsdale,Ill.: Dryden Press, 1973, 247 pp. (X.709/16088)
RAPPAPORT, ARMIN. Henry L. Stimson and Japan, 1931-33. Chicago andLondon: University of Chicago Press, 1963, 238 pp. (9458.k.9)
SCHALLER, MICHAEL. The U.S. Crusade in China, 1938-1945. New York andGuildford: Columbia University Press, 1979, 364 pp. (X.800/27574; X.809/52217)
SCHROEDER, PAUL W. The Axis Alliance and Japanese-American Relations, 1941. Ithaca, N.Y.: published for the American Historical Association by Cornell UniversityPress, 1958, 246 pp. (9103.w.5)
SCHWARTZ, BRUNO. The Story of Japan in China, As Told in American Cartoons. New York: Trans-Pacific News Service, 1938, 30 pp. (20032.h.10)
SHAPIRO, HARRY L. Migration and Environment: A Study of the PhysicalCharacteristics of the Japanese Immigrants to Hawaii and the Effects of Environment on TheirDescendants. London: Oxford University Press, 1939, 594 pp. (10008.ppp.23)
STIMSON, HENRY L. The Far Eastern Crisis: Recollections and Observations. NewYork and London: Harper, 1936, 293 pp. (9059.cc.26)
THOMSON, JAMES CLAUDE. While China Faced West: American Reformers inNationalist China, 1928-1937. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1969,310 pp. (15235.a.99/38); Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1974, 310pp. (15235.a.99/38.(2.))
THORNE, CHRISTOPHER G. The Limits of Foreign Policy: The West, the Leagueand the Far Eastern Crisis of 1931-1933. London: Hamilton, 1972, 442 pp. (X.800/7278); London: Macmillan, 1973, 442 pp. (X.700/14315)
199
TUCHMAN, BARBARA W. Sand Against the Wind: Stilwell and the AmericanExperience in China, 1911-45. London: Macdonald Futura, 1981, 794 pp. (X.808/34465)
UTLEY, JONATHAN G. Going to War with Japan, 1937-1941. Knoxville: University of Tennessee Press, 1985, 238 pp. (YA.1988.a.18306)
WAKUKAWA, ERNEST K. A History of the Japanese People in Hawaii. Honolulu: Toyo Shoin, 1938, 439 pp. (YA.1987.a.9620)
b. Europe
ADAMS, DAVID K. FDR, The New Deal and Europe: Inaugural Lecture. Keele: University of Keele, 1974, 9 pp. (X.709/30023)
CLAVIN, PATRICIA. The Failure of Economic Diplomacy: Britain, Germany, Franceand the United States, 1931-36. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1996, 279 pp. (YC.1996.a.640)
COSTIGLIOLA, FRANK. Awkward Dominion: American Political, Economic andCultural Relations with Europe, 1919-1933. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press,1984, 381 pp. (DSC 85/08141)
GRAEBNER, NORMAN A. Roosevelt and the Search for a European Policy, 1937-1939: An Inaugural Lecture Delivered before the University of Oxford on 21 May 1979. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1980, 47 pp. (X.809/51313)
JONES, KENNETH P., ed. U.S. Diplomats in Europe, 1919-1941. Santa Barbara,Calif., and Oxford: ABC-Clio, 1981, 240 pp. (X.800/31889)
PAYNE, HOWARD C., RAYMOND CALLAHAN and EDWARD M.BENNETT. As the Storm Clouds Gathered: European Perceptions of American ForeignPolicy in the 1930s. Durham, N.C.: Moore Pub. Co., 1979, 173 pp. (YC.1987.b.77)
PEASE, NEAL. Poland, the United States and the Stabilization of Europe, 1919-1933. New York: Oxford University Press, 1986, 238 pp. (YH.1988.b.386)
c. Middle East
ANDERSON, IRVINE H. Aramco, the United States and Saudi Arabia: A Study of theDynamics of Foreign Oil Policy, 1933-1950. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: PrincetonUniversity Press, 1981, 259 pp. (X.529/43326; T44152 OIOC)
BARAM, PHILIP J. The Department of State in the Middle East, 1919-1945. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1978, 343 pp. (X.800/36932)
BERMAN, AARON. Nazism, the Jews and American Zionism, 1933-1948. Detroit,Mich.: Wayne State University Press, 1990, 238 pp. (YA.1992.b.2475)
200
DENOVO, JOHN A. American Interests and Policies in the Middle East, 1900-1939. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1963, 447 pp. (8184.n.4)
d. Western Hemisphere
BEMIS, SAMUEL FLAGG. The Latin American Policy of the United States: AnHistorical Interpretation. New York: Harcourt, Brace, 1943, 470 pp. (Ac.2692.mef.(5.))
BUSHNELL, DAVID. Eduardo Santos and the Good Neighbor, 1938-1942. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1967, 128 pp. (Ac.2687.hb/2)
CONN, STETSON and BYRON FAIRCHILD. The Framework of HemisphericDefense. Washington, D.C.: Office of the Chief of Military History, Dept. of theArmy, 1960, 470 pp. (A.S.742/14)
CURRY, E. R. Hoover's Dominican Diplomacy and the Origins of the Good NeighborPolicy. New York: Garland, 1979, 277 pp. (YA.1986.a.2157)
DE CONDE, ALEXANDER. Herbert Hoover's Latin-American Policy. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1951; London: Oxford University Press, 1951, 154 pp. (Ac.2692.n/12.(21.))
DOZER, DONALD M. Are We Good Neighbors? Three Decades of Inter-AmericanRelations, 1930-1960. Gainesville: University of Florida Press, 1961, 456 pp. (X.809/28662)
FEJES, FRED. Imperialism, Media and the Good Neighbor: New Deal Foreign Policy andUnited States Shortwave Broadcasting to Latin America. Norwood, N.J.: Ablex Pub.Corp., 1986, 190 pp. (DSC 86/23843)
FRYE, ALTON. Nazi Germany and the American Hemisphere, 1933-1941. NewHaven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1967, 229 pp. (Ac.2692.md/3)
GELLMAN, IRWIN F. Good Neighbor Diplomacy: United States Policies in LatinAmerica, 1933-1945. Baltimore, Md.: Johns Hopkins University Press, 1979, 296 pp. (X.800/34438)
GREEN, DAVID. The Containment of Latin America: A History of the Myths andRealities of the Good Neighbor Policy. Chicago: Quadrangle Books, 1971, 370 pp. (X.809/16033)
GROW, MICHAEL. The Good Neighbor Policy and Authoritarianism in Paraguay: United States Economic Expansion and Great-Power Rivalry in Latin America during WorldWar II. Lawrence, Kans.: Regents Press of Kansas, 1981, 163 pp. (DSC 81/21591)
GUERRANT, EDWARD O. Roosevelt's Good Neighbor Policy. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1950, 235 pp. (X.800/15109)
201
HILTON, STANLEY E. Brazil and the Great Powers, 1930-1939: The Politics of TradeRivalry. Austin and London: University of Texas Press, 1976, 304 pp. (X.800/12344;X.0700/112 (38))
HILTON, STANLEY E. Hitler's Secret War in South America, 1939-1945: GermanMilitary Espionage and Allied Counterespionage in Brazil. Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press, 1981, 353 pp. (X.800/30692)
KAMMAN, WILLIAM. A Search for Stability: United States Diplomacy towardsNicaragua, 1925-1933. Notre Dame and London: University of Notre Dame Press,1968, 263 pp. (Ac.2692.wda.(27.))KOFAS, JON V. The Struggle for Legitimacy: Latin American Labor and the United States,1930-1960. Tempe: Center for Latin American Studies, Arizona State University,1992, 425 pp. (YA.1992.b.2973; YA.1993.a.2203)
LANGLEY, LESTER D. The Banana Wars: An Inner History of American Empire,1900-1934. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1983, 255 pp. (X.800/38061);The Banana Wars: United States Intervention in the Caribbean, 1898-1934. Rev. ed.,Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1985, 255 pp. (DSC 86/23941)
MCCANN, FRANK D. The Brazilian-American Alliance, 1937-1945. Princeton,N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1973, 527 pp. (X.809/18078)
MUNRO, DANA G. The United States and the Caribbean Republics, 1921-1933. Princeton, N.J., and London: Princeton University Press, 1974, 394 pp. (X.800/9532)
NEWTON, WESLEY P. The Perilous Sky: U.S. Aviation Diplomacy and LatinAmerica, 1919-1931. Coral Gables, Fla.: University of Miami Press, 1978, 457 pp. (X.629/21066)
O'BRIEN, THOMAS F. The Revolutionary Mission: American Business in LatinAmerica, 1900-1945. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996, 356 pp. (YC.1996.b.4280)
RANDALL, STEPHEN J. The Diplomacy of Modernization: Colombian-AmericanRelations, 1920-1940. Toronto: University of Toronto Press, 1977, 239 pp. (X.800/37529)
SCHMIDT, HANS. The United States Occupation of Haiti, 1915-1934. NewBrunswick, N.J.: Rutgers University Press, 1971, 303 pp. (X.800/8232)
SCHWOCH, JAMES. The American Radio Industry and Its Latin American Activities,1900-1939. Urbana: University of Illinois Press, 1990, 184 pp. (YA.1993.b.4521)
SPECTOR, ROBERT M. W. Cameron Forbes and the Hoover Commissions to Haiti(1930). Lanham, Md., and London: University Press of America, 1985, 258 pp. (X.800/42761)
202
STEWARD, DICK. Trade and Hemisphere: The Good Neighbor Policy and ReciprocalTrade. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1975, 307 pp. (X.520/11498)
WOOD, BRYCE. The Making of the Good Neighbor Policy. New York and London: Columbia University Press, 1961, 438 pp. (9526.h.1)
WOOD, BRYCE. The United States and Latin American Wars, 1932-1942. NewYork and London: Columbia University Press, 1966, 519 pp. (X.700/1466)
2. Countriesa. Canada
DRUMMOND, IAN and NORMAN HILLMER. Negotiating Freer Trade: TheUnited Kingdom, the United States, Canada and the Free Trade Agreements of 1938. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfred Laurier University Press, 1989, 197 pp. (DSC 89/l4851)
DZIUBAN, STANLEY W. Military Relations between the United States and Canada,1939-1945. Washington, D.C.: Office of the Chief of Military History, Dept. of theArmy, 1959, 432 pp. (A.S.7412/13.(4.))
PERRAS, GALEN R. Franklin Roosevelt and the Origins of the Canadian-AmericanSecurity Alliance, 1933-1945: Necessary, but Not Necessary Enough. Westport, Conn.,and London: Praeger, 1998, 156 pp. (DSC 98/17824)
b. Cuba
FITZGIBBON, RUSSELL H. Cuba and the United States, 1900-1935. Menasha: Banta Pub. Co., 1935, 311 pp. (9771.r.4)
GELLMAN, IRWIN F. Roosevelt and Batista: Good Neighbor Diplomacy in Cuba,1933-1945. Albuquerque: University of New Mexico Press, 1973, 303 pp. (X.800/11126)
SMITH, ROBERT F. The United States and Cuba: Business and Diplomacy, 1917-60. New York: Bookman Associates, 1962, 256 pp. (9477.1.19)
c. France
ALLEN, DONALD R. French Views of America in the 1930s. New York: Garland,1979, 348 pp. (X.809/52112)
HAIGHT, JOHN M. American Aid to France, 1938-1940. New York: Atheneum,1970, 278 pp. (X.809/12960)
LEFFLER, MELVYN P. The Elusive Quest: America's Pursuit of European Stability andFrench Security, 1919-1933. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1979,409 pp. (X.800/30873)
203
ROSSI, MARIO. Roosevelt and the French. Westport, Conn., and London: Praeger,1993, 193 pp. (YC.1994.b.3631)
d. Germany [See also VI.M.2. Cultural andIntellectual History: Leisure, Recreation and Sports: Olympics]
ABBAZIA, PATRICK. Mr. Roosevelt's Navy: The Private War of the U.S. AtlanticFleet, 1939-1942. Annapolis, Md.: Naval Institute Press, 1975, 520 pp. (X.800/28435)
BAILEY, THOMAS A. and PAUL B. RYAN. Hitler vs. Roosevelt: The UndeclaredNaval War. London: Free Press, 1979, 303 pp. (X.800/31511)
BELL, LELAND V. In Hitler's Shadow: The Anatomy of American Nazism. PortWashington, N.Y., and London: Kennikat Press, 1973, 135 pp. (X.800/8554)
BENNETT, EDWARD W. German Rearmament and the West, 1932-1933. Princeton, N.J., and Guildford: Princeton University Press, 1979, 569 pp. (X.800/28865)
COMPTON, JAMES V. The Swastika and the Eagle: Hitler, the United States and theOrigins of the Second World War. London: Bodley Head, 1968, 297 pp. (X.709/6483)
DALLEK, ROBERT. Democrat and Diplomat: The Life of William E. Dodd. NewYork: Oxford University Press, 1968, 415 pp. (X.709/9014)
DODD, WILLIAM E. Ambassador Dodd's Diary, 1933-1938. Edited by William E.Dodd, Jr., and Martha Dodd. London: Gollancz, 1941, 452 pp. (9101.b.1)
FARNHAM, BARBARA R. Roosevelt and the Munich Crisis: A Study of PoliticalDecision-making. Princeton, N.J., and Chichester: Princeton University Press, 1997,313 pp. (YC.1998.b.2213)
FRIEDLÄNDER, SAUL. Prelude to Downfall: Hitler and the United States, 1939-1941. Translated by Aline B. and Alexander Werth. London: Chatto & Windus, 1967, 328pp. (X.709/6359)
FRYE, ALTON. Nazi Germany and the American Hemisphere, 1933-1941. NewHaven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1967, 229 pp. (Ac.2692.md/3)
GOTTLIEB, MOSHE R. American Anti-Nazi Resistance, 1933-1941: An HistoricalAnalysis. New York: Ktav Pub. House, 1982, 426 pp. (X.800/38794)
HART-DAVIS, DUFF. Hitler's Games: The 1936 Olympics. London: Century,1986, 256 pp. (YC.1986.a.1658); Sevenoaks: Coronet, 1988, 256 pp. (YC.1988.a.9545)
204
HEARDEN, PATRICK J. Roosevelt Confronts Hitler: America's Entry into World WarII. De Kalb: Northern Illinois University Press, 1987, 328 pp. (YH.1988.a.651)
HERZSTEIN, ROBERT E. Roosevelt and Hitler: Prelude to War. New York: Paragon House, 1989, 500 pp. (YA.1991.b.9287); New York and Chichester: Wiley,1994, 500 pp. (YA.1997.a.1626)
HIGHAM, CHARLES. Trading with the Enemy: An Exposé of the Nazi-AmericanMoney Plot, 1933-1949. London: Hale, 1983, 277 pp. (X.809/57463)
HILTON, STANLEY E. Hitler's Secret War in South America, 1939-1945: GermanMilitary Espionage and Allied Counterespionage in Brazil. Baton Rouge and London: Louisiana State University Press, 1981, 353 pp. (X.800/30692)
LOCHNER, LOUIS P. Herbert Hoover and Germany. New York: Macmillan, 1960,244 pp. (9196.1.27)
MANDELL, RICHARD D. The Nazi Olympics. London: Souvenir Press, 1972, 316pp. (X.629/4437)
OFFNER, ARNOLD A. American Appeasement: United States Foreign Policy andGermany, 1933-1938. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of Harvard University Press,1969, 328 pp. (X.700/3893); New York: Norton, 1976, 328 pp. (X.708/22291)
OLYMPIC GAMES. Olympic Games 1936: Official Organ of the XI. Olympic GamesBerlin 1936, no. 15, 88 pp. (Cup.1264.hh.33)
SCHUKER, STEPHEN A. American 'Reparations' to Germany, 1919-33: Implicationsfor Third World Debt Crisis. Princeton, N.J.: Dept. of Economics, PrincetonUniversity, 1988, 170 pp. (DSC 6612.955 61)
SCHULER, FRIEDRICH E. Mexico Between Hitler and Roosevelt: Mexican ForeignRelations in the Age of Lázaro Cárdenas, 1934-1940. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1998, 269 pp. (DSC 98/20039)
SMITH, ARTHUR L. The Deutschtum of Nazi Germany and the United States. TheHague: Martinus Nijhoff, 1965, 172 pp. (W.P.2005/16)
TURROU, LEON G. The Nazi Spy Conspiracy in America. London: Harrap, 1939,276 pp. (20032.h.39)
WILSON, HUGH R. A Career Diplomat; The Third Chapter: The Third Reich. Editedby Hugh Wilson, Jr. New York: Vantage Press, 1960, 112 pp. (X.708/618)
ZALAMPAS, MICHAEL. Adolf Hitler and the Third Reich in American Magazines,1923-1939. Bowling Green, Ohio: Bowling Green State University Popular Press,1989, 266 pp. (YA.1992.b.1543)
e. Italy
205
DIGGINS, JOHN P. Mussolini and Fascism: The View from America. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1972, 524 pp. (X.800/6545)
HARRIS, BRICE. The United States and the Italo-Ethiopian Crisis. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press, 1964, 187 pp. (X.709/4620)
HARRIS, JOSEPH E. African-American Reactions to War in Ethiopia, 1936-1941. Baton Rouge: Louisiana State University Press, 1994, 185 pp. (YC.1996.b.46)
SALVEMINI, GAETANO. Italian Fascist Activities in the United States. New York: Center for Migration Studies, 1977, 267 pp. (X.800/15021)
SCHMITZ, DAVID F. The United States and Fascist Italy, 1922-1940. Chapel Hilland London: University of North Carolina Press, 1988, 273 pp. (YH.1988.b.929)
SCOTT, WILLIAM R. The Sons of Sheba's Race: African Americans and the Italo-Ethiopian War, 1935-1941. Bloomington: Indiana University Press, 1993, 288 pp. (ORW.1993.a.2504 OIOC)
f. Mexico
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. In Defense of La Raza: The Los Angeles MexicanConsulate and the Mexican Community, 1929 to 1936. Tucson: University of ArizonaPress, 1982, 137 pp. (YA.1989.a.16903)
BALDERRAMA, FRANCISCO E. and RAYMOND RODRÍGUEZ. Decade ofBetrayal: Mexican Repatriation in the 1930s. Albuquerque: University of New MexicoPress, 1995, 283 pp. (DSC 95/30384)
BODAYLA, STEPHEN D. Financial Diplomacy: The United States and Mexico, 1919-1933. New York and London: Garland, 1987, 216 pp. (YC.1988.a.8196)
HOFFMAN, ABRAHAM. Unwanted Mexican Americans in the Great Depression: Repatriation Pressures, 1929-1939. Tucson: University of Arizona Press, 1976, 207 pp. (X.700/25335)
KNIGHT, ALAN. U.S.-Mexican Relations, 1910-1940: An Interpretation. San Diego: Center for U.S. Mexican Studies, University of California, San Diego, 1987, 149 pp. (DSC 5917.1275 28)
MEYER, LORENZO. Mexico and the United States in the Oil Controversy, 1917-1942. Austin and London: University of Texas Press, 1977, 367 pp. (X.320/11064)
REISLER, MARK. By the Sweat of Their Brow: Mexican Immigrant Labor in the UnitedStates, 1900-1940. Westport, Conn., and London: Greenwood, 1976, 298 pp. (X.529/31635)
206
SCHULER, FRIEDRICH E. Mexico Between Hitler and Roosevelt: Mexican ForeignRelations in the Age of Lázaro Cárdenas, 1934-1940. Albuquerque: University of NewMexico Press, 1998, 269 pp. (DSC 98/20039)
SMITH, ROBERT F. The United States and Revolutionary Nationalism in Mexico,1916-1932. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1972, 288 pp. (X.809/15728)
g. Spain
BOWERS, CLAUDE G. My Mission to Spain: Watching the Rehearsal for World WarII. London: Gollancz, 1954, 437 pp. (08042.c.41)
GERASSI, JOHN. The Premature Antifascists: North American Volunteers in the SpanishCivil War, 1936-39: An Oral History. New York: Praeger, 1986, 275 pp. (DSC86/13735)
GUTTMANN, ALLEN, ed. American Neutrality and the Spanish Civil War. Boston: Heath, 1963, 115 pp. (9196.k.5/39)
GUTTMANN, ALLEN. The Wound in the Heart: America and the Spanish Civil War. New York: Free Press of Glencoe, 1962, 292 pp. (9317.h.14)
JOHNSTON, VERLE B. Legions of Babel: The International Brigades in the SpanishCivil War. University Park and London: Pennsylvania State University Press, 1967,228 pp. (X.709/6315)
LANDIS, ARTHUR H. The Abraham Lincoln Brigade. New York: Citadel Press,1967, 677 pp. (X.639/3014)
LITTLE, DOUGLAS. Malevolent Neutrality: The United States, Great Britain and theOrigins of the Spanish Civil War. Ithaca, N.Y., and London: Cornell University Press,1985, 290 pp. (YH.1988.b.628)
RICHARDSON, R. DAN. Comintern Army: The International Brigades and theSpanish Civil War. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1982, 232 pp. (X.809/57466)
ROSENSTONE, ROBERT ALLAN. Crusade of the Left: The Lincoln Battalion in theSpanish Civil War. New York: Pegasus, 1969, 415 pp. (X.809/12079)
TAYLOR, F. JAY. The United States and the Spanish Civil War. New York: Bookman Associates, 1956, 288 pp. (9617.e.24)
TRAINA, RICHARD PAUL. American Diplomacy and the Spanish Civil War. Bloomington and London: Indiana University Press, 1968, 301 pp. (X.700/3435)
h. Turkey
207
TRASK, ROGER R. The United States Response to Turkish Nationalism and Reform,1914-1939. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1971, 280 pp. (X.800/5541)
i. Union of Soviet Socialist Republics [See alsoIII.I.3. Government and Politics: OppositionMovements and Protest Movements: Communism]
BENNETT, EDWARD M. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Search for Security: American-Soviet Relations, 1933-1939. Wilmington, Del.: Scholarly Resources, 1985, 213 pp. (DSC 86/00257)
BENNETT, EDWARD M. Franklin D. Roosevelt and the Search for Victory: American-Soviet Relations, 1939-1945. Wilmington, Del.: SR Books, 1990, 207 pp. (YA.1992.b.4128)
BENSON, ROBERT L. and MICHAEL WARNER, eds. Venona: Soviet Espionageand the American Response, 1939-1957. Laguna Hills, Calif.: Aegean Park, 1996, 450pp. (DSC 3490.15546 75)
BISHOP, DONALD GORDON. The Roosevelt-Litvinov Agreements: The AmericanView. Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press, 1965, 297 pp. (X.700/1700)
BROWDER, ROBERT P. The Origins of Soviet-American Diplomacy. Princeton,N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1953, 256 pp. (8096.c.13)
BUEHLER, E. C., comp. Selected Articles on Recognition of Soviet Russia. New York: Wilson, 1931, 387 pp. (Mic.A.17154)
DAVIES, JOSEPH E. Mission to Moscow. London: Gollancz, 1942, 415 pp. (09455.df.55)
DE SANTIS, HUGH. The Diplomacy of Silence: The American Foreign Service, the SovietUnion and the Cold War, 1933-1947. Chicago and London: University of ChicagoPress, 1980, 270 pp. (X.800/30471)
DUNN, DENNIS J. Caught Between Roosevelt and Stalin: American Ambassadors toMoscow. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1998, 394 pp. (DSC 98/07638)
EAGLES, KEITH D. Ambassador Joseph E. Davies and American-Soviet Relations, 1937-1941. New York: Garland, 1985, 371 pp. (YC.1988.a.8129)
FARNSWORTH, BEATRICE. William C. Bullitt and the Soviet Union. Bloomington and London: Indiana University Press, 1967, 244 pp. (X.709/5813)
FILENE, PETER G. Americans and the Soviet Experiment, 1917-1933. Cambridge,Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1967, 389 pp. (X.709/5783)
208
FILENE, PETER G., ed. American Views of Soviet Russia, 1917-1965. Homewood,Ill.: Dorsey Press, 1968, 404 pp. (X.709/13683)
GRAHAM, OTIS L., JR., ed. Soviet-American Dialogue on the New Deal. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1989, 296 pp. (DSC 8359.0769 vol 1)
HAYNES, JOHN E. and HARVEY KLEHR. Venona: Decoding Soviet Espionage inAmerica. New Haven, Conn., and London: Yale University Press, 1999, 487 pp. (YC.1999.b.4337)
FISCHER, LOUIS. Why Recognize Russia? The Arguments for and against theRecognition of the Soviet Government by the United States. New York: J. Cape & H.Smith, 1931, 298 pp. (8094.dd.16)
LEFFLER, MELVYN P. The Spector of Communism: The United States and the Originsof the Cold War, 1917-1953. New York: Hill and Wang, 1994, 147 pp. (DSC94/25447)
LEVERING, RALPH B. American Opinion and the Russian Alliance, 1939-1945. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1976, 262 pp. (X.800/14688)
LOVENSTEIN, MENO. American Opinion of Soviet Russia. Washington, D.C.: American Council on Public Affairs, 1941, 210 pp. (8093.d.55)
MORRIS, M. WAYNE. Stalin's Famine and Roosevelt's Recognition of Russia. Lanham,Md., and London: University Press of America, 1994, 224 pp. (YC.1994.a.3581)
PILARSKI, KIM, translator. Soviet-U.S. Relations, 1933-1942. Moscow: ProgressPub., 1989, 315 pp. (YA.1993.a.12024)
REYNOLDS, DAVID, WARREN F. KIMBALL and A. O. CHUBARIAN, eds. Allies at War: The Soviet, American and British Experience, 1939-1945. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1994, 456 pp. (YC.1994.a.1662)
RICHMAN, JOHN. The United States and the Soviet Union: The Decision to Recognize. Raleigh, N.C.: Camberleigh & Hall, 1980, 287 pp. (DSC 80/15464)
SIEGEL, KATHERINE A. S. Loans and Legitimacy: The Evolution of Soviet-AmericanRelations, 1919-1933. Lexington: University Press of Kentucky, 1996, 211 pp. (DSC96/25424)
SOBEL, ROBERT. The Origins of Interventionism: The United States and the Russo-Finnish War. New York: Bookman Associates, 1960, 204 pp. (X.709/838)
WILSON, JOAN HOFF. Ideology and Economics: U.S. Relations with the Soviet Union,1918-1933. Columbia: University of Missouri Press, 1974, 192 pp. (X.529/20092)
j. United Kingdom
209
BESCHLOSS, MICHAEL R. Kennedy and Roosevelt: The Uneasy Alliance. NewYork: Norton, 1980, 318 pp. (X.800/35375)
COWMAN, IAN. Dominion or Decline: Anglo-American Naval Relations on the Pacific,1937-1941. Oxford: Berg, 1996, 327 pp. (YC.1997.a.3278)
DE BEDTS, RALPH F. Ambassador Joseph Kennedy, 1938-1940: An Anatomy ofAppeasement. New York: Lang, 1985, 263 pp. (YA.1990.a.10160)
DIZIKES, JOHN. Britain, Roosevelt and the New Deal: British Opinion 1932-1938. New York and London: Garland, 1979, 330 pp. (X.800/32899)
DRUMMOND, IAN and NORMAN HILLMER. Negotiating Freer Trade: TheUnited Kingdom, the United States, Canada and the Free Trade Agreements of 1938. Waterloo, Ont.: Wilfred Laurier University Press, 1989, 197 pp. (DSC 89/l4851)
KREIDER, CARL J. The Anglo-American Trade Agreement: A Study of British andAmerican Commercial Policies, 1934-1939. Princeton, N.J.: Dept. of Economics andSocial Institutions, Princeton University, 1943, 270 pp. (Ac.1833.ga)
LASH, JOSEPH P. Roosevelt and Churchill, 1939-1941: The Partnership that Saved theWest. London: Deutsch, 1977, 528 pp. (X.800/26202)
LEUTZE, JAMES. Bargaining for Supremacy: Anglo-American Naval Collaboration,1937-1941. Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina, 1977, 328 pp. (X.800/28720)
MACDONALD, CALLUM A. The United States, Britain and Appeasement, 1936-1939. London: Macmillan in association with St. Antony's College, Oxford, 1981,220 pp. (X.809/49136)
REYNOLDS, DAVID. The Creation of the Anglo-American Alliance, 1937-41: A Studyin Competitive Co-operation. London: Europa, 1981, 397 pp. (X.800/32101)
REYNOLDS, DAVID. Lord Lothian and Anglo-American Relations, 1939-1940. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society, 1983, 65 pp. (Ac.1830/3)
REYNOLDS, DAVID, WARREN F. KIMBALL and A. O. CHUBARIAN, eds. Allies at War: The Soviet, American and British Experience, 1939-1945. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1994, 456 pp. (YC.1994.a.1662)
ROCK, WILLIAM R. Chamberlain and Roosevelt: British Foreign Policy and the UnitedStates, 1937-1940. Columbus: Ohio State University Press, 1988, 330 pp. (YH.1989.b.791)
ROWLAND, BENJAMIN M. Commercial Conflict and Foreign Policy: A Study inAnglo-American Relations, 1932-1938. New York: Garland, 1987, 431 pp. (YC.1988.a.8209)
210
WEISS, STEVE. Allies in Conflict: Anglo-American Strategic Negotiations, 1938-1944. Basingstoke: Macmillan, 1996, 213 pp. (YC.1997.a.798)
211
A special grant from the late Viscount Eccles helped to fund the compilation of TheUnited States and the 1930s: A Selective Guide to Materials in the British Library. Theguide's distribution has been made possible through a donation by current and formermembers of the Council of the Grolier Club of New York, in memory of the lateViscount and as a token of its respect and affection for his widow, Mary.
212